Ilom Oracle Ii.pdf

  • Uploaded by: ignacio ferrer
  • 0
  • 0
  • October 2019
  • PDF

This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA


Overview

Download & View Ilom Oracle Ii.pdf as PDF for free.

More details

  • Words: 74,753
  • Pages: 480
Sun SPARC® Enterprise M3000/M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual XSCF Control Package (XCP) 1080

Sun Microsystems, Inc. www.sun.com

Part No. 820-5872-10 October 2008, Revision A Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback

Copyright 2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. and FUJITSU LIMITED, 1-1, Kamikodanaka 4-chome, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken 211-8588, Japan. All rights reserved. Sun Microsystems, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited each own or control intellectual property rights relating to products and technology described in this document, and such products, technology and this document are protected by copyright laws, patents and other intellectual property laws and international treaties. The intellectual property rights of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited in such products, technology and this document include, without limitation, one or more of the United States patents listed at http://www.sun.com/patents and one or more additional patents or patent applications in the United States or other countries. This document and the product and technology to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of such product or technology, or of this document, may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Fujitsu Limited and Sun Microsystems, Inc., and their applicable licensors, if any. The furnishing of this document to you does not give you any rights or licenses, express or implied, with respect to the product or technology to which it pertains, and this document does not contain or represent any commitment of any kind on the part of Fujitsu Limited or Sun Microsystems, Inc., or any affiliate of either of them. This document and the product and technology described in this document may incorporate third-party intellectual property copyrighted by and/or licensed from suppliers to Fujitsu Limited and/or Sun Microsystems, Inc., including software and font technology. Per the terms of the GPL or LGPL, a copy of the source code governed by the GPL or LGPL, as applicable, is available upon request by the End User. Please contact Fujitsu Limited or Sun Microsystems, Inc. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the University of California. UNIX is a registered trademark in the U.S. and in other countries, exclusively licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Java, Netra, Solaris, Sun Ray, Answerbook2, docs.sun.com, OpenBoot, and Sun Fire are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. SPARC64 is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc., used under license by Fujitsu Microelectronics, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited. The OPEN LOOK and Sun™ Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for its users and licensees. Sun acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer industry. Sun holds a non-exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface, which license also covers Sun’s licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUIs and otherwise comply with Sun’s written license agreements. United States Government Rights - Commercial use. U.S. Government users are subject to the standard government user license agreements of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and Fujitsu Limited and the applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements. Disclaimer: The only warranties granted by Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. or any affiliate of either of them in connection with this document or any product or technology described herein are those expressly set forth in the license agreement pursuant to which the product or technology is provided. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN SUCH AGREEMENT, FUJITSU LIMITED, SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. AND THEIR AFFILIATES MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED) REGARDING SUCH PRODUCT OR TECHNOLOGY OR THIS DOCUMENT, WHICH ARE ALL PROVIDED AS IS, AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. Unless otherwise expressly set forth in such agreement, to the extent allowed by applicable law, in no event shall Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. or any of their affiliates have any liability to any third party under any legal theory for any loss of revenues or profits, loss of use or data, or business interruptions, or for any indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. Copyright 2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. et FUJITSU LIMITED, 1-1, Kamikodanaka 4chome, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken 211-8588, Japon. Tous droits réservés. Sun Microsystems, Inc. et Fujitsu Limited détiennent et contrôlent toutes deux des droits de propriété intellectuelle relatifs aux produits et technologies décrits dans ce document. De même, ces produits, technologies et ce document sont protégés par des lois sur le copyright, des brevets, d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle et des traités internationaux. Les droits de propriété intellectuelle de Sun Microsystems, Inc. et Fujitsu Limited concernant ces produits, ces technologies et ce document comprennent, sans que cette liste soit exhaustive, un ou plusieurs des brevets déposés aux États-Unis et indiqués à l’adresse http://www.sun.com/patents de même qu’un ou plusieurs brevets ou applications brevetées supplémentaires aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Ce document, le produit et les technologies afférents sont exclusivement distribués avec des licences qui en restreignent l’utilisation, la copie, la distribution et la décompilation. Aucune partie de ce produit, de ces technologies ou de ce document ne peut être reproduite sous quelque forme que ce soit, par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans l’autorisation écrite préalable de Fujitsu Limited et de Sun Microsystems, Inc., et de leurs éventuels bailleurs de licence. Ce document, bien qu’il vous ait été fourni, ne vous confère aucun droit et aucune licence, expresses ou tacites, concernant le produit ou la technologie auxquels il se rapporte. Par ailleurs, il ne contient ni ne représente aucun engagement, de quelque type que ce soit, de la part de Fujitsu Limited ou de Sun Microsystems, Inc., ou des sociétés affiliées.

Ce document, et le produit et les technologies qu’il décrit, peuvent inclure des droits de propriété intellectuelle de parties tierces protégés par copyright et/ou cédés sous licence par des fournisseurs à Fujitsu Limited et/ou Sun Microsystems, Inc., y compris des logiciels et des technologies relatives aux polices de caractères. Cette distribution peut comprendre des composants développés par des tierces parties. Des parties de ce produit pourront être dérivées des systèmes Berkeley BSD licenciés par l’Université de Californie. UNIX est une marque déposée aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays et licenciée exclusivement par X/Open Company, Ltd. Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, Java, Netra, Solaris, Sun Ray, Answerbook2, docs.sun.com, OpenBoot, et Sun Fire sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Fujitsu et le logo Fujitsu sont des marques déposées de Fujitsu Limited. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les produits portant les marques SPARC sont basés sur une architecture développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc. SPARC64 est une marques déposée de SPARC International, Inc., utilisée sous le permis par Fujitsu Microelectronics, Inc. et Fujitsu Limited. L’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et Sun™ a été développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses utilisateurs et licenciés. Sun reconnaît les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le développement du concept des interfaces d’utilisation visuelle ou graphique pour l’industrie de l’informatique. Sun détient une license non exclusive de Xerox sur l’interface d’utilisation graphique Xerox, cette licence couvrant également les licenciés de Sun qui mettent en place l’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et qui, en outre, se conforment aux licences écrites de Sun. Droits du gouvernement américain - logiciel commercial. Les utilisateurs du gouvernement américain sont soumis aux contrats de licence standard de Sun Microsystems, Inc. et de Fujitsu Limited ainsi qu’aux clauses applicables stipulées dans le FAR et ses suppléments. Avis de non-responsabilité: les seules garanties octroyées par Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. ou toute société affiliée de l’une ou l’autre entité en rapport avec ce document ou tout produit ou toute technologie décrit(e) dans les présentes correspondent aux garanties expressément stipulées dans le contrat de licence régissant le produit ou la technologie fourni(e). SAUF MENTION CONTRAIRE EXPRESSÉMENT STIPULÉE DANS CE CONTRAT, FUJITSU LIMITED, SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. ET LES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES REJETTENT TOUTE REPRÉSENTATION OU TOUTE GARANTIE, QUELLE QU’EN SOIT LA NATURE (EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE) CONCERNANT CE PRODUIT, CETTE TECHNOLOGIE OU CE DOCUMENT, LESQUELS SONT FOURNIS EN L’ÉTAT. EN OUTRE, TOUTES LES CONDITIONS, REPRÉSENTATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE À LA QUALITÉ MARCHANDE, À L’APTITUDE À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE OU À L’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, SONT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISÉE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE. Sauf mention contraire expressément stipulée dans ce contrat, dans la mesure autorisée par la loi applicable, en aucun cas Fujitsu Limited, Sun Microsystems, Inc. ou l’une de leurs filiales ne sauraient être tenues responsables envers une quelconque partie tierce, sous quelque théorie juridique que ce soit, de tout manque à gagner ou de perte de profit, de problèmes d’utilisation ou de perte de données, ou d’interruptions d’activités, ou de tout dommage indirect, spécial, secondaire ou consécutif, même si ces entités ont été préalablement informées d’une telle éventualité. LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE “EN L’ETAT” ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS, DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L’APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L’ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON.

Contents

Preface Intro

v 1

addboard

7

addcodlicense addfru

11

13

adduser

15

applynetwork cfgdevice

23

clockboard console

17

29

31

deleteboard

33

deletecodlicense deletefru

39

deleteuser

41

disableuser

43

dumpconfig enableuser exit

45 51

53

flashupdate fmadm

55

59

fmdump fmstat

37

61 69

getflashimage

73 Contents

i

ioxadm man

79

89

moveboard

91

nslookup

95

password

97

ping

101

poweroff

103

poweron

107

prtfru

111

rebootxscf

115

replacefru

117

reset

119

resetdateoffset restoreconfig

123 125

restoredefaults

133

sendbreak

139

setaltitude

141

setarchiving setaudit

143

147

setautologout setcod

155

setdate setdcl

153

159 163

setdomainmode setdomparam setdscp

169 177

181

setdualpowerfeed setemailreport sethostname

ii

187 191

sethttps

193

setldap

199

setlocale

185

203

setlocator

205

setlookup

207

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • October 2008

setnameserver setnetwork setntp

209

211

217

setpasswordpolicy

221

setpowerupdelay setprivileges setroute

225

227

231

setshutdowndelay setsmtp

237

setsnmp

241

setsnmpusm

247

setsnmpvacm setssh

235

251

255

settelnet

261

settimezone setupfru

263

271

setupplatform

273

showaltitude

279

showarchiving showaudit

281

285

showautologout showboards showcod

289

291

297

showcodlicense showcodusage

299 301

showconsolepath showdate showdcl

307

309 311

showdevices

317

showdomainmode

323

showdomainstatus

327

showdscp

329

showdualpowerfeed showemailreport

333

335 Contents

iii

showenvironment showfru

337

343

showhardconf

345

showhostname

353

showhttps

355

showldap

357

showlocale

359

showlocator showlogs

361 363

showlookup

379

showmonitorlog

381

shownameserver

383

shownetwork shownotice showntp

385 391

393

showpasswordpolicy

397

showpowerupdelay showresult

401

showroute

403

399

showshutdowndelay showsmtp

409

showsnmp

411

showsnmpusm

415

showsnmpvacm showssh

417

419

showstatus

423

showtelnet

425

showtimezone showuser

427

431

snapshot

433

switchscf

441

testsb

443

traceroute

449

unlockmaintenance iv

407

453

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • October 2008

version

455

viewaudit who

459

467

Contents

v

Preface This manual contains the man pages for the eXtended System Control Facility (XSCF) firmware for Sun SPARC® Enterprise M3000/M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 servers.

Overview of Man Page Structure The following table describes the sections included in man pages. The man pages of each manual section generally follow this order, but include only needed headings. For example, if there are no examples, there is no EXAMPLES section. Refer to the Intro page for a description of each man page, and man(1) for more information about man pages in general. NAME

This section gives the names of the commands or functions documented, followed by a brief description of what they do.

SYNOPSIS

This section shows the syntax of commands or functions. Options and arguments are alphabetized, with single-letter arguments first, and options with arguments next, unless a different argument order is required. The following special characters are used in this section: [ ]

Brackets. The option or argument enclosed in these brackets is optional. If the brackets are omitted, the argument must be specified.

v

vi



Ellipses. Several values may be provided for the previous argument, or the previous argument can be specified multiple times, for example “filename...”.

|

Separator. Only one of the arguments separated by this character can be specified at one time.

{ }

Braces. The options and/or arguments enclosed within braces are interdependent, such that everything enclosed must be treated as a unit.

DESCRIPTION

This section defines the functionality and behavior of the service. Thus it describes concisely what the command does. It does not discuss OPTIONS or cite EXAMPLES.

OPTIONS

This lists the command options with a concise summary of what each option does. The options are listed literally and in alphabetical order. Possible arguments to options are discussed under the option, and where appropriate, default values are supplied.

OPERANDS

This section lists the command operands and describes how they affect the actions of the command.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

This section includes further description.

EXAMPLES

This section provides examples of usage or of how to use a command or function. Wherever possible, a complete example including command-line entry and machine response is shown. Most examples illustrate concepts from the SYNOPSIS, DESCRIPTION, OPTIONS, and OPERANDS sections.

EXIT STATUS

This section lists the values the command returns to the calling program or shell and the conditions that cause these values to be returned. Usually, zero is returned for successful completion and values other than zero for various error conditions.

SEE ALSO

This section lists references to other man pages.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • October 2008

Intro(8)

NAME DESCRIPTION

Intro - list the commands provided by the XSCF firmware Intro(8) command lists the commands provided by the XSCF firmware of the M3000/M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 servers. Some commands are used in a different way or not supported on your server. For details, refer to the pages of each command.

LIST OF COMMANDS

In XSCF, the following commands are provided:

Intro, intro

list the commands provided by the XSCF firmware

addboard

configure an eXtended System Board(XSB) into the domain configuration or assigns it to the domain configuration

addcodlicense

add a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU) license key to the COD license database

addfru

add a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)

adduser

create an XSCF user account

applynetwork

reflect the information that has been set for the XSCF network

cfgdevice

connect a CD-RW/DVD-RW and TAPE drive unit to the port, disconnect it from the port, or display the status of the drive

clockboard

set or display the clock control unit used at system startup

console

connect to a domain console

deleteboard

disconnect an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the domain configuration

deletecodlicense

remove a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU) license key from the COD license database

deletefru

delete a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)

deleteuser

delete an XSCF user account

disableuser

disable an XSCF user account

dumpconfig

save system configuration information

enableuser

enable an XSCF user account

exit

exit the XSCF shell

flashupdate

update the firmware

fmadm

fault management configuration tool

Intro

1

Intro(8)

2

fmdump

view fault management logs

fmstat

report fault management module statistics

getflashimage

download a firmware image file

ioxadm

manage External I/O Expansion Units

man

display manual pages of specified XSCF shell command

moveboard

move an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the current domain to another

nslookup

refer to the DNS server for the host

password

manage user passwords and expiration settings

ping

sends the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packets to the network host or the network device

poweroff

turn off the power to the specified domain

poweron

turn on the power to the specified domain

prtfru

display FRUID data on the system and External I/O Expansion Unit

rebootxscf

reset the XSCF

replacefru

replace a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)

reset

reset the specified domain

resetdateoffset

reset the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain.

restoreconfig

restore the system configuration information previously saved by dumpconfig

restoredefaults

delete the setting and the log information that stored in the server or the XSCF unit, and restore it to the state as of the factory shipment

sendbreak

send a break signal to the specified domain

setaltitude

set the altitude of the system or whether or not the air filter installed

setarchiving

configure the log archiving functionality

setaudit

manage the system auditing functionality

setautologout

set the session timeout time of the XSCF shell

setcod

set up the Capacity on Demand (COD) resources used for domains

setdate

set the date and time of XSCF

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

Intro(8)

setdcl

set a domain component list (DCL)

setdomainmode

set a domain mode

setdomparam

forcibly rewrite OpenBoot PROM environment variables

setdscp

set the IP address assignments for the Domain to Service Processor Communications Protocol (DSCP)

setdualpowerfeed

set dual power feed mode

setemailreport

set up the email report configuration data

sethostname

set a host name and domain name for an XSCF unit

sethttps

start or stop the HTTPS service, which is used in the XSCF network. This command also performs authenticationrelated settings.

setldap

configure the Service Processor as a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) client

setlocale

sets the default locale of the XSCF

setlocator

control the blinking of the CHECK LED on the operator panel

setlookup

enable or disable the use of the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server for authentication and privilege lookup

setnameserver

set the domain name system (DNS) servers used in the XSCF network

setnetwork

sets or removes the network interface that used in XSCF

setntp

set the NTP servers used in the XSCF network

setpasswordpolicy manage the system password policy setpowerupdelay

set the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system startup

setprivileges

assign user privileges

setroute

set routing information for an XSCF network interface

setshutdowndelay

set the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

setsmtp

set up the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings

setsnmp

manage the SNMP agent

setsnmpusm

specify the SNMPv3 agent’s User-based Security Model (USM) configuration

Intro

3

Intro(8)

setsnmpvacm

modify the SNMPv3 agent’s View-based Access Control Model (VACM) configuration

setssh

set the SSH service used in the XSCF network. Also, generate the host public key, and register or delete the user public key, which are necessary for the SSH service

settelnet

start or stop the telnet service used in the XSCF network

settimezone

set the time zone and Daylight Saving Time of XSCF

setupfru

set up device hardware

setupplatform

set up platform specific settings

showaltitude

display the altitude of the system and whether the air filter installed

showarchiving

display log archiving configuration and status

showaudit

display the current auditing system state

showautologout

display the session timeout time of the XSCF shell

showboards

display information on an eXtended System Board (XSB)

showcod

display Capacity on Demand (COD) configuration information

showcodlicense

display the current Capacity on Demand (COD) right-touse (RTU) licenses stored in the COD license database

showcodusage

display the current usage statistics for Capacity on Demand (COD) resources

showconsolepath

display information on the domain console that is currently connected

showdate

show the date and time of XSCF

showdcl

display the current domain component list (DCL)

showdevices

display current information on an eXtended System Board (XSB)

showdomainmode

display the domain mode

showdomainstatus

display the current domain component list (DCL)

showdscp

display the IP addresses assigned to the Domain to Service Processor Communications Protocol (DSCP)

showdualpowerfeed display the current setting of dual power feed mode showemailreport

4

display the email report configuration data

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

Intro(8)

showenvironment

display the intake air temperature and humidity, temperature sensor information, voltage sensor information, and fan speed information about the system

showfru

display the hardware settings of specified device

showhardconf

display information about Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) installed in the system

showhostname

display the current host name for the XSCF unit

showhttps

display the status of the HTTPS service set for the XSCF network

showldap

display the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) configuration for the Service Processor

showlocale

display the current setting for the XSCF locale

showlocator

display the state of the CHECK LED on the operator panel

showlogs

display the specified log

showlookup

display the configuration for authentication and privileges lookup

showmonitorlog

display the contents of monitoring messages in real time.

shownameserver

display the registered domain name system (DNS) servers specified on the XSCF network

shownetwork

display information of network interfaces for XSCF

shownotice

display copyright and license information for the copyright information for eXtended System Control Facility (XSCF) Control Package (XCP)

showntp

display the NTP servers currently set for the XSCF network

showpasswordpolicy display the current password settings showpowerupdelay

display the current settings for the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system startup

showresult

display the exit status of the most recently executed command

showroute

display routing information for an XSCF network interface

showshutdowndelay show the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) showsmtp

display the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) configuration information

Intro

5

Intro(8)

showsnmp

display the configuration information and current status of the SNMP agent

showsnmpusm

display the current User-based Security Model (USM) information for the SNMP agent

showsnmpvacm

display the current View-based Access Control Access (VACM) information for the SNMP agent

showssh

display the status, host public keys, fingerprint, or user public keys of the SSH service configured for the XSCF network

showstatus

display the degraded Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)

showtelnet

display the current status of the telnet service for the XSCF network

showtimezone

display the XSCF time zone and Daylight Saving Time information of current settings

showuser

display user account information

snapshot

collect and transfer environment, log, error, and FRUID data

switchscf

switch the XSCF unit between the active and standby states

testsb

perform an initial diagnosis of the specified physical system board (PSB)

traceroute

displays the route packets take to the specified network host or the network device

unlockmaintenance forcibly release the locked status of XSCF

6

version

display firmware version

viewaudit

display audit records

who

display a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the XSCF

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

addboard(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

addboard - configure an eXtended System Board (XSB) into the domain configuration or assign it to the domain configuration addboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] [-c configure] -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...] addboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c assign -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...] addboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c reserve -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...] addboard -h

DESCRIPTION

The addboard(8) command, based on domain component list (DCL), configures a XSB into the domain configuration or assigns it to the domain configuration. The addboard(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. One of the following configuration methods can be specified:

Privileges

configure

Configures an XSB into the specified domain configuration. The incorporated XSB can be accessed from the Solaris OS.

assign

Assigns an XSB to the specified domain. The assigned XSB is reserved for the specified domain and cannot be configured in or assigned to other domains. The assigned XSB is configured in the domain by reboot or execution of the addboard(8) command with "-c configure".

reserve

Reserves incorporation of an XSB into the domain configuration. The action of "reserve" is the same as "assign."

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm

Can run this command only for your managed domains.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c assign

Assigns an XSB to the domain configuration. If the -c option is omitted, "-c configure" is used.

-c configure

Configures an XSB in the domain configuration. If the -c option is omitted, "-c configure" is used.

-c reserve

Reserves incorporation of an XSB into the domain configuration. If the -c option is omitted, "-c configure" is used.

System Administration

7

addboard(8)

-d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the domain in which an XSB is to be configured or to which it is to be assigned. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-f

Forcibly incorporates into a domain an XSB.

Caution – If the -f option is used to forcibly add an XSB to a domain, all the added hardware resources may not work normally. For this reason, use of the -f option is not recommended in normal operation. If the -f option must be specified, verify the status of every added XSB and device.

OPERANDS

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-v

Displays a detailed message. If this option is specified with the -q option, the -v option is ignored.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following operand is supported: xsb

Specifies the XSB number to be configured or assigned. Multiple xsb operands are permitted, separated by spaces. The following xsb form is accepted: x–y where:

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

8

x

An integer from 00–15.

y

An integer from 0–3.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



If "-c configure" is specified when either the domain power has been turned off or the Solaris OS is not running, an error occurs.



When "-c configure" is specified, hardware diagnosis is performed on the XSB before it is incorporated into the domain. Therefore, command execution may take time.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

addboard(8)

EXAMPLES



To use the addboard(8) command to configure or assign an XSB, DCL must be set up in advance using the setdcl(8) command.



If the addboard(8) command is executed under the progress of power-on or power-off processing, the busy status is returned. After that processing in the domain is completed, reexecute the command.



See the setdcl(8) and showdcl(8) commands for DCL.

EXAMPLE 1

Configures XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 into domain ID 0.

XSCF> addboard -y -c assign -d 0 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0

EXAMPLE 2

Configures XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 forcibly into domain ID 2.

XSCF> addboard -f -d 2 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), replacefru(8), setdcl(8), setdomainmode(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8),showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8), testsb(8)

System Administration

9

addboard(8)

10

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

addcodlicense(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

addcodlicense - add a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU) license key to the COD license database addcodlicense license-signature addcodlicense -h

DESCRIPTION

addcodlicense(8) adds the COD RTU specified license key to the COD license database on the Service Processor. The addcodlicense(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. When the license key is added, the quantity of headroom is reduced by the quantity provided by the license key. The quantity of headroom cannot be lower than 0.

Note – Before you run this command, you must obtain a COD license key. To obtain a license key, contact your sales representative. For details on COD RTU license keys, refer to the COD User’s Guide for your server. Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h

When used with other options or operands, an error occurs. OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: license-signature

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies the COD RTU license key to be added to the COD license database.

Adding a COD RTU License Key

XSCF> addcodlicense \ 01:84000000:104:0301010100:3:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

deletecodlicense(8), setcod(8), showcod(8), showcodlicense(8), showcodusage(8)

System Administration

11

addcodlicense(8)

12

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

addfru(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

addfru - add a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) addfru addfru -h

DESCRIPTION

The addfru(8) command adds an FRU. The addfru(8) command enables the user to make the settings that are required for FRU addition and related to selecting, confirming, and mounting FRUs, interactively using menus. The following FRUs can be added by the addfru(8) command:

Privileges



CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU)



I/O unit (IOU)



Fan unit (FANU)



Power supply unit (PSU)

You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -h

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

Displays usage statement.

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

deletefru(8), replacefru(8), setupfru(8), showfru(8), showhardconf(8), testsb(8), unlockmaintenance(8)

System Administration

13

addfru(8)

14

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

adduser(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

adduser - create an XSCF user account adduser [-u UID] user adduser -h

DESCRIPTION

adduser(8) creates a new local XSCF user account. This account is used to configure, operate, manage and administrate the XSCF firmware. Initially, this account has no password. It cannot be used for login until either the password is set (using password(8)) or Secure Shell (SSH) public key authentication is set for the user. The new account will be locked but not disabled. The system can support up to 100 local users with an average length of 10 characters for the user operand. When invoked without the -u option, adduser automatically assigns a UID for the user account. When invoked with the -u option adduser assigns the given UID to the user account. Automatic UIDs are assigned starting from 100. If the Service Processor is configured to use Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) for user account data, the user name and UID (if specified) must not already be in use, either locally or in LDAP. When a user is created, adduser(8) command stores the current password policy values in a file for the user. For more information on setting password policy see, setpasswordpolicy(8).

Privileges

You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-u UID

OPERANDS

Creates a new user with the given user identifier (UID). Specifying a UID is optional. If specified, the UID must be greater than or equal to 100; and 65534 and 65535 are reserved. If not specified, a UID is automatically assigned.

The following operand is supported: user

Specifies a valid user name to be added. The maximum length of the user name is 31 characters. New local XSCF user account can be combination of alpha-numeric, "-", or "_". Any combination of upper and lower case letters can be used. The first character must be an alphabetical character ("jsmith", "j_smith", "j_smith-0123", or "J_Smith-0123" for example).

System Administration

15

adduser(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Creating a New User

XSCF> adduser -u 359 jsmith

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

16

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

deleteuser(8), disableuser(8), enableuser(8), password(8), setldap(8), setpasswordpolicy(8), showldap(8), showpasswordpolicy(8), showuser(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised April 2008

applynetwork(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

applynetwork - reflect the information that has been set for the XSCF network applynetwork [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-M] applynetwork -h

DESCRIPTION

applynetwork(8) command reflects the information that has been set for the XSCF network to XSCF. When you set one of the following for the XSCF network, it is necessary to execute the applynetwork(8) command to reflect the information to XSCF. ■

XSCF host name



DNS domain name



IP address



netmask



routing

When you execute the applynetwork(8)command, it displays the information which has been set to XSCF host name, DNS domain name, name server, IP address, net mask, and routing. After reflected the information of XSCF network, use the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF, to complete the setting.

Note – If XSCF is reset without executing the applynetwork(8) command, network information that is set is not reflected in XSCF. Also, information that is set is deleted. Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.

System Administration

17

applynetwork(8)

EXAMPLES



Unless all of the host name, DNS domain name, IP address, net mask, and routing settings have been made on the target interface, it results in errors. Please execute the sethostname(8) and setnetwork(8) command to set all items, then reexecute the applynetwork(8) command.



To set to multiple interfaces, all of the host name, DNS domain name, IP address, and net mask settings need to be set on every interface. In these interfaces, if any of these setting items omitted, it results in errors.



To specify a host name, use the sethostname(8) command. To specify an IP address and net mask, use the setnetwork(8) command.



When the status is down in all network interfaces, it results in errors.



On the M8000/M9000 servers, when you set different netmask in the following interfaces, it results in errors. ■

xscf#0-lan#0, xscf#1-lan#0, lan#0



xscf#0-lan#1, xscf#1-lan#1, lan#1



xscf#0-if, xscf#1-if

EXAMPLE 1

Reflects the information that has been set for the XSCF network.

On the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers: XSCF> applynetwork The following network settings will be applied:

18

xscf#0 hostname

:hostname-0

DNS domain name

:example.com

nameserver

:10.23.4.3

interface

:xscf#0-lan#0

status

:up

IP address

:10.24.144.214

netmask

:255.255.255.0

route

:-n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1

interface

:xscf#0-lan#1

status

:down

IP address

:

netmask

:

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

applynetwork(8)

route

:

Continue? [y|n] :y

On the M8000/M9000 servers: XSCF> applynetwork The following network settings will be applied: xscf#0 hostname

:hostname-0

xscf#1 hostname

:hostname-1

DNS domain name

:example.com

nameserver

:10.23.4.3

interface

:xscf#0-lan#0

status

:up

IP address

:10.24.144.214

netmask

:255.255.255.0

route

: -n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1

interface

:xscf#0-lan#1

status

:down

IP address

:

netmask

:

route

:

interface

:xscf#0-if

status

:down

IP address

:10.24.100.1

netmask

:255.255.255.0

interface

:lan#0

status

:down

IP address

:

netmask

:

System Administration

19

applynetwork(8)

interface

:xscf#1-lan#0

status

:up

IP address

:10.24.144.215

netmask

:255.255.255.0

route

: -n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1

interface

:xscf#1-lan#1

status

:down

IP address

:

netmask

:

route

:

interface

:xscf#1-if

status

:down

IP address

:10.24.100.2

netmask

:255.255.255.0

interface

:lan#1

status

:down

IP address

:

netmask

:

Continue? [y|n] :y

EXAMPLE 2

Reflects the information that has been set for the XSCF network, on the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts.

XSCF> applynetwork -y The following network settings will be applied:

20

xscf#0 hostname

:hostname-0

DNS domain name

:example.com

nameserver

:10.23.4.3

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

applynetwork(8)

interface

:xscf#0-lan#0

status

:up

IP address

:10.24.144.214

netmask

:255.255.255.0

route

:-n 0.0.0.0 -m 0.0.0.0 -g 10.24.144.1

interface

:xscf#0-lan#1

status

:down

IP address

:

netmask

:

route

:

Continue? [y|n] :y Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the network settings. Please confirm that the settings have been applied by executing showhostname, shownetwork, showroute and shownameserver after rebooting the XSCF.

EXAMPLE 3

Reflects the information that has been set for the XSCF network. Suppresses prompts, and automatically answers "y" to all prompts.

XSCF> applynetwork -q -y

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

rebootxscf(8), sethostname(8), setnameserver(8), setnetwork(8), setroute(8)

System Administration

21

applynetwork(8)

22

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

cfgdevice(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

cfgdevice - connect the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit to the port, disconnect it from the port, or display the status of the drive cfgdevice [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c attach -p port_no cfgdevice [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c detach -p port_no cfgdevice -l [-M] cfgdevice -h

DESCRIPTION

The cfgdevice(8) connects the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit to the specified port, disconnects it from the domain, or displays the current status. The cfgdevice(8) command is available only for the M8000/M9000 servers. To connect the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit, the port number which is a PCI slot number on the I/O unit which installed IOU Onboard Device Card A (IOUA) needs to specify. Executing the cfgdevice(8) command, the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit is connected to specified port by the built-in switching unit. The current status of the drive that is displayed with this command includes the following types of status information: port_no

Port number of the port where the IOUA is installed and that can be connected to the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit. It is displayed in the "IOU number-PCI slot number" format.

IOU/SAS-status Connection status between IOUA and built-in switching unit. It is changed by specifying "attach" or "detach." ■

enable/disable: Setting status of the cfgdeive(8) command enable: Connected with "-c attach." disable: Not connected.



up/down: Logical connection between IOUA and built-in switching unit. up: Connected. down: Not connected.

System Administration

23

cfgdevice(8)

SAS-status

Connection status between I/O unit and the system. ■

enable/disable: Connection setting between I/O unit and the system. When starting a domain with no I/O unit, the "disable" may be displayed. enable: Yes disable: No



up/down: Logical connection between I/O unit and the system. up: Connected. down: Not connected.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

24

The following options are supported: -c attach

Connects the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit to the specified port.

-c detach

Disconnects the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit from the specified port.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-l

Displays the current status of the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit currently set up.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-p port_no

Specifies the number of the port, in the specified domain, to which the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit is to be connected. port_no can be specified in the ’IOU number-PCI slot number’ format. The -p option cannot be omitted.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

cfgdevice(8) ■

If connection or disconnection is made when the power supply of the system is ON, settings are made immediately after cfgdevice(8) command execution. When the power supply of the system is OFF, connection or disconnection is reserved and settings are made after the power supply is turned on.



The CD-RW/DVD-RW and the tape connection is maintained even if the domain configuration is changed, or a CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU) or I/O unit (IOU) is replaced with a connected CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit.



The CD-RW/DVD-RW and the tape connection is maintained even if the domain power is turned off or the system is rebooted.



The CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit is mounted in each of the base and expansion cabinets in the M9000 server that has the expansion cabinet. In such cases, each CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit can be connected only to a domain within the cabinet in which the drive is mounted. Settings for connection must be made for both the base cabinet and expansion cabinet. XSCF> cfgdevice -l Current connection for DVD/DAT: Main chassis:

port 0-0

Expansion chassis: port 8-0 Expander status Port No. IOU/SAS-status SAS-status ----------------------------------0-0

enable

0-2

up

enable

up

disable down

enable

up

0-4

disable down

enable

up

0-6

disable down

enable

up

1-0

disable down

enable

up

1-2

disable down

enable

up

1-4

disable down

enable

up

1-6

disable down

enable

up

2-0

disable down

enable

up

2-2

disable down

enable

up

2-4

disable down

enable

up

2-6

disable down

enable

up

8-0

enable

enable

up

up

System Administration

25

cfgdevice(8)

EXAMPLES

8-2

disable down

enable

up

8-4

disable down

enable

up

8-6

disable down

enable

up

EXAMPLE 1

When the system is being powered off, reserves the connection of the CD-

RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit to the port 0-0. XSCF> cfgdevice -c attach -p 0-0 Are you sure you want to attach the device [y|n] :y Completed.( Reservation )

EXAMPLE 2

When the system is being powered on, connects the CD-RW/DVD-RW

drive unit and the tape drive unit to port 0-0. XSCF> cfgdevice -c attach -p 0-0 Are you sure you want to attach the device [y|n] :y Completed.

EXAMPLE 3

Disconnects the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit from the port 0-0.

XSCF> cfgdevice -f -c detach -p 0-0 Are you sure you want to detach the device [y|n] :y Completed.

EXAMPLE 4

Displays the status of individual CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit set on the M8000 server and the M9000 server without the expansion cabinet.

XSCF> cfgdevice -l Current connection for DVD/DAT: port 0-0 Expander status Port No. IOU/SAS-status SAS-status ----------------------------------0-0

enable

0-2

disable down

EXAMPLE 5

26

up

enable

up

enable

up

Displays the status of individual CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

cfgdevice(8)

drive unit set on the M9000 server with the expansion cabinet. XSCF> cfgdevice -l Current connection for DVD/DAT: port 0-0 Main chassis:

port 0-0

Expansion chassis: port 8-0 Expander status Port No. IOU/SAS-status SAS-status ----------------------------------0-0

enable

0-2

enable

up

disable down

enable

up

0-4

disable down

enable

up

0-6

disable down

enable

up

1-0

disable down

enable

up

1-2

disable down

enable

up

1-4

disable down

enable

up

1-6

disable down

enable

up

2-0

disable down

enable

up

2-2

disable down

enable

up

2-4

disable down

enable

up

2-6

disable down

enable

up

8-0

enable

enable

up

8-2

disable down

enable

up

8-4

disable down

enable

up

8-6

disable down

enable

up

EXAMPLE 6

up

up

Connects the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit to port 0-0 when the system is being powered on. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts.

XSCF> cfgdevice -y -c attach -p 0-0 Are you sure you want to attach the device [y|n] :y Completed.

EXAMPLE 7

Connects the CD-RW/DVD-RW drive unit and the tape drive unit to port 0-0 when the system is being powered on. Automatically answers "y" to all

System Administration

27

cfgdevice(8) prompts without displaying messages. XSCF> cfgdevice -q -y -c attach -p 0-0

EXIT STATUS

28

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

clockboard(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

clockboard - Set or display the clock control unit used at system startup clockboard clockboard -s CLKU_B-number clockboard -h

DESCRIPTION

The clockboard(8) command specifies the clock control unit used when the system power is turned on, or it displays the clock control unit that is currently used and the clock control unit used at the next system startup. The clockboard(8) command is available only for the M8000/M9000 servers. The number 0 or 1 is used to specify or display a clock control unit. When the clockboard(8) command is executed with no options, the clock control unit that is currently used and the one used at the next system startup are displayed.

Privileges

You must have fieldeng privilege to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-s CLKU_B-number Specifies the clock control unit to be used the next time the system power is turned on. Either 0 or 1 can be specified for CLKU_B-number. EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the clock control unit that is currently used and the one used at the next system startup.

XSCF> clockboard current CLKU_B number next CLKU_B number

EXAMPLE 2

:0 :1

Specifies the clock control unit used at the next system startup.

XSCF> clockboard -s 1

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

29

clockboard(8)

30

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

console(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

console - connect to a domain console console [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id [-f | -r] [-s escapeChar] console -h

DESCRIPTION

The console(8) command connects the XSCF shell console to the console of the specified domain (domain console). Domain consoles include a writable console and read-only console. Only one writable console and multiple read-only consoles can be connected to one domain. An attempt to set up a connection to another writable console while one writable console is already connected results in an error. Even in this case, however, a user with the platadm or domainadm privilege can forcibly establish a connection to a writable console, in which case the currently connected writable console is disconnected. To exit the domain console and return to the XSCF shell console, press the Enter key and then enter "#" and "." (period).

Note – When you return to XSCF shell console without logging out from the domain, the return causes automatically logging out from the domain. Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, fieldeng Can run this command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can run this command only for your accessible domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -d domain_id

Specifies only one ID of the domain to which to connect to a domain console. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-f

Forcibly connects to a writable console. The currently connected writable console is disconnected. Only users who belong to the platadm or domainadm privilege can specify this option.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts. System Administration

31

console(8)

-r

Sets up a connection to a read-only console.

-s escapeChar

Specifies an escape character. The default is "#" . The character specified for escapeChar must be enclosed in "" "" (double quotation). The following symbols can be specified for escapeChar: "#", "@", "^", "&", "?", "*", "=", ".", "|" Specified escape character is available only in the session that executed the console(8) command. Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

-y EXTENDED DESCRIPTION



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



The domain console regards "#" used at the beginning of a line as an escape character. An escape character is specified to instruct the console to perform special processing. Examples of processing that can be specified in combination with "#" are as follows.

"#" and "?"

Outputs a status message.

"#" and "." (period) Disconnects the console.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

32



To enter "#" at the beginning of a line, enter "#" twice.



To display information on the currently connected domain console, use the showconsolepath(8) command.

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

sendbreak(8), showconsolepath(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

deleteboard(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

deleteboard - disconnect an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the domain configuration deleteboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] [-c disconnect] xsb [ xsb...] deleteboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c unassign xsb [ xsb...] deleteboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c reserve xsb [ xsb...] deleteboard -h

DESCRIPTION

The deleteboard(8) command disconnects an XSB from the domain configuration in which it has been configured. The deleteboard(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. One of the following disconnection methods can be specified:

Privileges

disconnect

Disconnects the XSB from the domain configuration but keeps it assigned. Because the XSB thus remains assigned to the domain configuration, it can be configured again in the domain by reboot the domain or execution of the addboard(8) command.

unassign

Completely disconnects the XSB from the main configuration and puts it in the system board pool. The XSB in the system board pool can be incorporated into or assigned to other domain configurations.

reserve

Does not immediately disconnects the XSB from the domain configuration but only reserves detachment. When the domain power is shut down, the reserved XSB is disconnected from the domain configuration and put in the system board pool.

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm

Can run this command only for your managed domains.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

33

deleteboard(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -c disconnect

Detaches the XSB from the domain configuration and keeps it assigned. If the -c option is omitted, "-c disconnect" is used.

-c reset

Reserves disconnect of an XSB. If the -c option is omitted, "-c disconnect" is used.

-c unassign

Disconnects the XSB completely from the domain configuration and puts it in the system board pool. If the -c option is omitted, "-c disconnect" is used.

-f

Forcibly detaches the specified XSB.

Caution – If the -f option is used to forcibly add a system board to a domain, all the added hardware resources may not work normally. For this reason, use of the -f option is not recommended in normal operation. If the -f option must be specified, verify the status of every added system board and device.

OPERANDS

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-v

Displays a detailed message. If this option is specified with the -q option, the -v option is ignored.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following operand is supported: xsb

Specifies the XSB number to be disconnected. Multiple xsb operands are permitted, separated by spaces. The following xsb form is accepted: x–y where:

34

x

An integer from 00–15.

y

An integer from 0–3.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

deleteboard(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



If "-c disconnect" is specified when either the domain power has been turned off or the XSB is already disconnected from the domain configuration, no operation is performed. If domain power-on or power-off is in progress, the command results in an error.



If "-c unassign" is specified when either the domain power has been turned off or the XSB is already disconnected from the domain configuration, the XSB is switched from the assigned state to a system board pool. If the XSB is already in a system board pool, no operation is performed.



If "-c reserve" is specified when either the domain power has been turned off or the XSB is already disconnected from the domain configuration, the XSB is immediately switched from the assigned state to a system board pool. If the XSB is already in a system board pool, no operation is performed. If domain poweron or power-off is in progress, the command results in an error.



When the XSB is disconnected, the hardware resource on the XSB is disconnected from the operating system. For this reason, command execution may take time.



The state in which an XSB has been assigned means that configuring the XSB in the specified domain has been reserved. The reserved XSB is configured when the domain is rebooted or the addboard(8) command is executed. An already assigned XSB cannot be specified for configuring or assignment from other domains.



An XSB in the system board pool means that the XSB belongs to no domain and is therefore available for configuring or assignment.

EXAMPLE 1

Puts the system board XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 in the system board pool

XSCF> deleteboard -c unassign 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0

EXAMPLE 2

Reserves disconnection of XSB#00-0, #01-0, #02-0, and #03-0 .

XSCF> deleteboard -c reserve 00-0 01-0 02-0 03-0

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), moveboard(8), replacefru(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8) System Administration

35

deleteboard(8)

36

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

deletecodlicense(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

deletecodlicense - remove a Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU) license key from the COD license database deletecodlicense [-f] license-signature deletecodlicense -h

DESCRIPTION

The deletecodlicense(8) command removes the specified COD RTU license key from the COD license database on the Service Processor. The deletecodlicense(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. For further information about COD RTU license keys, refer to the Administration Guide. The system checks the number of COD RTU licenses against the number of COD CPUs in use. If the license removal will result in an insufficient number of COD RTU licenses with respect to the CPU in use, the system does not delete the license key from the COD RTU license database. If you still want to delete the COD RTU license key, you must reduce the number of COD CPUs in use. Power off the appropriate number of domains or disconnect the appropriate number of the eXtended System Boards (XSBs).

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -f

Forces the specified COD RTU license key to be deleted from the COD license database.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: license-signature

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies the COD RTU license key to be deleted from the COD license database.

Deleting a COD RTU license key

XSCF> deletecodlicense \ 01:84000000:104:0301010100:3:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

System Administration

37

deletecodlicense(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

38

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addcodlicense(8), setcod(8), showcod(8), showcodlicense(8), showcodusage(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

deletefru(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

deletefru - delete a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) deletefru deletefru -h

DESCRIPTION

The deletefru(8) command deletes an FRU. The deletefru(8) command is available only for the M8000/M9000 servers. The deletefru(8) command allows the user to make the settings that are required for FRU deletion and related to selecting, confirming, and removing FRUs interactively using menus. The following FRUs can be deleted:

Privileges



CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU)



I/O unit (IOU)

You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -h

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

Displays usage statement.

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addfru(8), deleteboard(8), replacefru(8), setupfru(8), showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8), showhardconf(8), unlockmaintenance(8)

System Administration

39

deletefru(8)

40

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

deleteuser(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

deleteuser - delete an XSCF user account deleteuser user deleteuser -h

DESCRIPTION

deleteuser(8) deletes a local XSCF user account. All local account data associated with the user account is deleted including password and Secure Shell (SSH) keys. The local user’s currently running XSCF shell and browser sessions are terminated at once. The user’s account is removed from the system and they cannot log back in. You cannot delete your own account.

Privileges

You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: user

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies a valid user name. The name of the user account to be deleted. Deleting a User

XSCF> deleteuser jsmith

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

adduser(8), disableuser(8), enableuser(8)

System Administration

41

deleteuser(8)

42

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

disableuser(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

disableuser - disable an XSCF user account disableuser user disableuser -h

DESCRIPTION

disableuser(8) disables a local XSCF user account for subsequent logins. Current sessions are not affected. When an account is disabled, it cannot be used for login. This applies to console (serial) and telnet connections, as well as the Secure Shell (SSH). XSCF Web login is also disabled. All local XSCF account data associated with the user remains on the system. This includes password and SSH keys. You can reenable a disabled account using enableuser(8).

Privileges

You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: user

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies a valid user name of the user account to be disabled. Disabling a User Account

XSCF> disableuser jsmith

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

adduser(8), deleteuser(8), enableuser(8), showuser(8)

System Administration

43

disableuser(8)

44

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

dumpconfig(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

dumpconfig - save system configuration information dumpconfig [-v ] [-V ] [ [-q] -{y|n} ] [-e user ] [-p proxy [-t proxy_type ]] url

[-P password ]] [-c comment ] [-u

dumpconfig -h DESCRIPTION

Privileges

The dumpconfig(8) command downloads the system configuration information into a file specified by the user. You must have platadm, platop, or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c comment

Accepts a user-provided comment in the file to distinguish between different backup copies and is not read by the software. This comment must be 132 chars or less in length.

-e

Encrypt the file. "-P password" option can be used to specify the password. If a password is not specified the key will be prompted. Once encrypted the configuration file cannot be decrypted without the key. If the key is lost, there is no possibility of recovering the configuration data.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-P password

With -e option, password can be provided on command line. The command will prompt for the password if a password is not provided on command line.

-p proxy

Specifies the proxy server to be used for transfers. The default transfer type is http, unless modified using the -t proxy_type option. The value for proxy must be in the format servername:port.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-t proxy_type

Used with the -p option to specify the type of proxy. Possible values for proxy_type are: http, socks4, and socks5. The default value is http.

-u user

Specifies the user name when logging in to a remote ftp or http server that requires authentication. You will be prompted for a password.

System Administration

45

dumpconfig(8)

OPERANDS

-v

Displays verbose output. This may be helpful when diagnosing server problems.

-V

Displays details of network activity. This may be helpful when diagnosing network or server problems.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following operands are supported: url

Specifies the URL where the configuration will be dumped. Supported formats for this value include the following: http://server[:port]/path/file https://server[:port]/path/file ftp://server[:port]/path/file file:///media/usb_msd/path/file

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Dumping the Configuration using FTP

XSCF> dumpconfig -V -p 129.145.155.156:8080 -u minilla ftp:/

10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest-ftp.cfg transfer from ’/tmp/dumpconfig.EvY1Yf’ to ’ftp://10.7.79.18/sollgell/ proxytest-ftp.cfg’ Password: * About to connect() to 129.145.155.166 port 8080 *

Trying 129.145.155.166... * connected

* Connected to 129.145.155.166 (129.145.155.166) port 8080 * Proxy auth using (nil) with user ’’ * Server auth using Basic with user ’minilla’ > PUT ftp://10.7.79.18/iktest/proxytest-ftp.cfg HTTP/1.1 Authorization: Basic bHdhbmc6bHdhbmc= User-Agent: dumpconfig Host: 10.7.79.18:21 Pragma: no-cache Accept: */* Content-Length: 24720 Expect: 100-continue

46

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

dumpconfig(8)

< HTTP/1.1 100 Continue < HTTP/1.1 200 OK < Server: Sun-Java-System-Web-Proxy-Server/4.0 < Date: Mon, 04 Aug 2008 16:46:11 GMT < Transfer-encoding: chunked * Connection #0 to host 129.145.155.166 left intact * Closing connection #0 operation completed XSCF>

EXAMPLE 2

Dumping the Configuration Using http

XSCF> dumpconfig -v -p 129.145.155.166:8080 http://10.7.79.18/ sollgell/proxytest.cfg reading database ... ..............*done creating temporary file ... done starting file transfer ...done removing temporary file ... done operation completed XSCF>

EXAMPLE 3

Dumping the Configuration Using Https

XSCF> dumpconfig -V -p 129.145.155.166:8080 http://10.7.79.18/ sollgell/proxytest-https.cfg transfer from ’/tmp/dumpconfig.ZMCI3d’ to ’http://10.7.79.18/iktest/ proxytest-https.cfg’ * About to connect() to 129.145.155.166 port 8080 *

Trying 129.145.155.166... * connected

* Connected to 129.145.155.166 (129.145.155.166) port 8080 > > PUT http://10.7.79.18/iktest/proxytest-https.cfg HTTP/1.1 User-Agent: dumpconfig Host: 10.7.79.18 Pragma: no-cache Accept: */* Content-Length: 24720

System Administration

47

dumpconfig(8)

Expect: 100-continue < HTTP/1.1 100 Continue < HTTP/1.1 204 No Content < Content-type: text/html < Date: Mon, 04 Aug 2008 16:42:46 GMT < Server: Apache/1.3.36 (Unix) mod_perl/1.29 mod_ssl/2.8.27 OpenSSL/0.9.7d < Via: 1.1 proxy-proxy < Proxy-agent: Sun-Java-System-Web-Proxy-Server/4.0 * Connection #0 to host 129.145.155.166 left intact * Closing connection #0 operation completed XSCF>

EXAMPLE 4

Dumping the Configuration Using USB

XSCF> dumpconfig -v -V file:///media/usb_msd/proxytest.cfg Making sure mount point is clear Trying to mount USB device /dev/sda1 as /media/usb_msd Mounted USB device file ’/media/usb_msd/proxytest.cfg’ already exists Do you want to overwrite this file? [y|n]: y removing file ’file:///media/usb_msd/proxytest.cfg’ ... done reading database ... ..............*done creating temporary file ... done starting file transfer ...transfer from ’/tmp/dumpconfig.HE1RZa’ to ’file:///media/usb_msd/san-ff1-54.cfg’ done removing temporary file ... done operation completed Unmounted USB device XSCF>

48

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

dumpconfig(8) EXAMPLE 5

Encrypting and Password Protecting the Configuration

XSCF> dumpconfig -v -e -P kamacuras -p 129.145.155.166:8080 http:/

/10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest.cfg reading database ... ..............*done creating temporary file ... done starting file transfer ...done removing temporary file ... done operation completed XSCF>

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

restoreconfig(8)

System Administration

49

dumpconfig(8)

50

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

enableuser(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

enableuser - enable an XSCF user account enableuser user enableuser -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

enableuser(8) enables a local XSCF user account. An enabled account can be used for login at the console, using Secure Shell (SSH). Using this command, you can reenable accounts disabled by disableuser. You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported. -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: user

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies the valid user name of the account to be enabled. Enable a User Account

XSCF> enableuser jsmith

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

adduser(8), deleteuser(8), disableuser(8), showuser(8)

System Administration

51

enableuser(8)

52

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

exit(1)

NAME SYNOPSIS DESCRIPTION Privileges

exit - exit the XSCF shell exit The exit(1) command exits and closes the XSCF shell. No privileges are required to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

53

exit(1)

54

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

flashupdate(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

flashupdate - update the firmware flashupdate -c check -m xcp -s version flashupdate [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c update -m xcp -s version flashupdate -c sync flashupdate -h

DESCRIPTION

The flashupdate(8) command updates the firmware. The entire firmware shown below is updated. Whether update can be performed can be checked beforehand. ■

Privileges

Update of the entire firmware (XSCF, OpenBoot PROM including Power-On SelfTest (POST)) (xcp)

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported:. -c check

Checks whether the specified firmware can be updated.

-c update

Updates the specified firmware. In the M8000/M9000 servers, updates the firmware of both XSCF units.

-c sync

Synchronizes the firmware versions of the XSCF units in the M8000/M9000 servers. This option is used when replacing an XSCF unit.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m xcp

Specifies the entire firmware as a target.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

System Administration

55

flashupdate(8)

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-s version

Specifies an XCP comprehensive firmware version. For version, specify a major version, minor version and micro version continuously. The XCP version number appears as xyyz by four digits, where:

EXAMPLES

Major firmware release number

yy

Minor release number

z

Micro release number

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

-y EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

x



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



When the firmware is updated, the XSCF unit is reset. Therefore, LAN connection to the XSCF is canceled if already established.



When there's a faulty Field Replaceable Unit (FRU), can't update the firmware. Resolve the FRU fault then update.

EXAMPLE 1

Check whether the entire firmware can be updated to version 1020.

XSCF> flashupdate -c check -m xcp -s 1020

EXAMPLE 2

Updates the entire firmware to version from 1010 to 1020.

XSCF> flashupdate -c update -m xcp -s 1020 The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y XCP update is started (XCP version=1020:last version=1010) OpenBoot PROM update is started OpenBoot PROM update has been completed (OpenBoot PROM version=01010001) XSCF update is started (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last version=1010) XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last version=01010001) XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last version=01010001)

56

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

flashupdate(8)

: : XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last version=01010001) XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last version=01010001) XSCF update has been completed (SCF=0, bank=1, XCP version=1020:last version=1010) XSCF update is started (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last version=1010) XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last version=01010001) XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=00:version=01010002:last version=01010001) : : XSCF download is started (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last version=01010001) XSCF download has been completed (SCF=0, bank=0, XCP version=1020:last version=1010, Firmware Element ID=07:version=01010002:last version=01010001) XSCF is rebooting to update the reserve bank

EXAMPLE 3

Synchronizes the firmware version of the replaced XSCF units in the M8000/ M9000 servers.

XSCF> flashupdate -c sync

System Administration

57

flashupdate(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

58

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion

>0

An error occurred.

version(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

fmadm(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

fmadm - fault management configuration tool fmadm [-q] config fmadm -h

DESCRIPTION

fmadm (8) can be used to view system configuration parameters related to fault management. fmadm can be used to: View the set of diagnosis engines and agents that are currently participating in fault management View the list of system components that have been diagnosed as faulty The Fault Manager attempts to automate as many activities as possible, so use of fmadm is typically not required. When the Fault Manager needs help from a human administrator or service representative, it produces a message indicating its needs. It also refers you to a URL containing the relevant knowledge article. The web site might ask you to use fmadm or one of the other fault management utilities to gather more information or perform additional tasks. The documentation for fmdump(8) describes more about tools to observe fault management activities.

Privileges

You must have platop, platadm, or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-q

OPERANDS

Sets quiet mode. fmadm does not produce messages indicating the result of successful operations to standard output.

The following operands are supported: config

Displays the configuration of the Fault Manager itself, including the module name, version, and description of each component module. Fault Manager modules provide services such as automated diagnosis, self-healing, and messaging for hardware and software present on the system.

System Administration

59

fmadm(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying the Fault Manager Configuration

XSCF> fmadm config MODULE

VERSION STATUS

case-close

1.0

active

Case-Close Agent

fmd-self-diagnosis 1.0

active

Fault Manager Self-Diagnosis

sysevent-transport syslog-msgs

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

60

DESCRIPTION

1.0 1.0

active

SysEvent Transport Agent

active Syslog Messaging Agent

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

fmdump(8), fmstat(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

fmdump(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

fmdump - view fault management logs fmdump fmdump [-e] [-f] [-M] [-v] [-V] [-c class] [-t time] [-T time] [-u

uuid]

fmdump -m [-M] [-t time] [-T time] fmdump -h DESCRIPTION

The fmdump utility displays the contents of any of the logs associated with the Fault Manager (fault manager daemon). The Fault Manager runs in the background on each server. It records, in the error log, faults detected by the XSCF, and initiates proactive self-healing activities, such as disabling faulty components. The Fault Manager maintains two sets of logs for use by system administrators and service personnel: Error log

Records error telemetry, the symptoms of problems detected by the system

Fault log

Records fault diagnosis information; the problems believed to explain these symptoms. By default, fmdump displays the contents of the fault log, which records the result of each diagnosis made by the fault manager or one of its component modules.

Each problem recorded in the fault log is identified by: ■

The time of its diagnosis



A Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) that can be used to uniquely identify this particular problem across any set of systems



A message identifier (MSG-ID) that can be used to access a corresponding knowledge article located at the specified website.

If a problem requires action by a system administrator or service personnel or affects system behavior, the Fault Manager also issues a human-readable message. This message provides a summary of the problem and a reference to the knowledge article on the specified website. You can use the -v and -V options to expand the display from a single-line summary to increased levels of detail for each event recorded in the log. You can also use the -M option to display only one screen at a time. The -c, -t, -T, and -u options can be used to filter the output by selecting only those events that match the specified class, range of times, or uuid. If more than one filter option is present on the command line, the options combine to display only those events that are selected by the logical AND of the options. If more than one instance of the same

System Administration

61

fmdump(8)

filter option is present on the command-line, the like options combine to display any events selected by the logical OR of the options. You can use the -m option to display the Fault Manager syslog contents. Privileges

You must have platop, platadm, or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -c class

Selects events that match the specified class. The class argument can use the global pattern matching syntax, which is similar to global pattern matching for files. For example xyz.* would match xyz.sxc and xyz.pdf. The class represents a hierarchical classification string indicating the type of telemetry event.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-e

Displays events from the fault management error log instead of the fault log. The error log contains private telemetry information used by XSCF’s automated diagnosis software. This information is recorded to facilitate post-mortem analysis of problems and event replay, and should not be parsed or relied upon for the development of scripts and other tools.

62

-f

Displays only lines that have been appended to the dump file since the command was executed. Output continues until interrupted by Ctrl-C.

-m

Displays the Fault Manager syslog message contents.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-t time

Selects events that occurred at or after the specified time. The time can be specified using the forms in the Time Formats following this section. Used with -T you can specify a range.

-T time

Selects events that occurred at or before the specified time. time can be specified using any of the time formats described for the -t option. Used with -t you can specify a range.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

fmdump(8)

-u uuid

Selects fault diagnosis events that exactly match the specified uuid. Each diagnosis is associated with a UUID for identification purposes. The -u option can be combined with other options such as -v to show all of the details associated with a particular diagnosis. If the -e option and -u option are specified at the same time, fmdump displays the relevant error events.

-v

Displays verbose event detail. The event display is enlarged to show additional common members of the selected events.

-V

Displays very verbose event detail. The event display is enlarged to show every member of the name-value pair list associated with each event. In addition, for fault logs, the event display includes a list of cross-references to the corresponding errors that were associated with the diagnosis.

The following are the Time Formats: Time Format

Description

mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss

Month, day, year, hour in 24-hour format, minute, and second. Any amount of whitespace can separate the date and time. The argument should be quoted so that the shell interprets the two strings as a single argument.

mm/dd/yy hh:mm

Month, day, year, hour in 24-hour format, and minute. Any amount of whitespace can separate the date and time. The argument should be quoted so that the shell interprets the two strings as a single argument.

mm/dd/yy

12:00:00AM on the specified month, day, and year

ddMonyy hh:mm:ss

Day, month name, year, hour in 24-hour format, minute, and second. Any amount of whitespace can separate the date and time. The argument should be quoted so that the shell interprets the two strings as a single argument.

Mon dd hh:mm:ss

Month, day, hour in 24-hour format, minute, and second of the current year. Any amount of whitespace can separate the date and time. The argument should be quoted so that the shell interprets the two strings as a single argument.

System Administration

63

fmdump(8)

Time Format

Description

yyyy-mm-dd[T hh:mm[:ss]]

Year, month, day, and optional hour in 24-hour format, minute, and second, where T is an integer value specified in base 10. The second, or hour, minute, and second, can be optionally omitted.

ddMonyy

12:00:00AM on the specified day, month name, and year.

hh:mm:ss

Hour in 24-hour format, minute, and second of the current day.

hh:mm

Hour in 24-hour format and minute of the current day.

Tns | Tnsec

T nanoseconds ago where T is an integer value specified in base 10.

Tus | Tusec

T microseconds ago where T is an integer value specified in base 10

Tms | Tmsec

T milliseconds ago where T is an integer value specified in base 10.

Ts | Tsec

T seconds ago where T is an integer value specified in base 10.

Tm | Tmin

T minutes ago where T is an integer value specified in base 10.

Th | Thour

T hours ago where T is an integer value specified in base 10.

Td | Tday

T days ago where T is an integer value specified in base 10.

You can append a decimal fraction of the form .n to any -t option argument to indicate a fractional number of seconds beyond the specified time. EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Default fmdump Display

XSCF> fmdump TIME

UUID

MSG-ID

Aug 12 16:12:13.2811 7868c1cc-23d4-c575-8659-85cdbe61842e FMD-8000-77 Aug 12 16:12:13.2985 7868c1cc-23d4-c575-8659-85cdbe61842e FMD-8000-77 Sep 01 16:06:57.5839 3ceca439-b0b2-4db1-9123-c8ace3f2b371 FMD-8000-77 Sep 01 16:06:57.6278 3ceca439-b0b2-4db1-9123-c8ace3f2b371 FMD-8000-77 Sep 06 09:37:05.0983 6485b42b-6638-4c5d-b652-bec485290788 LINUX-8000-1N

64

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

fmdump(8)

Sep 06 09:38:10.8584 77435994-5b99-4db8-bdcd-985c7d3ae3e4 LINUX-8000-1N Sep 06 09:57:44.6502 0087d58c-e5b9-415d-91bc-adf7c41dd316 LINUX-8000-1N Sep 06 12:40:59.2801 97de2cef-8ea1-407a-8a53-c7a67e61987a LINUX-8000-1N Sep 06 12:41:10.1076 fa7304f9-c9e8-4cd1-9ca5-e35f57d53b2c LINUX-8000-1N Sep 06 13:01:49.1462 ce550611-4308-4336-8a9a-19676f828515 LINUX-8000-1N Sep 06 15:42:56.6132 0f4b429f-c048-47cd-9d9f-a2f7b6d4c957 LINUX-8000-1N Sep 06 16:07:14.4652 7d5fb282-e01b-476a-b7e1-1a0f8de80758 LINUX-8000-1N Sep 06 16:08:16.3755 41379237-9750-4fd6-bce3-b5131d864d34 LINUX-8000-1N Sep 29 14:49:27.8452 0455ceaa-e226-424a-9b34-27603ca603f1 FMD-8000-58 Sep 29 15:02:00.3039 fb550ebc-80e9-41c8-8afc-ac680b9eb613 FMD-8000-58 Sep 29 15:09:25.4335 8cec9a83-e2a3-4dc3-a7cd-de01caef5c63 FMD-8000-4M Sep 29 15:10:09.6151 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed FMD-8000-58

EXAMPLE 2

Display in Verbose Mode

XSCF> fmdump -v TIME

UUID

MSG-ID

Nov 30 20:44:55.1283 9f773e33-e46f-466c-be86-fd3fcc449935 FMD-8000-0W 100%

defect.sunos.fmd.nosub

:

EXAMPLE 3

Display Very Verbose Event Detail for the Last UUID

XSCF> fmdump -e -V -u 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed TIME

CLASS

Sep 29 2005 15:10:09.565220864 ereport.io.iox.cp.seeprom0.nresp nvlist version: 0 detector = (embedded nvlist) nvlist version: 0 scheme = hc version = 0 hc-root = / hc-list_sz = 0x1 hc-list = (array of embedded nvlists) (start hc-list[0])

System Administration

65

fmdump(8)

nvlist version: 0 scheme = hc hc-name = iox hc-id = 0 (end hc-list[0]) (end detector) IOXserial_no = 123456 class = ereport.io.iox.cp.seeprom0.nresp ena = 0x921b650000000001

EXAMPLE 4

Displaying the Full Fault Report for the Specified UUID

XSCF> fmdump

-V -u 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed

TIME

UUID

MSG-ID

Sep 29 15:10:09.6151 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed FMD-8000-58 TIME

CLASS

Sep 29 15:10:09.5652 ereport.io.iox.cp.seeprom0.nresp 0x921b650000000001 nvlist version: 0 version = 0x0 class = list.suspect uuid = 5f88d7d5-a107-4435-99c9-7c59479d22ed code = FMD-8000-58 diag-time = 1128021009 615016 de = (embedded nvlist) nvlist version: 0 version = 0x0 scheme = fmd authority = (embedded nvlist) nvlist version: 0 version = 0x0 product-id = SUNW,SPARC-Enterprise chassis-id = BF0000001V server-id = localhost (end authority)

66

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

ENA

fmdump(8)

mod-name = sde mod-version = 1.13 (end de) fault-list-sz = 0x1 fault-list = (array of embedded nvlists) (start fault-list[0]) nvlist version: 0 version = 0x0 class = fault.io.iox.cp.seeprom certainty = 0x64 fru = (embedded nvlist) nvlist version: 0 scheme = hc version = 0x0 hc-root = hc-list-sz = 0x1 hc-list = (array of embedded nvlists) (start hc-list[0]) nvlist version: 0 hc-name = iox hc-id = 0 (end hc-list[0]) (end fru) (end fault-list[0])

EXAMPLE 5

Displaying Contents of the Fault Manager syslog Message

XSCF> fmdump

-m -M

MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11, TYPE: Defect, VER: 1, SEVERITY: Minor EVENT-TIME: Tue Nov

7 07:01:44 PST 2006

PLATFORM: SUNW,SPARC-Enterprise, CSN: 7860000764, HOSTNAME: san-ff2-20-0 SOURCE: sde, REV: 1.5 EVENT-ID: 2daddee0-2f42-47ee-b5b2-57ae6a41bfc0

System Administration

67

fmdump(8)

DESC: A Solaris Fault Manager component generated a diagnosis for which no message summary exists. Refer to http://www.sun.com/msg/FMD-8000-11 for more information. AUTO-RESPONSE: The diagnosis has been saved in the fault log for examination by Sun. IMPACT: The fault log will need to be manually examined using fmdump(1M) in order to determine if any human response is required.

MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11, TYPE: Defect, VER: 1, SEVERITY: Minor EVENT-TIME: Tue Nov

7 07:03:25 PST 2006

PLATFORM: SUNW,SPARC-Enterprise, CSN: 7860000764, HOSTNAME: san-ff2-20-0 SOURCE: sde, REV: 1.5 EVENT-ID: 2b03ab60-96db-439d-a13a-2f420a1b73c7 DESC: A Solaris Fault Manager component generated a diagnosis for which no message summary exists. Refer to http://www.sun.com/msg/FMD-8000-11 for more information. AUTO-RESPONSE: The diagnosis has been saved in the fault log for examination by Sun. IMPACT: The fault log will need to be manually examined using fmdump(1M) in order to determine if any human response is required.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

68

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion. All records in the log file were examined successfully.

>0

An error occurred.

fmadm(8), fmstat(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

fmstat(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

fmstat - report fault management module statistics fmstat [-a] [ [-s] [-z] [-m module]] [ interval [ count]] fmstat -h

DESCRIPTION

The fmstat utility can be used by system administrators and service personnel to report statistics associated with the Fault Manager (fault manager daemon), and its associated set of modules. The Fault Manager runs in the background on each system. It receives telemetry information relating to problems detected by the system software, diagnoses these problems, and initiates proactive self-healing activities such as disabling faulty components. You can use fmstat to view statistics for diagnosis engines and agents that are currently participating in fault management. The fmadm(8), and fmdump(8) man pages describe more about tools to observe fault management activities. If the -m option is present, fmstat reports any statistics kept by the specified fault management module. The module list can be obtained using fmadm config. If the -m option is not present, fmstat reports the following statistics for each of its client modules: module

The name of the fault management module as reported by fmadm config.

ev_recv

The number of telemetry events received by the module.

ev_acpt

The number of events accepted by the module as relevant to a diagnosis.

wait

The average number of telemetry events waiting to be examined by the module.

svc_t

The average service time for telemetry events received by the module, in milliseconds.

%w

The percentage of time that there were telemetry events waiting to be examined by the module.

%b

The percentage of time that the module was busy processing telemetry events.

open

The number of active cases (open problem investigations) owned by the module.

System Administration

69

fmstat(8)

Privileges

solve

The total number of cases solved by this module since it was loaded.

memsz

The amount of dynamic memory currently allocated by this module.

bufsz

The amount of persistent buffer space currently allocated by this module.

You must have platadm, platop, or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -a

Prints the default global statistics for the Fault Manager or a module. If used without the -m module option, the default global Fault Manager statistics are displayed. If used with the -m module option, the global statistics for a module are displayed.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m module

Prints a report on the statistics associated with the specified fault management module, instead of the default statistics report. Modules can publish an arbitrary set of statistics to help service the fault management software itself. If used without the -a option, displays only those statistics kept by the module. If used with the -a option, displays statistics kept by the module and the global statistics associated with the module.

OPERANDS

70

-s

Prints a report on Soft Error Rate Discrimination (SERD) engines associated with the module instead of the default module statistics report. A SERD engine is a construct used by fault management software to determine if a statistical threshold measured as N events in some time T has been exceeded. The -s option can only be used in combination with the -m option.

-z

Omits statistics with a zero value from the report associated with the specified fault management module. The -z option can only be used in combination with the -m option.

The following operands are supported: count

Print only count reports, and then exit.

interval

Print a new report every interval seconds.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

fmstat(8)

If neither count nor interval is specified, a single report is printed and fmstat exits. If an interval is specified but no count is specified, fmstat prints reports every interval seconds indefinitely until the command is interrupted by Ctrl-C. EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying FM Statistics for the Syslog Module

XSCF> fmstat -a -m syslog-msgs NAME VALUE

DESCRIPTION

bad_code 0

event code has no dictionary name

bad_fmri 0

event fmri is missing or invalid

bad_time 0

event time is not properly encoded

bad_vers 0

event version is missing or invalid

fmd.accepted 0

total events accepted by module

fmd.buflimit 10M

limit on total buffer space

fmd.buftotal 0

total buffer space used by module

fmd.caseclosed 0

total cases closed by module

fmd.caseopen 0

cases currently open by module

fmd.casesolved 0

total cases solved by module

fmd.ckptcnt 0

number of checkpoints taken

fmd.ckptrestore true

restore checkpoints for module

fmd.ckptsave true

save checkpoints for module

fmd.ckpttime 0d

total checkpoint time

fmd.ckptzero false

zeroed checkpoint at startup

fmd.debugdrop 4

dropped debug messages

fmd.dequeued 1

total events dequeued by module

fmd.dispatched 1

total events dispatched to module

fmd.dlastupdate 1144424838299131us hrtime of last event dequeue completion fmd.dropped 0

total events dropped on queue overflow

fmd.dtime 0d

total processing time after dequeue

fmd.loadtime 1144424251692484us hrtime at which module was loaded fmd.memlimit 10M

limit on total memory allocated

fmd.memtotal 97b

total memory allocated by module

fmd.prdequeued 0

protocol events dequeued by module

fmd.snaptime 1144424838299148us hrtime of last statistics snapshot fmd.thrlimit 8

limit on number of auxiliary threads

System Administration

71

fmstat(8)

fmd.thrtotal 0

total number of auxiliary threads

fmd.wcnt 0

count of events waiting on queue

fmd.wlastupdate 1144424838299131us hrtime of last wait queue update fmd.wlentime 30us

total wait length * time product

fmd.wtime 30us

total wait time on queue

fmd.xprtlimit 256

limit on number of open transports

fmd.xprtopen 0

total number of open transports

fmd.xprtqlimit 256

limit on transport event queue length

log_err 0

failed to log message to log(7D)

msg_err 0

failed to log message to sysmsg(7D)

no_msg 0

message logging suppressed

XSCF> fmstat module

ev_recv ev_acpt wait svc_t %w %b open solve memsz bufsz

case-close

0

0

0.0

0.0

0

0

0

0

0

0

fmd-self-diagnosis

1

1

0.0

0.2

0

0

1

0

27b

0

sysevent-transport

0

0

0.0

573.2

0

0

0

0

0

0

syslog-msgs

0

0

0.0

0.0

0

0

0

0

97b

0

EXAMPLE 2

Displaying FM Statistics for fmd Self-Diagnosis Module

XSCF> fmstat -z -m fmd-self-diagnosis

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

72

NAME VALUE

DESCRIPTION

module 1

error events received from fmd modules

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

fmadm(8), fmdump(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

getflashimage(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

getflashimage - download a firmware image file getflashimage [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-u user] [-p proxy [-t proxy_type]] url getflashimage -l getflashimage [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-d] getflashimage -h

DESCRIPTION

The getflashimage(8) command downloads a firmware image file for use by the flashupdate(8) command. If any previous image files of the firmware are present on the XSCF unit, they are deleted prior to downloading the new version. After successful download, the image file is checked for integrity, and the MD5 checksum is displayed.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d

Deletes all previous firmware image files still on the XSCF unit, then exits.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-l

Lists firmware image files that are still on the XSCF unit, then exits.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-p proxy

Specifies the proxy server to be used for transfers. The default transfer type is http, unless modified using the -t proxy_type option. The value for proxy must be in the format servername:port. (Refer to Example 3.)

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-t proxy_type

Used with the -p option to specify the type of proxy. Possible values for proxy_type are: http, socks4, and socks5. The default value is http.

-u user

Specifies the user name when logging in to a remote ftp or http server that requires authentication. You will be prompted for a password.

-v

Displays verbose output. This may be helpful when diagnosing network or server problems.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

System Administration

73

getflashimage(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: url

Specifies the URL of the firmware image to download. Supported formats for this value include the following: http://server[:port]/path/file https://server[:port]/path/file ftp://server[:port]/path/file file:///media/usb_msd/path/file where the value for file is in one of the following formats: XCPvvvv.tar.gz IKXCPvvvv.tar.gz FFXCPvvvv.tar.gz DCXCPvvvv.tar.gz and vvvv is the four-character version number.

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Downloading a Version from an http Server

XSCF> getflashimage http://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz Existing versions: Version FFXCP1040.tar.gz

Size 46827123

Date Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007

Warning: About to delete existing versions. Continue? [y|n]: y Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz. 0MB received 1MB received 2MB received ... 43MB received 44MB received 45MB received

74

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

getflashimage(8)

Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s Checking file... MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a0

EXAMPLE 2

Downloading a Version from an ftp Server

XSCF> getflashimage ftp://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz Existing versions: Version FFXCP1040.tar.gz

Size 46827123

Date Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007

Warning: About to delete existing versions. Continue? [y|n]: y Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz. 0MB received 1MB received 2MB received ... 43MB received 44MB received 45MB received Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s Checking file... MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a1

EXAMPLE 3

Downloading Using an http Proxy Server With Port 8080

XSCF> getflashimage -p webproxy.sun.com:8080 \

http://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz Existing versions: Version FFXCP1040.tar.gz

Size 46827123

Date Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007

Warning: About to delete existing versions. Continue? [y|n]: y Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz. 0MB received

System Administration

75

getflashimage(8)

1MB received 2MB received ... 43MB received 44MB received 45MB received Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s Checking file... MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a2

EXAMPLE 4

Downloading Using a User Name and Password

XSCF> getflashimage -u jsmith \

http://imageserver/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz Existing versions: Version FFXCP1040.tar.gz

Size 46827123

Date Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007

Warning: About to delete existing versions. Continue? [y|n]: y Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz. Password: [not echoed] 0MB received 1MB received 2MB received ... 43MB received 44MB received 45MB received Download successful: 46827KB at 1016.857KB/s Checking file... MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a3

76

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

getflashimage(8) EXAMPLE 5

Downloading From a USB Memory Stick

XSCF> getflashimage file:///media/usb_msd/images/FFXCP1041.tar.gz Existing versions: Version

Size

FFXCP1040.tar.gz

46827123

Date Wed Mar 14 19:11:40 2007

Warning: About to delete existing versions. Continue? [y|n]: y Removing FFXCP1040.tar.gz. Mounted USB device 0MB received 1MB received ... 44MB received 45MB received Download successful: 46827 Kbytes in 109 secs (430.094 Kbytes/sec) Checking file... MD5: e619e6dd367c888507427e58cdb8e0a4

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

flashupdate(8)

System Administration

77

getflashimage(8)

78

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

ioxadm(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

ioxadm - manage External I/O Expansion Units ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] env [-e] [-l] [-t] [ target [ sensors]] ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] list [ target] ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] locator [on|off] [ target] ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] poweroff target ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] poweron target ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] reset target ioxadm [-f] [-p] [-v] [-M] setled [ on|off|slow|fast] target led_type ioxadm -h

DESCRIPTION

ioxadm(8) manages External I/O Expansion Units and link cards attached to the system. The ioxadm(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. For this utility, an operand with parameters and a target device must both be specified. The target device can be a downlink card mounted in a built-in PCI slot in the host system; an External I/O Expansion Unit; or a field replaceable unit (FRU) in an External I/O Expansion Unit. The downlink card is identified by a string which identifies the host path to the card. An uplink card is an FRU in the I/O boat.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run these commands: Required Privileges

Operands

platop

env, list

platadm

env, list, locator, poweroff, poweron

fieldeng

All operands

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

79

ioxadm(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -f

Forces command execution by ignoring warnings.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-p

Parsable output. Suppresses headers in display output. Fields are separated by single tabs.

-v

Specifies verbose output. Refer to specific operands for details.

The following operands are supported: env [-elt] [target [sensors]] Displays a summary of an External I/O Expansion Unit or link card’s environmental state. ■

-e Displays electrical states: measured voltage, current, fan speed, switch settings.



-l Displays LED states.



-t Displays thermal readings.

If no target is specified, env displays a list of all sensors for all External I/O Expansion Units. If target specifies a box_id, env displays a list of sensor readings for all frus in the specified External I/O Expansion Unit and the attached downlink cards. If target is in the form of box_id followed by fru, then only environmentals from that FRU will be printed. If an optional value for sensors is specified, then only those types of sensors are displayed. These options may be used concurrently. If target is in the form of a host path, only the downlink card information is displayed. See EXAMPLE 2.

80

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

ioxadm(8)

The results are listed in tabular format. Each FRU sensor is listed in the first column. In the next column is the sensor name, such as T_AMBIENT for ambient temperature, or V_12V_0V for the voltage reading of the 12V rail. The third, fourth, and fifth columns display the sensor reading (Value), sensor resolution (Res), and Units, respectively. See EXAMPLE 1. Each FRU can have a variety of different sensors. When specifying multiple values for sensors, use spaces to separate the values. Possible values for sensors can be seen in the Sensor column of EXAMPLE 1. Units are given in Celsius degrees, Volts, Amperes, SWITCH and RPM. The sensors names are FRU-dependent and may change from FRU type to FRU type and even among individual FRUs. If the -v option is set, verbose output is displayed. In addition to the regular output, the output also includes: the maximum and minimum values supported by the sensors (Max and Min), along with the low and high warning thresholds (Min Alarm and Max Alarm). LED indicators do not support these fields. Fields containing a "–" indicate an unsupported setting. For example, there may be no minimum temperature alarm threshold. led_type Used with the setled operand, specifies a software-controlled FRU LED. The following table indicates which LED states can be controlled using the setled operand with the off, on, fast, and slow LED state settings. Y (yes) indicates that the LED can be controlled, N (no) indicates that it cannot be controlled. LED ACTIVE LOCATE SERVICE RDY2RM OVERTEMP DCOK POWER DATA MGMT

Name Power/OK Locate Fault/Locate Ready to remove Overtemp DC Power AC Power Data Management

off Y Y Y Y * N N N N

on Y N Y Y * N N N N

fast Y Y Y Y * N N N N

slow Y N Y Y * N N N N

* The OVERTEMP LED and chassis ACTIVE LED may be set to each state. However, the hardware frequently updates the LED state so changes to the LED state may not be visible.

Note – Other LEDs are not under software control. A list of LEDs present in the system can be displayed by using the "env -l" operand.

System Administration

81

ioxadm(8)

list [target] Lists the External I/O Expansion Units under system management. If no target is specified, list displays a list of External I/O Expansion Units, one per line. Each line contains the unique identifier for that box and the host-specific name(s) for its downlink card(s). See EXAMPLE 3. If an External I/O Expansion Unit argument or downlink card path is specified, the command displays a single line with the indicated FRU. If a host path is specified, only the downlink card information is displayed. See EXAMPLE 4 and EXAMPLE 6. If the verbose option is set [-v], the output includes detailed FRU information. See EXAMPLE 5. locator [on |off] [target] Sets or queries the state of the locator indicator (LED). Without options, locator reports the current state of the LED on the specified FRU. If no target is specified, locator returns the current state of all locator LEDs. A target argument is required when using the option fields: on Turns the LED on. off Turns the LED off. The chassis locator is a white LED. If an FRU is specified, the FRU yellow service LED is used along with the chassis (locator) LED. Only one FRU can have a location indicator enabled at a time in an External I/O Expansion Unit chassis. Turning off the chassis (locator) LED will also turn off the blinking (service) FRU LED. poweroff target Powers down the given FRU and lights appropriate LEDs to indicate the FRU is ready to remove. Must be used with the -f option. Be aware that using -f can crash the domain. Do not remove both power supply units (PSUs) in the same External I/O Expansion Unit. If both PSUs are powered down in this way, then the External I/O Expansion Unit cannot be turned back on from the command line. It must be powered on physically.

82

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

ioxadm(8)

Note – When a power supply is powered off, the LEDs and fan may still run since they receive power from both supplies. poweron target Restores full power to an I/O boat or reenables output from the power supply (PS) that has previously been marked ready-to-remove. When a PSU is newly installed and the power switch is in the on position, or a boat is connected to a powered link card, they automatically power themselves on. However, this command can be used to power a PSU or I/O boat back on that previously had been powered down for removal as long as the power switch is in the on position. reset target Reinitializes FRU components used to monitor External I/O Expansion Unit environmentals. If a boat or link card is specified, the bridge controllers in the link cards are reset and re-initialized. If a box is specified, the fan controller and demux in the box are reset and re-initialized along with all bridge controllers associated with the External I/O Expansion Unit. setled [on|off|slow|fast] target led_type Sets LED state: off

Off.

on

On.

fast

Fast blink.

slow

Slow blink.

Refer to the entry for led_type in this section for detailed information about LED types. target Specifies the target device which can be a downlink card in a host slot, an External I/O Expansion Unit, or an FRU in an External I/O Expansion Unit. The downlink card is identified by the hostpath to the card. hostpath is platform dependent and indicates the path to the slot on the host system which contains the downlink card. On SPARC Enterprise M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 servers, the hostpath has the following format: IOU#0-PCI#0 IO Board 0, PCI-E slot0

System Administration

83

ioxadm(8)

The External I/O Expansion Unit (box_id) is identified by serial number. Use iox@nnnn, where nnnn represents the last four digits of the box serial number. Some commands affect only a single component of an External I/O Expansion Unit system. For example, individual boats and power supplies may be turned on and turned off independently. An FRU in an External I/O Expansion Unit (fru) is identified as: iox@nnnn/iob0 – I/O boat in the left tray (rear view) iox@nnnn/iob1 – I/O boat in the right tray (rear view) iox@nnnn/iob0/link – Uplink card in boat 0 iox@nnnn/iob1/link – Uplink card in boat 1 iox@nnnn/ps0 – Power supply in the left bay (front view) iox@nnnn/ps1 – Power supply in the right bay (front view) EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying Temperature, Voltage, Current, and Fanspeed Sensor Readings

XSCF> ioxadm env -te iox@A3B5

84

Location

Sensor

Value

Res

Units

IOX@A3B5/PS0

T_AMBIENT

28.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/PS0

T_CHIP

28.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/PS0

T_HOTSPOT

31.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/PS0

SWITCH

On

-

IOX@A3B5/PS0

V_12V_ANODE

11.703

0.059

V

IOX@A3B5/PS0

V_12V_CATHODE

11.703

0.059

V

IOX@A3B5/PS0

V_ISHARE

0.632

0.040

V

IOX@A3B5/PS0

I_DC

2.316

0.289

A

IOX@A3B5/PS0

S_FAN_ACTUAL

3708.791

40.313

RPM

IOX@A3B5/PS0

S_FAN_SET

4500.000

300.000

RPM

IOX@A3B5/PS1

T_AMBIENT

28.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/PS1

T_CHIP

29.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/PS1

T_HOTSPOT

31.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/PS1

SWITCH

On

-

IOX@A3B5/PS1

V_12V_ANODE

11.762

0.059

V

IOX@A3B5/PS1

V_12V_CATHODE

11.762

0.059

V

IOX@A3B5/PS1

V_ISHARE

0.672

0.040

V

SWITCH

SWITCH

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

ioxadm(8)

IOX@A3B5/PS1

I_DC

5.211

0.289

IOX@A3B5/PS1

S_FAN_ACTUAL

4115.854

49.588

RPM

IOX@A3B5/PS1

S_FAN_SET

4500.000

300.000

RPM

IOX@A3B5/IOB0

T_CHIP

32.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/IOB0

T_HOTSPOT

35.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

T_CHIP

33.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

T_HOTSPOT

36.000

1.000

C

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

V_12_0V

12.052

0.005

V

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

V_12V_MAIN

12.000

0.400

V

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

V_1_0V

1.030

0.001

V

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

V_1_5V

1.496

0.001

V

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

V_3_3V

3.291

0.002

V

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

V_3_3AUX

3.308

0.002

V

IOX@A3B5/IOB1

I_DC

8.600

0.200

A

IOX@A3B5/IOB1/LINK

T_SIGCON0

45.000

40.000

C

IOX@A3B5/IOB1/LINK

T_SIGCON1

45.000

40.000

C

IOU#1-PCI#1

T_SIGCON0

45.000

40.000

C

IOU#1-PCI#1

T_SIGCON1

45.000

40.000

C

EXAMPLE 2

A

Display All Sensor Readings on a Link and Suppressing Headers

XSCF> ioxadm -p env iou#1-pci#1 IOU#1-PCI#1

T_SIGCON0 45.000

40.000 C

IOU#1-PCI#1

T_SIGCON1 45.000

40.000 C

IOU#1-PCI#1

DATA

On

-

LED

IOU#1-PCI#1

MGMT

Flash

-

LED

EXAMPLE 3

Display All External I/O Expansion Units or Downlink Card Paths

XSCF> ioxadm list IOX

Link 0

IOX@0033

IOU#1-PCI#4

IOX@12B4

-

-

IOU#2-PCI#1

Link 1 IOU#1-PCI#1 IOU#1-PCI#2

System Administration

85

ioxadm(8)

In EXAMPLE 3, the list command is used to display the connections between External I/O Expansion Units and downlink cards in the host. IOX@0033 (which includes boats, uplink cards, and power supplies) is connected to the host through two downlink cards. The Link 0 column shows which host downlink card is attached to boat0. The Link 1 column shows which host downlink card is attached to boat1. IOX@12B4 is connected to the host through one downlink card. This card is connected to boat1. A "–" shows that there is no host link connection to the box. It may have a boat and uplink card installed in the bay, or the bay could be empty. If the boat is installed, either it is not connected to the host, or the host downlink card slot is powered off. EXAMPLE 4

Displaying a Single External I/O Expansion Unit

XSCF> ioxadm list iox@12B4 IOX

Link 0

Link 1

IOX@12B4

-

IOU#1-PCI#2

EXAMPLE 5

Displaying a Single External I/O Expansion Unit Using Verbose Output

XSCF> ioxadm -v list IOU#1-PCI#1 Location

Type

FW Ver Serial Num Part Num

IOX@X07A

IOX

2.1

XCX07A

CF005016937/5016937-03 On

IOX@X07A/PS0

A195

-

DD0579

CF003001701/3001701-04 On

IOX@X07A/PS1

A195

-

DD0588

CF003001701/3001701-04 On

IOX@X07A/IOB0

PCIE

-

XE00E5

CF005016939/5016939-05 On

IOX@X07A/IOB0/LINK CU

2.0

XF01HJ

CF005017040/5017040-04 On

IOU#0-PCI#3

2.0

XF01AD

CF005017040/5017040-03 On

EXAMPLE 6

CU

State

Displaying a Downlink Card Using Hostpath in Verbose Mode With Headers Suppressed

XSCF> ioxadm -p -v list IOU#0-PCI#2 IOU#0-PCI#2

EXAMPLE 7

OP

2.0

XF01A1

CF005017040/5017040-03

Powering On the Locator LED for Power Supply 0 in External I/O Expansion Unit 12B4

XSCF> ioxadm locator on iox@12B4/ps0

86

on

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

ioxadm(8) EXAMPLE 8

Displaying Locator LED Status for the External I/O Expansion Unit

XSCF> ioxadm locator iox@12B4 Location

Sensor

Value

Resolution

Units

IOX@12B4

LOCATE

Fast

-

LED

IOX@12B4/PS0

SERVICE

Fast

-

LED

If the FRU service indicator is already on due to a detected fault condition, only the box locator LED will be set to fast. EXAMPLE 9

Enabling the Indicator for Power Supply 1 When Power Supply 1 Has a Fault Indication

XSCF> ioxadm locator on iox@x031/ps1 XSCF> ioxadm locator Location

Sensor

IOX@X031

LOCATE

Value Resolution Units Fast

- LED

XSCF> ioxadm env -1 iox@x031/ps1 SERVICE Location

Sensor

IOX@X031/PS1

SERVICE

Value Resolution Units On

- LED

The External I/O Expansion Unit chassis white LED has an integrated push button. The button can be used to toggle the state of the chassis white locator LED between off and fast. If the push button is used to turn off the locator LED, fast blink FRU service LEDs are cleared. EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

87

ioxadm(8)

88

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

man(1)

NAME SYNOPSIS

man - display manual pages of specified XSCF shell command man command_name ... man -h

DESCRIPTION Privileges

man(1) displays manual pages of specified XSCF shell command. No privileges are required to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported; Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-h

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: command_name

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION



If the relevant manual page is too long, the page is divided into pages that each can fit on one screen. In such cases, the following key operations are available:

Key

Description

Enter

Displays the next line.

space

Displays the next page.

b

Goes back half a page.

q

Quits display of the page in the manual.



EXAMPLES

Specifies the command name whose manual page is displayed. Multiple command_name can be specified by delimited the spaces.

If intro is specified for command_name, a list of XSCF shell commands is displayed.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the manual page of the addboard(8) command.

XSCF> man addboard

EXAMPLE 2

Displays a list of XSCF shell commands.

XSCF> man intro

System Administration

89

man(1)

EXIT STATUS

90

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

moveboard(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

moveboard - move an eXtended System Board (XSB) from the current domain to another moveboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] [-c configure] -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...] moveboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c assign -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...] moveboard [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-v] -c reserve -d domain_id xsb [ xsb...] moveboard -h

DESCRIPTION

The moveboard(8) command disconnects an XSB from the current domain and, based on the domain component list (DCL), assigns it to, or configures it in, the specified domain. The moveboard(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. One of the following movement methods can be specified:

Privileges

configure

Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and configures it into the specified destination domain configuration. The incorporated XSB can be accessed from the Solaris OS.

assign

Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and assigns it to the specified destination domain configuration. The assigned XSB is reserved for the specified domain and cannot be configured in or assigned to other domains. The assigned system board is configured in the domain by reboot the domain or execution of the addboard(8) command with "-c configure".

reserve

Reserves disconnection of the specified XSB from the domain configuration of the move source, and reserves assignment of the XSB to the domain configuration of the move destination. The XSB is assigned to the domain configuration of the move destination when the domain power of the move source is turned off or rebooted. The XSB is subsequently incorporated when the domain power of the move destination is turned on or rebooted.

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm

Can run this command only for your managed domains.

Note – You must have the domainadm privileges for both of source domain and destination domain to run moveboard(8) command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

91

moveboard(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c assign

Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and assigns it to the domain configuration of the move destination. If the -c option is omitted, "-c configure" is used.

-c configure

Disconnects a configured XSB from its domain configuration and configures it in the domain configuration of the move destination. If the -c option is omitted, "-c configure" is used.

-c reserve

Reserves disconnection of an XSB from its current domain configuration, and reserves assignment of the XSB to the domain configuration of the move destination. If the -c option is omitted, "-c configure" is used.

-d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the destination domain in which an XSB is to be moved. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-f

Forcibly detaches the specified XSB.

Caution – If the -f option is used to forcibly remove the XSB from the source domain, a serious problem may occur in a process bound to CPU or process accessing a device. For this reason, use of the -f option is not recommended in normal operation. If the -f option must be specified, verify the statuses of the source domain and job processes. Note – The XSB which failed or detected the failure will not be configured to the DCL forcibly.

92

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-v

Specifies verbose output. If this option is specified with the -q option, the -v option is ignored.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

moveboard(8)

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: xsb

Specifies the XSB number to be moved. Multiple xsb operands are permitted, separated by spaces. The following xsb form is accepted: x–y where:

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

An integer from 00–15.

y

An integer from 0–3.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



If "-c configure" is specified when either of the following conditions apply to the domains, the XSB is configured in the domain configuration:





The Solaris OS of both the source and destination domains are running.



The Solaris OS of the destination domain is running even though the source domain is powered off.

If "-c assign" is specified when either of the following conditions apply to the domains, the XSB is assigned to the domain configuration: ■

The Solaris OS of the source domain is running.



The source domain is powered off



If "-c reserve" is specified when either the domain power of the move source has been turned off or the Solaris OS is not running, the XSB is immediately disconnected from the domain of the move source and assigned to the domain of the move destination



Moving the XSB involves the following internal operations and therefore command execution may take time.



EXAMPLES

x



Disconnecting the hardware resource of the XSB from the Solaris OS



Running a hardware diagnosis on the XSB when connecting it

See the setdcl(8) and showdcl(8) commands for DCL.

EXAMPLE 1

Disconnects XSB#00-0 from the current domain and attaches it to domain ID 1.

XSCF> moveboard -d 1 00-0

System Administration

93

moveboard(8) EXAMPLE 2

Reserves assignment of the XSB#00-0 to the domain ID 1.

XSCF> moveboard -d 1 -c reserve 00-0

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

94

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), deleteboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

nslookup(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

nslookup - refer to the DNS server for the host nslookup hostname nslookup -h

DESCRIPTION

nslookup(8) refers to the DNS server for the host. The following information is displayed:

Privileges

Server

DNS server name

Address

IP address of DNS server

Name

Specified host name

Address

IP address of the host name

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -h

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: hostname

EXAMPLES

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies the host name to be referred. A Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) or a short form of the name can be specified. Displays the host whose host name is scf0-hostname0.

XSCF> nslookup scf0-hostname0 Server:

server.example.com

Address: xx.xx.xx.xx

Name:

scf0-hostname0.example.com

Address: xx.xx.xx.xx

System Administration

95

nslookup(8)

EXIT STATUS

96

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

password(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

password - manage user passwords and expiration settings password [-e days| date|Never] [-i inactive] [-M maxdays] [-n mindays] [-w warn] [ user] password -h

DESCRIPTION

password (8) changes a user’s password and password expiration settings. The password is specified in up to 32 characters. The following characters are valid: 1. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 2. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 3. 0123456789 4. !@#$%^&*[]{}()-+=‘~,>
Caution – When you change the password for another user by using the user operand, the system password policy is not enforced. The user operand is intended only for creating a new user’s initial password or replacing a lost or forgotten password for a user account. When changing another user’s password, be sure to choose a password that conforms with the system password policy. You can display the current password policy settings with the showpasswordpolicy(8) command. Whether the user name is specified or not, the account must be local. password returns an error if it is not local. Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm

Can run this command with or without any options or operand. Can change the password for any account.

No privileges are required in the following cases: ■

To change the password for the current user account



To use the -h option

System Administration

97

password(8)

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported -e days|date|Never

days sets the number of days, starting from today, during which the XSCF account is enabled. days is in the format of a number (0-10730). If the current date plus the number of days exceeds January 2038 the number is considered invalid and the command will fail. date sets the date when the account expires, not exceeding January 2038. The date format can be: mm/dd/yy (10/30/08) yyyy-mm-dd (2008-10-30) yy-mm-dd (08-10-30) dd-Mmm-yy (30-Oct-08) dd-Mmm-yyyy (30-Oct-2008) dd Mmm yy (“30 Oct 08”) dd Mmm yyyy (“30 Oct 2008”) Mmm dd, yy (“Oct 30, 08”) Mmm dd, yyyy (“Oct 30, 2008”) Quotes must be used for formats with an embedded space. It is case insensitive. Never means an account will not expire.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-i inactive

98

Sets the number of days after a password expires until the account is locked. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created. The initial value is –1. A value of –1 means that the account will not be locked after the password expires. Valid values are integers with value of –1 or greater.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

password(8)

-M maxdays

Sets the maximum number of days that a password is valid. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created. The initial value is 999999. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

-n mindays

Sets the minimum number of days between password changes. An initial value of zero for this field indicates that you can change the password at any time. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created.

-w warn

Sets the default number of days before password expiration at which to start warning the user. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created. The initial value is 7. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: user

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies a valid user name. Enabling Password Until February 2, 2008

XSCF> password -e 2008-02-02

EXAMPLE 2

Set Password Lock 10 Days After Password Expiration

XSCF> password -i 10

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setpasswordpolicy(8), showpasswordpolicy(8)

System Administration

99

password(8)

100

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

ping(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

ping - sends the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packets to the network host or the network device ping [-c count] [-q] host ping -h

DESCRIPTION

The ping(8) command utilizes the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from the specified host or network device. When the ping(8) command normally executed, the network between XSCF and the specified host or network device can be judged as normal. And the network performance can be measured from the result.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: ■

To execute the command to DSCP address: platadm, fieldeng



To execute the command to "localhost" or to the loopback address (127.0.0.0/8): fieldeng



To execute the command to Inter SCF Network (ISN): fieldeng



The case other than those above: No privileges are required.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

OPERANDS

The following options are supported: -c count

Specifies the number of times to send the packet. After sent the packet for the number of specified times and received its response, the ping(8) command terminates. If omitted, the command continues sending the packet until the interrupt occurs.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-q

Suppresses the output. Outputs the data at the start and at the end of the command.

The following operand is supported: host

Specifies the network host or the network device to send the packet. Can be specified with host name or IP address.

System Administration

101

ping(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Sends the packet three times to a host named scf0-hostname0.

XSCF> ping -c 3 scf0-hostname0 PING scf0-hostname0 (XX.XX.XX.XX): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from XX.XX.XX.XX: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.1 ms 64 bytes from XX.XX.XX.XX: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.1 ms 64 bytes from XX.XX.XX.XX: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.1 ms

--- scf0-hostname0 ping statistics --3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.1/0.1 ms

EXIT STATUS

102

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

poweroff(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

poweroff - turn off the power to the specified domain poweroff [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-f] [-M] -d domain_id poweroff [ [-q] -{y|n}] -a [-M] poweroff -h

DESCRIPTION

The poweroff(8) command turns off the power to the specified domain. The command can turn off the power to the specified domain or to all domains. After ordinary shutdown processing for the operating system is executed, the power is turned off.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, fieldeng

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm, domainmgr Can run this command only for your managed domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Turns off the power to all domains. Only users who have the platadm and fieldeng privileges can specify this option. This option turns off the power to a system in process of warm-up or air-conditioning, or to a domain in process of power-on.

-d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the domain to be turned off. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration. This option does not turn off the power to a system in process of warm-up or airconditioning, or to a domain in process of power-on.

-f

Uses XSCF to forcibly turn off the power to the specified domain. This option is used together with the -d option.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

System Administration

103

poweroff(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



If the Solaris OS of the target domain is running, the poweroff(8) command processing is equivalent to that of the shutdown(1M) command with the "-i5" option specified.



A domain cannot be powered off while the Solaris OS of the domain is booting. Execute the poweroff(8) command again after the booting is completed.



A domain cannot be powered off by the poweroff(8) command while the Solaris OS of the domain is running in single-user mode. Execute the shutdown(1M) command in the domain.



When the poweroff(8) command is executed, power-off results for each of the specified domains are displayed in the following format:

Powered off

The power was turned off normally.

Not Powering off

An error occurred, and the power could not be turned off. An error message is displayed with "Not Powering off."



EXAMPLES

The showdomainstatus(8) command can be used to check the power of each domain on the system is off.

EXAMPLE 1

Turns off power to all domains.

XSCF> poweroff -a DomainIDs to power off:00,01,02,03 Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Powering off 01:Powering off 02:Powering off 03:Powering off

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to power-off. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

104

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

poweroff(8) EXAMPLE 2

Turns off power to domains with domain IDs 0.

XSCF> poweroff -d 0 DomainIDs to power off:00 Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Powering off

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to power-off. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

EXAMPLE 3

Forcibly turns off power to domains with domain IDs 0.

XSCF> poweroff -f -d 0 DomainIDs to power off:00 The -f option will cause domains to be immediately resets. Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Powering off

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to power-off. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

EXAMPLE 4

Turns off power to domains with domain IDs 2. Automatically replies with 'y' to the prompt.

XSCF> poweroff -y -d 2 DomainIDs to power off:02 Continue? [y|n]:y 02:Powering off

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to power-off. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

EXAMPLE 5

Turns off power to domains with domain IDs 2. Automatically replies with

System Administration

105

poweroff(8) 'y' without displaying the prompt. XSCF> poweroff -q -y -d 2

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

106

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

poweron(8), reset(8), showdomainstatus(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

poweron(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

poweron - turn on the power to the specified domain poweron [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-M] -d domain_id poweron [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-M] -a poweron -h

DESCRIPTION

The poweron(8) command turns on the power to the specified domain. The command can turn on the power to the specified domain or to all domains.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, fieldeng

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm, domainmgr Can run this command only for your managed domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

The following options are supported: -a

Turns on the power to every domain that has been completely set up. Only users who have the platadm or fieldeng privileges can specify this option. The "domain that has been completely set up" means a domain that has been completely set up with the setdcl(8) and addboard(8) commands.

-d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the domain to be turned on. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.

System Administration

107

poweron(8) ■

When the poweron(8) command is executed, power-on results for each of the specified domains are displayed in the following format:

Powering on

The power was turned on normally.

Not Powering on An error occurred, and the power could not be turned on. An error message is displayed with Not Powering on. ■

EXAMPLES

The showdomainstatus(8) command can be used to check whether the power of each domain on the system is on.

EXAMPLE 1

Turns on power to all domains.

XSCF> poweron -a DomainIDs to power on:00,01,02,03 Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Powering on 01:Powering on 02:Powering on 03:Powering on

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to power-on. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

EXAMPLE 2

Turns on power to domains with domain IDs 0.

XSCF> poweron -d 0 DomainIDs to power on:00 Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Powering on

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to power-on. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

EXAMPLE 3

108

Turns on power to domains with domain IDs 0. Automatically replies with 'y'

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

poweron(8) to the prompt. XSCF> poweron -y -d 0 DomainIDs to power on:00 Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Powering on

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to power-on. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power". XSCF>

EXAMPLE 4

Turns on power to domains with domain IDs 1. Automatically replies with 'y' without displaying the prompt.

XSCF> poweron -q -y -d 1

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

poweroff(8), reset(8), showdomainstatus(8)

System Administration

109

poweron(8)

110

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

prtfru(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

prtfru - display FRUID data on the system and External I/O Expansion Unit prtfru [-c] [-l] [-M] [-x] [ container] prtfru -h

DESCRIPTION

prtfru is used to obtain Field Replaceable Unit Identifier (FRUID) data from the system and External I/O Expansion Unit. Its output is a tree structure, echoing the path in the FRU tree to each container. When a container is found, the data from that container is printed in a tree structure as well. prtfru without any arguments prints the FRU hierarchy and all of the FRUID container data. prtfru prints to the screen. Output can be redirected to a file.

Note – FRU information from the domains is not available using this command. Privileges

You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c

Prints only the containers and their data. This option does not print the FRU tree hierarchy.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-l

Prints only the FRU tree hierarchy. This option does not print the container data.

-x

Prints in XML format with a system identifier (SYSTEM) of prtfrureg.dtd.

The following operands are supported: container

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

The path and name of the particular hardware that holds data. Displaying FRU Tree Hierarchy

XSCF> prtfru -l /frutree /frutree/chassis (fru) /frutree/chassis/iou0

System Administration

111

prtfru(8)

/frutree/chassis/iou0/IOU (fru) /frutree/chassis/iou0/IOU/slot3 /frutree/chassis/iou0/IOU/slot3/LINK (container) /frutree/chassis/iou0/IOU/slot3/LINK/iox983392.IOX.iob1.PCIX.LINK (fru) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031 /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/ps0 /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/ps0/A195 (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/ps1 /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/ps1/A195 (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/iob1 /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/iob1/PCIX (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/iob1/PCIX/LINK (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/iob1/PCIX/LINK/ iou0.IOU.slot3.LINK (fru) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/CPUM#0/CPUM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/CPUM#1/CPUM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0 (fru) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/CPUM#1/CPUM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0 (fru) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#0/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#1/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#2/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#3/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#4/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#5/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#6/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#7/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1 (fru) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#8/MEM (container)

112

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

prtfru(8)

/frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#9/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#10/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#11/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#12/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#13/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#14/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#15/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/XSCFU (container) /frutree/chassis/OPNL (container) /frutree/chassis/PSU#0 (fru) /frutree/chassis/PSU#0/PSU (container) /frutree/chassis/PSU#2 (fru) /frutree/chassis/PSU#2/PSU (container) /frutree/chassis/IOU#0 (fru) /frutree/chassis/IOU#0/IOU (container) /frutree/chassis/IOU#0/IOU/DDCR#0/DDCR (container) /frutree/chassis/FANBP_C#0 (fru) /frutree/chassis/FANBP_C#0/FANBP_C (container)

EXAMPLE 2

Displaying A list of Containers

XSCF> prtfru -lc /frutree/chassis/iou0/IOU/slot3/LINK (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/ps0/A195 (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/ps1/A195 (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/iob1/PCIX (container) /frutree/chassis/iox983392?Label=IOX@XCX031/IOX/iob1/PCIX/LINK (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/CPUM#0/CPUM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/CPUM#1/CPUM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#0/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#1/MEM (container)

System Administration

113

prtfru(8)

/frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#2/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#3/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#4/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#5/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#6/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#0/MEMB/MEM#7/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#8/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#9/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#10/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#11/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#12/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#13/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#14/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/MBU_B/MEMB#1/MEMB/MEM#15/MEM (container) /frutree/chassis/XSCFU (container) /frutree/chassis/OPNL (container) /frutree/chassis/PSU#0/PSU (container) /frutree/chassis/PSU#2/PSU (container) /frutree/chassis/IOU#0/IOU (container) /frutree/chassis/IOU#0/IOU/DDCR#0/DDCR (container) /frutree/chassis/FANBP_C#0/FANBP_C (container)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

114

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

ioxadm(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

rebootxscf(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

rebootxscf - reset the XSCF rebootxscf [ [-q] -{y|n}] rebootxscf -h

DESCRIPTION

The rebootxscf(8) command resets the XSCF. In the M8000/M9000 servers, both of the active XSCF and the standby XSCF will be reset.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privilege to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



When you cancel the XSCF reset using the setdate(8) which commands reset XSCF automatically, even if you perform this command, the information that is set is not applied in XSCF.

EXAMPLE 1

Resets the XSCF.

XSCF> rebootxscf The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n]:y

EXAMPLE 2

Resets the XSCF. Automatically replies with 'y' to the prompt.

XSCF> rebootxscf -y The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n]:y

EXAMPLE 3

Resets the XSCF. Automatically replies with 'y' without displaying the prompt.

XSCF> rebootxscf -q -y

System Administration

115

rebootxscf(8) EXAMPLE 4

Cancels the rebootxscf(8) command execution that is in progress.

XSCF> rebootxscf The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n]:n XSCF>

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

116

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

applynetwork(8), setdate(8), sethttps(8), setssh(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

replacefru(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

replacefru - replace a field replaceable unit (FRU) replacefru replacefru -h

DESCRIPTION

The replacefru(8) command replaces an FRU. The command allows the user to select, confirm, and replace the FRU interactively using menus. The following FRUs can be replaced using the replacefru(8) command.

Privileges



CPU/Memory Board unit (CMU)



I/O unit (IOU)



FAN unit (FANU)



Power supply unit (PSU)



XSCF unit (XSCFU)

You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported. -h

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

Displays usage statement.

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), addfru(8), deleteboard(8), deletefru(8), setupfru(8), showdcl(8), showdomainstatus(8), showfru(8), showhardconf(8), testsb(8), unlockmaintenance(8)

System Administration

117

replacefru(8)

118

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

reset(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

reset - reset the specified domain reset [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id level reset -h

DESCRIPTION

Note – Since the reset(8) command forcibly resets the system, this command may cause a failure in a hard disk drive or other components. Use this command only for the purpose of recovery, such as if the Solaris OS hangs, and for other limited purposes. The reset(8) command resets the specified domain. The following three levels of resetting can be specified:

Privileges

por

Resets the domain system.

panic

Instructs the Solaris OS of the domain to generate a panic. The command is ignored if it is issued during power-off or shutdown.

xir

Resets the domain CPU.

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, fieldeng

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm, domainmgr Can run this command only for your managed domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Specifies only one ID of the domain to be reset. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

System Administration

119

reset(8)

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: level

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

Specifies the level of resetting. One of the following can be specified. This operand cannot be omitted. por

Resets the domain system.

panic

Instructs the Solaris OS of the domain to generate a panic.

xir

Resets the domain CPU.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



The showdomainstatus(8) command can be used to check whether the domain has been reset.



If the reset(8) command is executed under either of the following conditions, processing is stopped before the Solaris OS is started: ■

The Mode switch on the operator panel is set to Service mode



The auto boot function has been disabled by the setdomainmode (8) command

EXAMPLE 1

Causes a panic in domain ID 0.

XSCF> reset -d 0 panic DomainID to panic:00 Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Panicked

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to reset. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

EXAMPLE 2

Resets the CPU in domain ID 0. Automatically answers 'y' to all prompts.

XSCF> reset -y -d 0 xir DomainID to reset:00 Continue? [y|n]:y 00:Reset

120

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

reset(8)

*Note* This command only issues the instruction to reset. The result of the instruction can be checked by the "showlogs power".

EXAMPLE 3

Resets domain ID 0. Suppresses prompts, and automatically answers 'y' to all prompts.

XSCF> reset -q -y -d 0 por

EXAMPLE 4

Cancels the reset command execution that is in progress.

XSCF> reset -d 0 panic DomainID to panic:00 Continue? [y|n]:n

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

poweroff(8), poweron(8), setdomainmode(8), showdomainstatus(8)

System Administration

121

reset(8)

122

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

resetdateoffset(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

resetdateoffset - reset the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain resetdateoffset resetdateoffset -h

DESCRIPTION

The resetdateoffset(8) command resets the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain, which stored in XSCF. Usually, the time of the domain is synchronized with the time of XSCF. When the time of the domain changed by using a command such as the date(1M) which prepared in the Solaris OS of domain, the time subtraction between the time of XSCF and the changed time of domain will be stored in XSCF. The stored time subtraction remains after the domain reboot or after the XSCF reset by using a command such as the rebootxscf(8), with the result that the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain remains stored. The resetdateoffset(8) command resets the every time subtraction between XSCF and each domain, which stored in XSCF. As a result, the time of domain after startup will be set to the same time as XSCF.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

Displays usage statement.

The resetdateoffset(8) command needs to be executed in the system power-off status. EXAMPLE 1

Resets the time subtraction between XSCF and the domain.

XSCF> resetdateoffset

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

123

resetdateoffset(8)

124

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

restoreconfig(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

restoreconfig - restore the system configuration information previously saved by dumpconfig restoreconfig [-v] [-V] [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-P password] [-s network={yes|no}] [-u user] [-p proxy [-t proxy_type]] url restoreconfig -h

DESCRIPTION

The restoreconfig(8) command will restore system configuration information saved using the dumpconfig(8) command. The command will verify the integrity of the configuration file, look for network information, and detect if the configuration file version and system class are compatible.

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Reserved user accounts default and admin can also run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-P password

The password to decode an encrypted file. The command will prompt for the password if a password is not provided on command line.

-p proxy

Specifies the proxy server to be used for transfers. The default transfer type is http, unless modified using the -t proxy_type option. The value for proxy must be in the format servername:port. (Refer to Example 3.)

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-s network={yes|no} force/prevent restoration of the network configuration. If network=yes, the network configuration data will be restored. If network=no, the network configuration data will not be restored. If this option is not specified, the serial number of the target system will be compared with the serial number of the configuration file and if the numbers match the configuration data will be restored.

System Administration

125

restoreconfig(8)

OPERANDS

-t proxy_type

Used with the -p option to specify the type of proxy. Possible values for proxy_type are: http, socks4, and socks5. The default value is http.

-u user

Specifies the user name when logging in to a remote ftp or http server that requires authentication. You will be prompted for a password.

-v

Displays verbose output. This may be helpful when diagnosing server problems.

-V

Displays details of network activity. This may be helpful when diagnosing network or server problems.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following operand is supported: url

Specifies the URL of the firmware image to download. Supported formats for this value include the following: http://server[:port]/path/file https://server[:port]/path/file ftp://server[:port]/path/file file:///media/usb_msd/path/file

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

Basic identification information is included in plain text at the top of the configuration file. The user can use any text viewer to determine information such as: ■

which system created the backup up configuration



when the backup was created



if the backup is encrypted

All the domains must be turned off before this command can be used. This command will download and validate the configuration file. After validation, the system will be rebooted in order to perform the restoration. After the data is restored, the system will be halted, and will need to be power-cycled to restart. Please make sure that you have the ability to power-cycle the system before initiating this command. On an M8000/M9000 server, both XSCF units will be halted. Please check that both XSCF units are halted before performing the power cycle. Note that the configuration data file can be restored only to the same class of server, i.e. a configuration file created by dumpconfig(8) on an M5000 server can be

126

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

restoreconfig(8)

restored to another M5000 server, but it cannot be restored to an M3000 or M8000 etc server. EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Restoring the Configuration using FTP

XSCF> restoreconfig -V -u manilla 129.145.155.156:8080 ftp:/ 10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest-ftp.cfg transfer from ’/tmp/dumpconfig.EvY1Yf’ to ’ftp://10.7.79.18/sollgell/ proxytest-ftp.cfg’ Password: * About to connect() to 129.145.155.166 port 8080 *

Trying 129.145.155.166... * connected

* Connected to 129.145.155.166 (129.145.155.166) port 8080 * Proxy auth using (nil) with user ’’ * Server auth using Basic with user ’minilla’ > GET ftp://10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest-ftp.cfg HTTP/1.1 Authorization: Basic bHdhbmc6bHdhbmc= User-Agent: restoreconfig Host: 10.7.79.18:21 Pragma: no-cache Accept: */* < HTTP/1.1 200 OK < Server: Sun-Java-System-Web-Proxy-Server/4.0 < Date: Thu, 07 Aug 2008 18:01:00 GMT < Proxy-agent: Sun-Java-System-Web-Proxy-Server/4.0 < Via: 1.1 proxy-proxy < Transfer-encoding: chunked * Connection #0 to host 129.145.155.166 left intact * Closing connection #0 Configuration backup created on Mon Aug

4 12:58:19 2008

from system ’M3000’ with serial number ’IKS08220xx’, version ’19830000’ *** You will need to power-cycle the entire system after this operation is completed *** Do you want to restore this configuration to your system? [y|n]: y requesting XSCF reboot to perform restore ... requested Connection to ghidorah.com closed by foreign host.

System Administration

127

restoreconfig(8) EXAMPLE 2

Restoring the Configuration Using http

XSCF> restoreconfig -V -p 129.145.155.166:8080 http://10.7.79.18/

sollgell/proxytest.cfg transfer from ’/scf/firmtmp/hcp/config/config_file.bin’ to ’http://10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest.cfg’ * About to connect() to 129.145.155.166 port 8080 *

Trying 129.145.155.166... * connected

* Connected to 129.145.155.166 (129.145.155.166) port 8080 GET http://10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest.cfg HTTP/1.1 User-Agent: restoreconfig Host: 10.7.79.18 Pragma: no-cache Accept: */* < HTTP/1.1 200 OK < Content-length: 24603 < Content-type: text/plain < Date: Thu, 07 Aug 2008 17:07:43 GMT < Server: Apache/1.3.36 (Unix) mod_perl/1.29 mod_ssl/2.8.27 OpenSSL/0.9.7d < Last-modified: Mon, 04 Aug 2008 20:01:51 GMT < Etag: "4fa2a-601b-4897602f" < Accept-ranges: bytes < Via: 1.1 proxy-proxy < Proxy-agent: Sun-Java-System-Web-Proxy-Server/4.0 * Connection #0 to host 129.145.155.166 left intact * Closing connection #0 Configuration backup created on Mon Aug

4 12:58:19 2008

from system ’M3000’ with serial number ’IKS08220xx’, version ’19830000’ *** You will need to power-cycle the entire system after this operation is completed *** Do you want to restore this configuration to your system? [y|n]: y requesting XSCF reboot to perform restore ... requested Connection to ghidorah.com closed by foreign host.

128

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

restoreconfig(8) EXAMPLE 3

Restoring the Configuration Using https

XSCF> restoreconfig -v -V https://10.7.79.18/sollgell/ proxytest.cfg obtaining lock ... done initiating file transfer from ’https://10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest.cfg’ ... transfer from ’/scf/firmtmp/hcp/config/config_file.bin’ to ’https://10.7.79.18/ sollgell/proxytest.cfg’ * About to connect() to 10.7.79.18 port 443 *

Trying 10.7.79.18... * connected

* Connected to 10.7.79.18 (10.7.79.18) port 443 * error setting certificate verify locations, continuing anyway: * CAfile: /home/ares/cross/fje/pwrqcc3/target_root/usr/share/ssl/certs/ ca-bundle.crt CApath: none * SSL connection using EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA * Server certificate: *

subject:

/C=US/ST=California/L=SanDiego/O=toho/OU=QT/CN=10.7.79.18/ [email protected] *

start date: 2008-07-22 18:32:49 GMT

*

expire date: 2009-07-22 18:32:49 GMT

*

common name: 10.7.79.18 (matched)

*

issuer:

/C=US/ST=California/L=SanDiego/O=toho/OU=QT/CN=Lwang/ [email protected] * SSL certificate verify result: error number 1 (20), continuing anyway. > GET /sollgell/proxytest.cfg HTTP/1.1 User-Agent: restoreconfig Host: 10.7.79.18 Pragma: no-cache Accept: */* < HTTP/1.1 200 OK < Date: Tue, 12 Aug 2008 22:02:12 GMT < Server: Apache/1.3.36 (Unix) mod_perl/1.29 mod_ssl/2.8.27 OpenSSL/0.9.7d < Last-Modified: Mon, 04 Aug 2008 20:01:51 GMT

System Administration

129

restoreconfig(8)

< ETag: "4fa2a-601b-4897602f" < Accept-Ranges: bytes < Content-Length: 24603 < Content-Type: text/plain * Connection #0 to host 10.7.79.18 left intact * Closing connection #0 done file decoding done. Configuration backup created on Mon Aug

4 12:58:19 2008

from system ‘M3000’ with serial number ‘IKS08220xx’, version ‘19830000’ validating backup configuration data *** You will need to power-cycle the entire system after this operation is completed *** Do you want to restore this configuration to your system? [y|n]: y requesting XSCF reboot to perform restore ... requested Connection to ghidorah.com closed by foreign host.

EXAMPLE 4

Restoring the Configuration Using USB

XSCF> restoreconfig -V -p 129.145.155.166:8080 file:///media/

usb_msd/proxytest.cfg transfer from ’/scf/firmtmp/hcp/config/config_file.bin’ to ’file:///media/ usb_msd/proxytest.cfg’ Configuration backup created on Mon Aug

4 14:38:27 2008

from system ’M3000’ with serial number ’IKS08220xx’, version ’19830000’ *** You will need to power-cycle the entire system after this operation is completed *** Do you want to restore this configuration to your system? [y|n]: y requesting XSCF reboot to perform restore ... requested Connection to ghidorah.com closed by foreign host.

EXAMPLE 5

Restoring An Encrypted Configuration

XSCF> restoreconfig -v -V -P encryption http://10.7.79.18/sollgell/ proxytest.cfg obtaining lock ... done initiating file transfer from ’http://10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest.cfg’

130

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

restoreconfig(8)

... transfer from ’/scf/firmtmp/hcp/config/config_file.bin’ to ’http://10.7.79.18/sollgell/proxytest.cfg’ * About to connect() to 10.7.79.18 port 80 *

Trying 10.7.79.18... * connected

* Connected to 10.7.79.18 (10.7.79.18) port 80 GET /sollgell/proxytest.cfg HTTP/1.1 User-Agent: restoreconfig Host: 10.7.79.18 Pragma: no-cache Accept: */* < HTTP/1.1 200 OK < Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 23:29:42 GMT < Server: Apache/1.3.36 (Unix) mod_perl/1.29 mod_ssl/2.8.27 OpenSSL/0.9.7d < Last-Modified: Wed, 13 Aug 2008 23:25:16 GMT < ETag: "4fa55-501b-48a36d5c" < Accept-Ranges: bytes < Content-Length: 20507 < Content-Type: text/plain * Connection #0 to host 10.7.79.18 left intact * Closing connection #0 done file decoding done. Configuration backup created on Wed Aug 13 16:21:01 2008 from system ’M3000’ with serial number ’IKS08220xx’, version ’19830000’ validating backup configuration data File decryption completed *** You will need to power-cycle the entire system after this operation is completed *** Do you want to restore this configuration to your system? [y|n]: y requesting XSCF reboot to perform restore ... requested Connection to ghidorah.com closed by foreign host.

System Administration

131

restoreconfig(8)

EXIT STATUS

132

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

restoredefaults(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

restoredefaults - delete the setting and the log information that stored in the server or the XSCF unit, and restore it to the state as of the factory shipment restoredefaults -c range restoredefaults -h

DESCRIPTION

The restoredefaults(8) command deletes the setting and the log information that stored in the server or the XSCF unit, and restores it to the state as of the factory shipment. As the range of restoration, one of the following can be specified: XSCF unit (xscfu) Restores the following information in XSCF unit to the state as of the factory shipment: ■

Various setting information in XSCF



Log information that stored in XSCF unit



Backup information of operator panel

server (factory) Restores the setting and the log information that stored in operator panel and XSCF unit to the state as of the factory shipment. Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -c range

-h

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

Specifies the target of restoration. In range, one of the following values can be specified: xscfu

Restores the XSCF unit.

factory

Restores the server.

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

In case the restoredefaults(8) command executed to the standby XSCF, ■

when you specify factory, it results in an error;



when you specify xscfu, only the standby XSCF will be initialized.

System Administration

133

restoredefaults(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Restores the XSCF unit to the state as of the factory shipment.

XSCF> restoredefaults -c xscfu WARNING: If this system does not have OPNL, this command will set all the user settable XSCF configuration parameters to their default value as they were set when the system was shipped out. Furthemore, this command will delete all logs on both XSCFUs. Check the man page of this command before you run it. Continue?[yes/no](default no):yes You must check the following points. 1. Have the ability to powercycle the system. 2. Have access to the serial console and hold the serial console of the XSCFU to confirm the completion of the command. If you answer "yes" this command will HALT the XSCFU when it compltetes. You will need to powercycle the system after the XSCF BOOT STOP. Do you really want to continue? Continue?[yes/no](default no):yes The initialization of XSCFU will be started. XSCFU : all data clear OPNL : not clear XSCF will be automatically rebooted. Afterwards, XSCFU will be initialized. Continue?[yes/no](default no):yes The NVRAM setting of XSCFU#0 was completed. XSCF shutdown request was completed. <snip>....XSCF reboot..<snip> ***** WARNING ***** XSCF initialization terminate for XSCF data clear. execute "setdefaults xscf" (AUTO) setdefaults : setdefaults : setdefaults : setdefaults : setdefaults : setdefaults : ... setdefaults : dev/null 2>&1 setdefaults : setdefaults : ... setdefaults : setdefaults : ...

134

XSCF XSCF XSCF XSCF XSCF XSCF

clear clear clear clear clear clear

: : : : : :

start DBS start wait 20s for DBS initialization common database clear complete /bin/rm /var/log/lastlog >/dev/null 2>&1 /bin/rm /var/log/boot.log >/dev/null 2>&1

XSCF clear : /bin/rm /hcpcommon/tmp/panel_up_to_date_fail >/ XSCF clear : log data clear complete XSCF clear : NVRAM(PAGE#0) clear complete XSCF clear : NVRAM(PAGE#7) clear complete XSCF clear : NVRAM reset complete

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

restoredefaults(8) setdefaults : XSCF clear : dbs[282]: NOTICE: received setdefaults : XSCF clear : ... setdefaults : XSCF clear : setdefaults : XSCF clear : setdefaults : XSCF clear : setdefaults : complete

unmount filesystem start signal: 15 unmount /hcp0/linux unmount /hcpcommon/firmtmp -unmount filesystem complete end

complete

Please turn off the breaker after XSCF halt. The system is going down NOW !! Please stand by while rebooting the system. Restarting system. XSCF uboot 01950000 (Apr 15 2007 - 11:08:18)

XSCF uboot

01950000

(Apr

15 2007 - 11:08:18)

SCF board boot factor = a040 DDR Real size: 512 MB DDR: 480 MB

XSCF BOOT STOP (recover by NFB-OFF/ON) EXAMPLE 2

Restores the server to the state as of the factory shipment.

XSCF> restoredefaults -c factory WARNING: If this system does not have OPNL, this command will set all the user settable XSCF configuration parameters to their default value as they were set when the system was shipped out. Furthemore, this command will delete all logs on both XSCFUs. Check the man page of this command before you run it. Continue?[yes/no](default no):yes You must check the following points. 1. Have the ability to powercycle the system. 2. Have access to the serial console and hold the serial console of the XSCFU to confirm the completion of the command. If you answer "yes" this command will HALT the XSCFU when it compltetes. You will need to powercycle the system after the XSCF BOOT STOP. Do you really want to continue? Continue?[yes/no](default no):yes The initialization of XSCFU will be started. XSCFU : all data clear OPNL : all data clear (exclude SYSTEM ID data)

System Administration

135

restoredefaults(8) XSCF will be automatically rebooted. Afterwards, XSCFU will be initialized. Continue?[yes/no](default no):yes The NVRAM setting of XSCFU#0 was completed. XSCF shutdown request was completed. <snip>....XSCF reboot..<snip> ***** WARNING ***** XSCF initialization terminate for XSCF/OPNL data clear. execute "setdefaults factory" (AUTO) setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : start setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : DBS start setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : wait 20s for DBS initialization initialize OPNL SEEPROM 1/6 -- complete ... initialize OPNL SEEPROM 6/6 -- complete setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : OPNL reset complete setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : restore SYSTEM-ID data complete setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : /bin/rm /var/log/lastlog >/dev/null 2>&1 setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : /bin/rm /var/log/boot.log >/dev/null 2>&1 ... setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : /bin/rm /hcpcommon/tmp/ panel_up_to_date_fail >/dev... setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : log data clear complete setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : NVRAM(PAGE#0) clear complete ... setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : NVRAM(PAGE#7) clear complete setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : NVRAM reset complete ... setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : unmount filesystem start dbs[283]: NOTICE: received signal: 15 setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : unmount /hcp0/linux ... setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : unmount /hcpcommon/firmtmp -- complete setdefaults : FACTORY mode clear : unmount filesystem complete Please stand by while rebooting the system. Restarting system. XSCF uboot 01950000 (Apr 15 2007 - 11:08:18)

XSCF uboot

01950000

(Apr

15 2007 - 11:08:18)

SCF board boot factor = 4040 DDR Real size: 512 MB DDR: 480 MB

XSCF BOOT STOP (recover by NFB-OFF/ON)

136

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

restoredefaults(8)

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

137

restoredefaults(8)

138

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

sendbreak(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

sendbreak - send a break signal to the specified domain sendbreak -d domain_id sendbreak [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id sendbreak -h

DESCRIPTION

The sendbreak(8) command sends a break signal to the specified domain. When a break signal is sent from the domain console to the Solaris OS of the domain, control is transferred from the Solaris OS to OpenBoot PROM and the OpenBoot PROM prompt "ok>" is displayed.

Note – sendbreak(8) command will not work when the secure mode is set to 'on' while the mode switch on the operator panel is set to "Locked". Refer to the setdomainmode(8) for more information. Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm

Can run this command only for your managed domains.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Specifies only one ID of the domain to which to send the break signal. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

console(8), showconsolepath(8)

System Administration

139

sendbreak(8)

140

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setaltitude(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setaltitude - set the altitude of the system or whether or not the air filter installed setaltitude -s key=value setaltitude -h

DESCRIPTION

The setaltitude(8) command sets the altitude of the system or whether or not the air filter installed. Whether or not the air filter installed can be specified on the M4000/M5000 servers only.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-s key=value

The item to be set is specified by key. The following value can be specified: altitude

Sets the altitude of the system.

filter

Sets whether or not to install the air filter. You can specify this on the M4000/M5000 servers only.

When you specified altitude as key, specify the altitude of the system in value in units of meters (m). An integer equal to or greater than 0 can be specified, and the specified value is rounded up to the nearest hundred meters. The default value is 0 meters. When you specified filter as key, either of the following can be specified for value:

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION



installed

Air filter is installed.

uninstalled

Air filter is not installed.

If the altitude of the system is set, any abnormality in the intake air temperature can be detected quickly. If the altitude of the system is unknown, set a high value. However, even if no altitude is set for the system, any abnormality in temperatures such as the CPU temperature can still be detected, so the system would not be damaged by a fatal error.

System Administration

141

setaltitude(8)

EXAMPLES



To apply the specified configuration, execute the rebootxscf(8) command and reset XSCF.



The command does not accept negative numbers. If the system is below sea-level use altitude=0.



When you specified either of the altitude of the system or whether or not the air filter installed, the current settings are listed. The setting of the air filter is displayed only when it is set to installed.



When the showaltitude(8) command is executed, the current settings are displayed.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets the altitude of the system to 1000 m.

XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=1000 1000m

EXAMPLE 2

Sets the altitude of the system to 200 m. The specified value is rounded up to the nearest hundred meters.

XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=157 200m

EXAMPLE 3

Sets the altitude of the system to 1000 m, on the M4000/M5000 servers with the air filter installed.

XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=1000 1000m Filter is installed.

EXAMPLE 4

Sets the air filter uninstalled, on the M4000/M5000 servers.

XSCF> setaltitude -s filter=uninstalled 1000m

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

142

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showaltitude(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setarchiving(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setarchiving - configure the log archiving functionality setarchiving [-k host-key] [-l audit-limit,non-audit-limit] [-p password|-r] [-t user@host:directory] [-v] [-y|-n] setarchiving enable|disable setarchiving -h

DESCRIPTION

setarchiving(8) manages the log archiving configuration. Persistent storage space on the Service Processor is limited. Some logs may grow to the point where old log entries must be overwritten or deleted. Log archiving allows the user to set up the Service Processor to automatically archive its log data on a remote host.

Note – You must set up the archive host correctly prior to enabling the log archiving feature. (See EXAMPLE 1.) If you attempt to enable archiving while the configuration is invalid (for example, if the specified archive host does not exist), setarchiving exits with an error message. setarchiving exits with an error message if you request invalid configuration changes while archiving is enabled. Note – setarchiving(8) requires at least one option or operand. Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

143

setarchiving(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-k host-key

Sets the public key that XSCF uses to verify the identity of the host. Possible values for the host-key are shown here: none This literal value specifies that a public key should not be used to authenticate the archive host. If an archive host public key was previously configured, it is deleted. download This literal value specifies that setarchiving should download the public host key from the archive host using the SSH protocol. If the -t option is used, setarchiving downloads the key from the host specified in the argument to -t. Otherwise, setarchiving downloads the key from the current archive host. Next, setarchiving displays the key’s md5 fingerprint and prompts you for confirmation of the identity of the host to continue. If you accept the key, it is saved and used for server authentication. If you reject the key, setarchiving exits without changing the configuration. public-key The specified public key is stored and used for server authentication. The host-key argument should be the complete public-key for the archive host, beginning with the key type.

Note – The public-key should be enclosed in quotes to ensure that the shell treats it as a single word.

144

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setarchiving(8)

-l audit-limit,non-audit-limit Sets the space limits for log archives in megabytes. The option argument must consist of two values separated by a comma. The audit-limit value specifies the archive space limit for audit logs. It must be either 0 (zero), unlimited or an integer in the range of 500–50000. If you do not use the -l option to modify the value of audit-limit, the initial archive space limit for audit logs is unlimited. The non-audit-limit value specifies the archive space limit for all other logs, in megabytes. It must be an integer in the range of 500–50000. If unset, the initial value for non-audit-limit depends on the type of server. Use the showarchiving(8) command to determine the value for your server. If either of the specified values is invalid, the command displays an error and exits without making any changes. -n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts. Prompts are displayed.

-p password

Sets the password used for ssh login. This option is provided to facilitate scripting. To change the password interactively, use the -r option.

-r

Reads the password used for ssh login. The setarchiving command displays a prompt and reads the new password without echoing it to the screen.

-t user@host:directory

Sets the archive target. The host field specifies the host name or IP address of the archive host. The user field specifies the user name for the ssh login to the archive host. The directory field specifies the archive directory on the archive host where the archives should be stored. The directory field must not begin with a "~".

-v

Specifies verbose output. When this option is used in conjunction with -k download, setarchiving displays the downloaded public key in addition to its md5 fingerprint.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts. Prompts are displayed.

System Administration

145

setarchiving(8)

OPERANDS

EXAMPLES

The following operands are supported: enable

Activates the log archiving feature. Cannot be used with any options.

disable

De-activates the log archiving feature. Cannot be used with any options.

EXAMPLE 1

Setting the Archiving Target and Password

XSCF> setarchiving -t [email protected]:/home/jsmith/ logs -r Enter ssh password for [email protected]:[]

EXAMPLE 2

Setting the Public Host Key

XSCF> setarchiving -k download Downloading public host key from somehost.company.com.... Fingerprint: c3:75:f9:97:7d:dc:le:le:62:06:c1:6f:87:bc:e8:0d Accept this public key (yes|no): yes

EXAMPLE 3

Setting the Space Limits for Archives

XSCF> setarchiving -l 10000,10000

EXAMPLE 4

Enabling Archiving

XSCF> setarchiving enable Testing the archiving configuration... Logs will be archived to somehost.company.com.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

146

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion. Configuration updated.

>0

An error occurred.

showarchiving(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setaudit(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setaudit - manage the system auditing functionality setaudit enable|disable|archive|delete setaudit [-p count|suspend] [ -m mailaddr] [-a users=enable|disable|default] [-c classes= {enable|disable }]... [-e events=enable|disable ]... [-g {enable|disable }] [-t percents] setaudit -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

setaudit(8) manages the collection of data on the use of system resources. Audit data provides a record of security-related system events. This data can be used to assign responsibility for actions that have taken place on the system. Auditing generates records when specified events occur. Events that generate audit records include: ■

System startup and shutdown



Login and logout



Authentication actions



Administrative actions

You must have auditadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a users=enable|disable|default Sets the audit record generation policy for the specified users. users is a comma-separated list of valid user names. When set to enable or disable, audit record generation for the users is turned on or off respectively. This setting overrides the global policy for the specified user. When set to default, the policy for the users is set to follow the global policy. Use showaudit -g to display the global user audit record generation policy. -c classes=enable|disable Changes the audit record generation policy for the specified audit classes. classes is a comma-separated list of audit classes. A class may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The ACS_ prefix may be omitted. For example, the class of audit-related events can be expressed as ACS_AUDIT, AUDIT or 16.

System Administration

147

setaudit(8)

The following are valid classes: all

Denotes all classes.

ACS_SYSTEM(1)

System-related events

ACS_WRITE(2)

Commands that can modify a state

ACS_READ(4)

Commands that read a current state

ACS_LOGIN(8)

Login-related events

ACS_AUDIT(16)

Audit-related events

ACS_DOMAIN(32)

Domain management–related events

ACS_USER(64)

User management–related events

ACS_PLATFORM(128)

Platform management–related events

ACS_MODES(256)

Mode-related events

This option may be specified multiple times. Multiple specification are processed together with an -e options in the order listed. See EXAMPLE 1. When set to enable or disable, audit record generation for the classes is turned on or off respectively. This setting overrides the global policy. When set to default, the policy for the users is set to follow the global policy. Use showaudit -g to display the global user audit record generation policy. -e events=enable|disable Changes the audit record generation policy for the specified audit events. events is a comma-separated list of audit events. An event may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The AEV_ prefix may be omitted. For example, the event for SSH login can be expressed as AEV_LOGIN_SSH, LOGIN_SSH or 0. See showaudit -e all for a list of valid events. This option may be specified multiple times. Multiple specification are processed together with an -c options in the order listed. See EXAMPLE 3. When set to enable or disable, audit record generation for the events is turned on or off respectively. This setting overrides the global policy. When set to default, the policy for the users is set to follow the global policy. Use showaudit -g to display the global user audit record generation policy.

148

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setaudit(8)

-g enable|disable Sets the global user audit record generation policy. When set to disable, no audit record which can be attributed to any user account is generated. These settings can be overridden on an individual user basis using the -a option. -h Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs. -m mailaddr Sets the mail address to which email is sent when the local audit storage space usage reaches a threshold (see option -t). Email addresses must be a valid email address of the form [email protected]. Specifying none for mailaddr turns off email notification. -p suspend|count Sets the policy to follow when the audit trail becomes full. The following are valid values: suspend

All processes which try to write to audit records will be suspended until either space becomes available and records can be written, or the policy is changed to count.

count

New audit records are dropped and a count is kept of how many records are dropped.

-t percents Sets thresholds at which to issue a warning about local audit storage usage. percents is a comma-separated list of percentages of available space used. At most four values may be set. For example, values of 50, 75, 80, 90 would cause warnings to be issued when 50%, 75%, 80% and 90% respectively, of the available storage for audit records is consumed. The default value is 80%. Warnings are issued as a message to the console and optionally to an administrator using email. See -m mailaddr.

System Administration

149

setaudit(8)

OPERANDS

EXAMPLES

The following operands are supported: archive

Notifies the log archiving facility to archive the current audit trail.

delete

Delete the portion of the local audit trail in the secondary partition. This can be used to free space for new audit records if the local audit trail becomes full. For more information on the secondary partition, refer to the Administration Guide for your server.

disable

Turns off the writing of audit records to the audit trail and notifies the log archiving facility to archive the current audit trail.

enable

Turns on the writing of audit records to the audit trail.

EXAMPLE 1

Changing Classes Using Names

XSCF> setaudit -c LOGIN,AUDIT=disable -c ACS_READ=enable

Auditing for LOGIN and AUDIT classes has been disabled. Auditing for READ class is enabled. EXAMPLE 2

Changing Classes Using Numbers

XSCF> setaudit -c 8,16=disable -c 1=enable

Auditing for classes 8 (LOGIN) and 16 (AUDIT) has been disabled. Auditing for class 1 (SYSTEM) is enabled. EXAMPLE 3

Changing Classes and Enabling an Event

XSCF> setaudit -c 1=enable -e 64=disable

Auditing is enabled for all of Class 1 (SYSTEM) except for event 64 (USER) is disabled. EXAMPLE 4

Enabling Auditing

XSCF> setaudit enable

Turns on writing of the audit records for the audit trail. EXAMPLE 5

Enabling Warnings

XSCF> setaudit -t 50,75

150

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setaudit(8)

Warnings will be sent at 50% capacity and 75% capacity. EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showaudit(8)

System Administration

151

setaudit(8)

152

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setautologout(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setautologout - set the session timeout time of the XSCF shell setautologout -s timeout setautologout -h

DESCRIPTION

The setautologout(8) command sets the session timeout time of the XSCF shell. The default of the session timeout time is 10 minutes.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-s timeout

Specifies the session timeout time of the XSCF shell. Specify a timeout time value in units of minutes for timeout. An integer ranging from 1 to 255 can be specified.

The specified session timeout time becomes effective after the subsequent login.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets the session timeout time of the XSCF shell to 30 minutes.

XSCF> setautologout -s 30 30min

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showautologout(8)

System Administration

153

setautologout(8)

154

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

setcod(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setcod - set up the Capacity on Demand (COD) resources used for domains setcod setcod [-v] setcod [[-q] -{y|n}] [-v] headroom setcod [-v] -d domain_id [ proc-rtus] setcod -h

DESCRIPTION

setcod(8) sets up the COD resources to be used for domains. License keys must be installed (see addcodlicense(8)) before COD boards in a domain can be utilized. You can also enable headroom and reserve licenses for some domains with setcod(8). The setcod(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. When no domain_id is specified, current values are displayed in the square brackets ([]) at the command prompt. If no value is specified for an operand, it retains its current value.

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Domain identifier. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-v

Specifies verbose output.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

System Administration

155

setcod(8)

OPERANDS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

The following operands are supported: headroom

Amount of headroom (processors) to be enabled. Maximum value is 4.

proc-rtus

The number of Right To Use (RTUs) licenses reserved for a domain. One RTU license is required for each CPU.

If you run the setcod command without specifying any options, the command prompts you for COD information. You are asked to specify the amount of COD headroom to be used, and the number of COD RTU licenses to be reserved for your domains. When you are prompted for COD information, the maximum values allowed are displayed within parentheses () and default values are displayed within brackets []. setcod enables COD headroom (processors to be used on demand). Use the -d domain_id to specify the number of domain COD RTU licenses to be reserved.

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Setting COD CPU Headroom Quantity and Reserve Domain COD RTU Licenses

XSCF> setcod

PROC RTUs installed: 0 PROC Headroom Quantity (0 to disable, 4 MAX) [0]: 1 WARNING:Using headroom requires you to install license key(s) within 30 days. Do you agree? [y|n]: y PROC RTUs reserved for domain 0 (1 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 1 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 2 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 3 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 4 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 5 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 6 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 7 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 8 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 9 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 10 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 11 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 12 (0 MAX) [0]:

156

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setcod(8)

PROC RTUs reserved for domain 13 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 14 (0 MAX) [0]: PROC RTUs reserved for domain 15 (0 MAX) [0]:

After this command completes, you will see a message similar to this one in the XSCF console: Aug 28 17:28:30 FF1-1-0 codd[PID]: COD PROC Headroom changed to 3

EXAMPLE 2

Set the COD Headroom CPUs to 0

XSCF> setcod 0

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addcodlicense(8), showcod(8)

System Administration

157

setcod(8)

158

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdate(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setdate - set the date and time of XSCF setdate [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-u] -s date setdate -h

DESCRIPTION

The setdate(8) command sets the date and time of XSCF. If the local date and time are specified, they are set following conversion to coordinated universal time (UTC). After the command executed, XSCF will be reset automatically.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-s date

Sets date and time. date can be specified in either of the following formats: YYYY.MM.DD-hh:mm:ss

Specifies date in the format of "year.month.dayhour:minute:second."

MMDDhhmmYYYY.ss

Specifies data in the format "MonthDayHourMinuteYear. second."

-u

Specifies time in UTC. When omitted, the local time is specified.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



In the M8000/M9000 servers, the setting automatically reflected to the standby XSCF. When there is a defect on the standby XSCF, it leads to an error and the setting will be reflected to the active XSCF only.



If the XSCF is used as an NTP server, change the XSCF time, and synchronize the domain times with the XSCF time. The XSCF time is applied to a domain during either of the following operations: System Administration

159

setdate(8)

EXAMPLES



The ntpdate(1M) command is executed in the domain.



Rebooting the domain



The setdate(8) command needs to be executed in the system power-off status.



When an NTP server has been set to XSCF, the setdate(8) command results in an error. Whether an NTP server set to XSCF or not can be checked by using the showntp(8) command.



To check the currently set XSCF date and time, execute the showdate(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets "January 27 16:59:00 2006" of the local time (JST) as the current time.

XSCF> setdate -s 012716592006.00 Fri Jan 27 16:59:00 JST 2006 The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y Fri Jan 27 07:59:00 UTC 2006 XSCF> The reset continues after this point.

EXAMPLE 2

Sets "January 27 07:59:00 2006" of UTC as the current time.

XSCF> setdate -u -s 012707592006.00 Fri Jan 27 07:59:00 UTC 2006 The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y Fri Jan 27 07:59:00 UTC 2006 XSCF> The reset continues after this point.

EXAMPLE 3

Sets "January 27 16:59:00 2006" of the local time (JST) as the current time. Automatically replies with 'y' to the prompt.

XSCF> setdate -y -s 012716592006.00 Fri Jan 27 16:59:00 JST 2006 The XSCF will be reset. Continue? [y|n] :y Fri Jan 27 07:59:00 UTC 2006 XSCF> The reset continues after this point.

EXAMPLE 4

160

Sets "January 27 16:59:00 2006" of the local time (JST) as the current time. Au-

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdate(8) tomatically replies with 'y' without displaying the prompt. XSCF> setdate -q -y -s 012716592006.00 XSCF> The reset continues after this point.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setntp(8), settimezone(8), showdate(8), showntp(8), showtimezone(8)

System Administration

161

setdate(8)

162

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdcl(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setdcl - set a domain component list (DCL) setdcl -d domain_id -s

policy=value

setdcl -d domain_id -s option=value lsb [ lsb...] setdcl -d domain_id -a lsb=xsb [ lsb=xsb...] setdcl -d domain_id -r lsb [ lsb...] setdcl -h DESCRIPTION

The setdcl(8) command sets a DCL. A DCL is hardware resource information that can be set for a domain or the logical system boards (LSBs) that are components of a domain. An LSB is a board unit recognized by the Solaris OS in a domain. Up to 16 boards can be registered in each domain, and they are represented by integer numbers ranging from 0 to 15. An extended system board (XSB) is a board unit that can be used in the system and is one partition of a partitioned physical system board (PSB). An XSB is represented by x-y, a combination of a PSB number and the number of one partition of the partitioned PSB (x is an integer ranging from 00 to 15, and y is an integer ranging from 0 to 3). The setdcl(8) command associates an XSB with an LSB that can be recognized by the Solaris OS in the domain, and its settings enable the Solaris OS in the domain to use hardware resources on the associated XSB. The setdcl(8) command can set the following types of DCL information: For the domain: ■

Degradation range applicable for an error detected during an initial diagnosis of hardware (policy) On the M3000 server, the setdcl(8) command can set policy only.

For the LSB: ■

XSB number of the XSB to be associated with an LSB (lsb, xsb) The XSB with the specified XSB number is associated with an LSB.



Using memory mounted on an LSB (no-mem) The user can specify whether an operating system in the domain can use memory mounted on an LSB.



Using I/O devices mounted on an LSB (no-io) The user can specify whether an operating system in the domain can use I/O devices, such as a PCI card, mounted on an LSB. System Administration

163

setdcl(8) ■

Whether to set a priority for the specified LSB as a floating board, relative to other boards (float) The user can specify whether to set a priority for the specified LSB as a floating board, relative to other boards. A floating board is used for dynamic reconfiguration (DR) for purposes such as changing the domain configuration, while minimizing effect of DR on the operating system.

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a lsb=xsb

Specifies an XSB number to be associated with an LSB number in the domain. The following form can be accepted. On the M3000 server, you cannot specify this option. lsb=xsb lsb

Specifies an LSB number. An integer ranging from 0 to 15 can be specified.

xsb

Specifies an XSB number. The following xsb form is accepted:

x-y

x: An integer from 00–15. y: An integer from 0–3.

lsb and xsb can be specified with an equal sign (=) as a delimiter. The space character must not be inserted immediately before and after "=". lsb=xsb can be repeated multiple times by using a space character as a delimiter. If the same pair of an LSB number and XSB number is duplicated, an error occurs. Also, if an XSB number has already been set for the specified lsb, an error occurs. If the specified xsb has already been set for another LSB, the existing setting is canceled and the specified xsb is set for the specified lsb.

164

-d domain_id

Specifies the domain ID to be set. An integer ranging from 0 to 23 can be specified for domain_id, depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdcl(8)

-r

Clears the XSB number associated with an LSB number in the specified domain. On the M3000 server, you cannot specify this option.

-s option=value

Makes settings regarding hardware resources of the XSB associated with an LSB. An item to be set is specified for option, and a value corresponding to option is specified for value. option and value are specified only once in a format using an equal sign (=) to delimit the specified values. The space character must not be inserted immediately before and after "=". One of the following can be specified for option. On the M3000 server, only policy can be specified. policy

Degradation range applicable for a detected error during an initial diagnosis of hardware.

no-mem

Whether to omit the use of memory on a domain

no-io

Whether to omit the use of I/O devices on a domain

float

Whether to set a priority for the board as a floating board, relative to other boards

If policy is specified for option, either of the following can be specified for value: fru

Degrades the target Field Replaceble Unit (FRU) for an error detected by a diagnosis.

xsb

Degrades the target XSB for an error detected by a diagnosis.

system

Stops the target domain for an error detected by a diagnosis.

If no-mem is specified for option, either of the following can be specified for value: true

Omits the use of memory on a domain.

false

Does not omit the use of memory on a domain (default).

System Administration

165

setdcl(8)

If no-io is specified for option, either of the following can be specified for value: true

Omits the use of I/O devices on a domain.

false

Does not omit the use of I/O devices on a domain (default).

If float is specified for option, either of the following can be specified for value:

OPERANDS

EXAMPLES

Gives a higher priority regarding floating boards.

false

Does not give a higher priority regarding floating boards (default).

The following operands are supported: lsb

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

true

Specifies the number of the LSB whose information is to be set. Specify by using an integer ranging from 0 to 15. Multiple lsbs can be specified by delimiting with spaces. Specifies unique lsb within the domain. If the same lsb number is specified, an error occurs. On the M3000 server, you cannot specify this option.



If the XSB associated with the specified LSB has been configured in the domain configuration, the information that is set for the LSB cannot be changed. Before making such a change, unassign the XSB from the domain configuration by executing the deleteboard(8) command, or re-configure it in another domain configuration by executing the moveboard(8) command.



If the specified domain is running, the value of policy cannot be changed. To change the value, first turn off power to the domain.



The currently set DCL information can be checked by using the showdcl(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets XSB#00-0 for LSB#00 and XSB#00-1 for LSB#01 of domain ID 0.

XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -a 00=00-0 01=00-1

EXAMPLE 2

Sets no-mem=true for LSB#00 and #01 of domain ID 0.

XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -s no-mem=true 00 01

166

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdcl(8) EXAMPLE 3

Sets policy=system for domain ID 0.

XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -s policy=system

EXAMPLE 4

Clear the XSBs associated with LSB#00 and #01 of domain ID 0.

XSCF> setdcl -d 0 -r 00 01

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)

System Administration

167

setdcl(8)

168

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdomainmode(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setdomainmode - set the modes of operation for the specified domain setdomainmode [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id -m function=mode setdomainmode -h

DESCRIPTION

setdomainmode(8) sets the modes of operation for the specified domain. The modes of operation for the specified domain include the following types: Diagnostics Level

OpenBoot PROM diagnostic levels. The default is standard.

Secure Mode

Whether to enable or disable the host watchdog and suppress break signal reception. The default of the host watchdog is enable and suppress break signal reception is enable.

Autoboot

Whether to enable or disable the auto boot function used at domain startup. The default is enable.

CPU Mode

Way of determining the CPU operational mode mounted on the domain. The CPU operational mode can be automatically determined at domain startup (auto), or manually set to the compatible mode (compatible). The default is to let it automatically determined at domain startup. On the M3000 server, you cannot specify CPU Mode. The CPU operational mode includes the following two types: SPARC64 VII enhanced mode Operates using the enhanced functions of SPARC64 VII processor. This mode is set to the domain consists only of SPARC64 VII processors and when the CPU operational mode determined automatically. SPARC64 VI compatible mode All the mounted CPUs operate with the functions equivalent to the SPARC64 VI processor. This mode can be set to a domain of any CPU configuration.

If any of the modes of operation for the specified domain is set, the current settings are listed. Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: ■

OpenBoot PROM diagnostic levels:

fieldeng

Can run this command for all domains.

System Administration

169

setdomainmode(8) ■

Host watchdog and suppress break signal reception, auto boot function, and operational mode of CPU:

platadm

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm

Can run this command only for your managed domains.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

170

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Specifies the domain ID to be set. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdomainmode(8)

-m function=mode Sets the modes of operation and specifies its values. Use function to set the modes of operation. One of the following can be specified: diag

Specifies the OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level.

secure

Specifies whether to enable or disable the host watchdog and suppress break signal reception.

autoboot

Specifies whether to enable or disable the Auto boot function.

cpumode

Sets the operational mode of CPU. When you specified cpumode on the M3000 server, it results in an error.

When diag is specified for function, any of the following can be specified for mode:

Note – This function cannot be specified for the domain which is powered on. none

No diagnosis is performed.

min

Sets standard for the diagnostic level.

max

Sets maximum for the diagnostic level.

When secure is specified for function, one of the following can be specified for mode. The setting will be reflected after domain power on or restart. on

Enables the host watchdog and suppress break signal reception.

off

Disables the host watchdog and suppress break signal reception.

When autoboot is specified for function, one of the following can be specified for mode. The setting will be reflected after domain power on or restart. on

Enables the Auto boot function.

off

Disables the Auto boot function.

System Administration

171

setdomainmode(8)

(continued)

When cpumode is specified for function, one of the following can be specified for mode:

Note – This function cannot be specified for the domain which is powered on. auto Automatically determines the operational mode of CPU at domain startup. Depending on the CPU configuration on the domain, any of the following CPU operational mode is set: ■

Consists only of SPARC64 VII processors: SPARC64 VII enhanced mode



SPARC64 VII and VI processors mixed: SPARC64 VI compatible mode



Consists only of SPARC64 VI processors: SPARC64 VI compatible mode

compatible Regardless of the CPUs mounted, sets the operational mode of CPU to the SPARC64 VI compatible mode.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

172

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



The system board (XSB) which can be added by Dynamic Reconfiguration (DR) is decided by the CPU operational mode currently set to the domain, which is as follows:

Domain CPU configuration

Value of CPU Mode

Current CPU operational mode CPU configuration of a system board which can be added by DR operation

SPARC64 VII

auto

SPARC64 VII enhanced mode

SPARC64 VII

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdomainmode(8)

Domain CPU configuration

Value of CPU Mode

Current CPU operational mode CPU configuration of a system board which can be added by DR operation

SPARC64 VII

compatible

SPARC64 VI compatible mode

Any CPU configuration

SPARC64 VII/VI

auto or compatible

SPARC64 VI compatible mode

Any CPU configuration

SPARC64 VI

auto or compatible

SPARC64 VI compatible mode

Any CPU configuration

For details of the CPU operational mode and the DR operation, see the DR User’s Guide. ■

To add the XSB other than those above, you need to perform the domain reconfiguration accompanied by the domain power off/on or reboot.



When the operational mode of CPU has been automatically determined, if a situation as described below occurred, the CPU operational mode changes at the domain restart, from the SPARC64 VI compatible mode to the SPARC64 VII enhanced mode. In the SPARC64 VII enhanced mode, an XSB mounted with the SPARC64 VI processors cannot be added by DR operation. ■

When the SPARC64 VII and VI processors are mixed, after the restart due to the SPARC64 VI processor failure, there is no SPARC64 VI processor on a domain.

When the SPARC64 VI processors mounted, or planned to be mounted on the domain, set the operational mode of CPU to the SPARC64 VI compatible mode. ■

To check the mode of CPUs which currently set to the domain, execute the prtdiag(1M) command on Solaris OS. For the prtdiag(1M) command, see the manual page of Solaris OS.



If the Mode switch of the operator panel is set to Service, the settings of the modes of operation for the specified domain have the following values, regardless of the settings of the setdomainmode(8) command: ■

OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level (Diagnostic Level), operational mode of CPU (CPU Mode): operates as the setdomainmode(8) command setting



Host watchdog and suppress break signal reception (Secure Mode), auto boot function (Autoboot): off



When the OpenBoot PROM environmental variable 'auto-boot?' has been set to false, the auto boot function is disabled.



The diagnostics level of OpenBoot PROM is applied to the diag level of the addboard(8) command and moveboard(8) command.



The settings of the current modes of operation for the specified domain can be checked by using the showdomainmode(8) command.

System Administration

173

setdomainmode(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Sets the OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level for domain ID 0 to none.

XSCF> setdomainmode -d 0 -m diag=none Diagnostic Level

:min

-> none

Secure Mode

:on

-> -

Autoboot

:on

-> -

CPU Mode

:auto

-> -

The specified modes will be changed. Continue? [y|n]:y configured. Diagnostic Level Secure Mode

:none :on (host watchdog: available Break-signal:non-receive)

Autoboot

:on (autoboot:on)

CPU Mode

:auto

EXAMPLE 2

Enables the auto boot function for domain ID 0. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts.

XSCF> setdomainmode -y -d 0 -m autoboot=on Diagnostic Level

:none

-> -

Secure Mode

:on

-> -

Autoboot

:off

-> on

CPU Mode

:auto

-> -

The specified modes will be changed. Continue? [y|n]:y configured.

174

Diagnostic Level

:none

Secure Mode receive)

:on (host watchdog: available

Autoboot

:on (autoboot:on)

CPU Mode

:auto

Break-signal:non-

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdomainmode(8) EXAMPLE 3

Cancels the setdomainmode(8) command execution that is in progress.

XSCF> setdomainmode -d 0 -m diag=none Diagnostic Level

:min

-> none

Secure Mode

:on

-> -

Autoboot

:on

-> -

CPU Mode

:auto

-> -

The specified modes will be changed. Continue? [y|n]:n

EXAMPLE 4

Enables the auto boot function for domain ID 0. Suppresses prompts, and automatically answers "y" to all prompts

XSCF> setdomainmode -q -y -d 0 -m autoboot=on

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showdomainmode(8)

System Administration

175

setdomainmode(8)

176

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdomparam(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setdomparam - forcibly rewrite OpenBoot PROM environment variables setdomparam [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id use-nvramrc setdomparam [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id security-mode setdomparam [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id set-defaults setdomparam -h

DESCRIPTION

The setdomparam(8) command rewrites OpenBoot PROM environment variables of a specified domain. The following OpenBoot PROM environment variables can be specified. use-nvramrc?

Whether to execute the contents of the NVRAM at the boot or reboot of a domain.

security-mode? Firmware security level setting set-defaults

Privileges

Whether to restore OpenBoot PROM environment variables to the settings at the time of shipment from the factory

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm

Can run this command only for your managed domain.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported:. -d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the domain which OpenBoot PROM environment variables are rewritten. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

Note – The domain which is powered on cannot specify. -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

System Administration

177

setdomparam(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: use-nvramrc

Sets false for the use-nvramrc? environment variable.

security-mode Sets none to the security-mode? environment variable. set-defaults

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

Restores the OpenBoot PROM environment variables to the settings at the time of shipment from the factory

When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command. EXAMPLE 1

Sets false for the use-nvramrc? OpenBoot PROM environment variable of domain ID 0.

XSCF> setdomparam -d 0 use-nvramrc DomainIDs of domains that will be affected:00 OpenBoot PROM variable use-nvram will be set to false. Continue? [y|n]:y

EXAMPLE 2

Sets none for the security-mode OpenBoot PROM environment variable of domain ID 0.

XSCF> setdomparam -d 0 security-mode DomainIDs of domains that will be affected:00 OpenBoot PROM variable security-mode will be set to none. Continue? [y|n]:y

EXAMPLE 3

Initializes the OpenBoot PROM environment variables of the domain ID 0 to the settings at the time of shipment from the factory.

XSCF> setdomparam -d 0 set-defaults DomainIDs of domains that will be affected:00 All OpenBoot PROM variable will be reset to original default values. Continue? [y|n]:y

EXAMPLE 4

Initializes the OpenBoot PROM environment variables of the domain ID 1 to the settings at the time of shipment from the factory. Automatically replies with 'y' without displaying the prompt.

XSCF> setdomparam -q -y -d 1 set-defaults

178

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdomparam(8)

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

179

setdomparam(8)

180

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdscp(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setdscp - set the IP address assignments for the Domain to Service Processor Communications Protocol (DSCP) setdscp [-v] setdscp [-f] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] -i address -m netmask setdscp [-f] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] -s -i address setdscp [-f] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] -d domain_id -i address setdscp -h

DESCRIPTION

setdscp(8) assigns IP addresses to the DSCP links. setdscp is intended for initial configuration only. Domains should not be powered on when running this command.

Note – You are required to reboot the Service Processor after modifying the DSCP IP address assignment using this command, and before the IP addresses you specified are used. You can specify a network address for use by all of the DSCP links using the -i address and -m netmask arguments. In this mode of operation, the IP addresses used by the Service Processor and each domain-specific DSCP link are automatically selected from within the range of addresses indicated by the network address. You can set the IP address of an individual, domain-specific DSCP link independently of all other DSCP address settings using the -d domain_id and -i address arguments. You can set the IP address of the Service Processor independently of all other DSCP address settings using the -s and -i address arguments. If DSCP has been previously configured, the current settings are displayed. If they are correct, they can be accepted by pressing the Enter key. An error occurs if you set the address of the Service Processor or a domain to a value that either is out of range for a previously configured network address, or conflicts with an address already assigned to another domain or the Service Processor. You can override such errors by using the -f option. Using the -f option with a conflicting IP address may cause misconfiguration. You must resolve such conflicts for DSCP to operate properly. With no arguments, setdscp enters an interactive mode that prompts you to enter all of the DSCP IP address information sequentially. (The noninteractive method, setting up the IP addresses of all domains using the -i and -m options, is preferred.) After inputting all the requested settings, you can review the settings and decide whether to commit them to the DSCP configuration database.

System Administration

181

setdscp(8)

Note – The -y and -n options can be used (with or without the -q option) when running setdscp in interactive mode. Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Domain identifier. Must be used with -i address option. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-f

Forces setdscp to ignore out of range and address conflict errors and commits the new settings.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-i address

Specifies an IP address in the IPv4 dotted decimal format. When used with -m netmask it specifies a network address for all DSCP links in the system. When used with -d domain_id it specifies an individual, domain-specific IP address for use by DSCP. When used with -s, it specifies the IP address used for the Service Processor end of all DSCP links in the system.

EXAMPLES

182

-m netmask

Specifies a netmask address for all DSCP links in the system. Must be used with -i address.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-s

Must be used with the -i address option. Specifies the Service Processor end of all DSCP links in the system.

-v

Displays a detailed message. If this option is specified with the -q option, the -v option is ignored.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

Caution – The IP addresses shown in the following examples are examples only. When choosing DSCP IP addresses avoid choosing addresses that are used elsewhere in your local area network (LAN). For information about DSCP IP addresses refer to the System Configuration chapter of the Administration Guide.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdscp(8) EXAMPLE 1

Assigning All DSCP Addresses

XSCF> setdscp -y -i 10.1.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0 Commit these changes to the database? [y|n] : y

EXAMPLE 2

Assigning an Alternative IP address to Domain 1

XSCF> setdscp -d 1 -i 10.1.1.26 Commit these changes to the database? [y|n] : y

EXAMPLE 3

Specifying a Netmask Address With -q and -y Options

XSCF> setdscp -q -y -i 10.1.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0

EXAMPLE 4

Setting DSCP Addresses Using Interactive Mode

The default value displayed by each prompt in interactive mode matches the previous configuration. This makes it possible to interactively review and modify DSCP configuration. In this example you only input the network address portion and then press the Enter key to accept all subsequent settings. XSCF>

setdscp

DSCP network

[0.0.0.0

] > 10.1.1.0

DSCP netmask

[255.0.0.0

] > 255.255.255.0

XSCF address

[10.1.1.1

] > [Enter]

Domain #00 address

[10.1.1.2

] > [Enter]

Domain #01 address

[10.1.1.3

] > [Enter]

Domain #02 address

[10.1.1.4

] > [Enter]

Domain #03 address

[10.1.1.5

] > [Enter]

Domain #04 address

[10.1.1.6

] > [Enter]

Domain #05 address

[10.1.1.7

] > [Enter]

Domain #06 address

[10.1.1.8

] > [Enter]

Domain #07 address

[10.1.1.9

] > [Enter]

Domain #08 address

[10.1.1.10

] > [Enter]

Domain #09 address

[10.1.1.11

] > [Enter]

Domain #10 address

[10.1.1.12

] > [Enter]

System Administration

183

setdscp(8)

Domain #11 address

[10.1.1.13

] > [Enter]

Domain #12 address

[10.1.1.14

] > [Enter]

Domain #13 address

[10.1.1.15

] > [Enter]

Domain #14 address

[10.1.1.16

] > [Enter]

Domain #15 address

[10.1.1.17

] > [Enter]

Domain #16 address

[10.1.1.18

] > [Enter]

Domain #17 address

[10.1.1.19

] > [Enter]

Domain #18 address

[10.1.1.20

] > [Enter]

Domain #19 address

[10.1.1.21

] > [Enter]

Domain #20 address

[10.1.1.22

] > [Enter]

Domain #21 address

[10.1.1.23

] > [Enter]

Domain #22 address

[10.1.1.24

] > [Enter]

Domain #23 address

[10.1.1.25

] > [Enter]

Commit these changes to the database [y|n]? y

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

184

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showdscp(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setdualpowerfeed(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setdualpowerfeed - set dual power feed mode setdualpowerfeed -s key setdualpowerfeed -h

DESCRIPTION

The setdualpowerfeed(8) command specifies dual power feed mode in the system. The setdualpowerfeed(8) command is available on the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers only. On the M8000/M9000 servers, when the power cabinet for dual power feed connected, it automatically configures the dual power feed mode. To apply the specified configuration, reboot the system.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-s key

Sets dual power feed mode in the system. Either of the following can be specified for key: enable

Enables the dual power feed mode.

disable

Disables dual power feed mode.

The state of the current dual power feed mode can be checked by using the showdualpowerfeed(8) command. EXAMPLE 1

Disables dual power feed mode in the system. Before rebooting the system, a message is displayed.

XSCF> setdualpowerfeed -s disable enable -> disable NOTE: Dual power feed will be disabled the next time the platform is powered on.

EXAMPLE 2

Enables dual power feed mode in the system. Before rebooting the system, a

System Administration

185

setdualpowerfeed(8) message is displayed. XSCF> setdualpowerfeed -s enable disable -> enable NOTE: Dual power feed will be enabled the next time the platform is powered on.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

186

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showdualpowerfeed(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setemailreport(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setemailreport - set up the email report configuration data setemailreport [-v] [-t] setemailreport [-s variable= value]... setemailreport -h

DESCRIPTION

setemailreport(8) sets up email reporting configuration data for remote maintenance. Once the configuration data is set up, it is used by the fault management daemon to send email reports as required. If you run the setemailreport command without specifying any options, you will be prompted to answer whether email reporting is to be enabled. If enabled, you will be prompted to provided a list of email addresses. Where: -a

Add recipient

-d

Delete recipient

-r

Replace recipient (Default)

You can set up email reporting noninteractively by using the -s option. After the email server and port have been set up using setsmtp(8), you can use setemailreport -t to send a test email message. Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) and for more information.

System Administration

187

setemailreport(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: Displays usage statement.

-h

When used with other options or operands, an error occurs. -s variable=value

Configures email reporting. Valid entries for variable are: enable recipient Valid value entries for enable are: yes no Valid value entries for recipient are: Any valid company email account

EXAMPLES

-t

Sends test email.

-v

Specifies verbose output.

EXAMPLE 1

Enable Email Reporting Interactively

XSCF> setemailreport Enable Email Reporting? [no]:yes Email Recipient Address [[email protected]]: Do you want to send a test mail now (Yes/No): no

EXAMPLE 2

Adding an Email Report Recipient Using -a

XSCF> setemailreport Enable Email Reporting? [yes]:[RETURN] Email Recipient Address[[email protected]]: -a [email protected]

EXAMPLE 3

Deleting an Email Report Recipient Using -d

XSCF> setemailreport Enable Email Reporting? [yes]:[RETURN] Email Recipient Address[[email protected]]: -d [email protected]

188

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

setemailreport(8) EXAMPLE 4

Enable Email Reporting Noninteractively

XSCF> setemailreport -s enable=yes -s recipient=”[email protected], [email protected]

EXAMPLE 5

Sending Test Email

XSCF> setemailreport -t ....Sending test email to [email protected] [Email contents shown below] Host Name: jupiter Send Timestamp: 04-20-2006 16:31:45 PST Mail Server: 10.4.1.1

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setsmtp(8), showemailreport(8)

System Administration

189

setemailreport(8)

190

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

sethostname(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

sethostname - set a host name and a DNS domain name for an XSCF unit sethostname xscfu hostname sethostname -d domainname sethostname -h

DESCRIPTION

sethostname(8) command sets a host name and a DNS domain name for an XSCF unit. In the M8000/M9000 servers, the DNS domain name becomes common to XSCF units. The host name can be specified for each XSCF unit.

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d domainname

Specifies a DNS domain name to be set for the XSCF unit. The domainname is specified in up to 254 characters with the hostname included, with label elements delimited by a "." (period). If a domain name exceeding 254 characters is specified, an error occurs. A label element can contain alphanumeric characters and "-". Each label element must always begin with an alphabetic character and end with an alphanumeric character. If "localdomain" specified, an error occurs.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

System Administration

191

sethostname(8)

OPERANDS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

The following operands are supported: hostname

Specifies a host name to be set for the XSCF unit. The hostname is specified in up to 64 characters, not in Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) but in an abbreviated form. If a host name exceeding 64 characters is specified, an error occurs. Alphanumeric character and "-" can be used. However, a host name must always begin with an alphabetic character and end with an alphanumeric character. If "localhost" specified, an error occurs.

xscfu

Specifies the name of the XSCF unit to be set. The following values can be specified, depending on the system configuration. If no value is specified, an error occurs. xscf#0

XSCF unit 0

xscf#1

XSCF unit 1 (In the M8000/M9000 servers)



To reflect the host name and the DNS domain name to XSCF, execute the applynetwork(8) command. After reflected the information, use the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF to complete the setting.



The currently set host name and DNS domain name of the XSCF unit can be checked by using the shownetwork(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets the host name scf0-hostname for XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> sethostname xscf#0 scf0-hostname

EXAMPLE 2

Sets the DNS domain name example.com for XSCF unit.

XSCF> sethostname -d example.com

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

192

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

applynetwork(8), rebootxscf(8), showhostname(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

sethttps(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

sethttps - start or stop the HTTPS service, which is used in the XSCF network. This command also performs authentication-related settings sethttps [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c enable sethttps -c disable sethttps -c gencsr country state | province locality organization organizationalunit common e-mail sethttps [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c genserverkey sethttps -c importca sethttps [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c selfsign country state | province locality organization organizationalunit common e-mail sethttps -h

DESCRIPTION

The sethttps(8) command starts or stops the HTTPS service, which is used in the XSCF network. Also, this command performs authentication-related settings for authentication used in the HTTPS service. The following authentication-related items can be set: ■

Configuring the self-certification authority



Creating a self-signed web server certificate



Creating the private key of the web server



Creating a web server certificate signing request (CSR) to an external certification authority



Importing a web server certificate signed by an external certification authority

XSCF does not support HTTP service. Only HTTPS service is supported. Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

193

sethttps(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c {enable|disable} Specify whether to enable the HTTPS service. One of the following values can be specified. If none of them is specified, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

enable

Starts the HTTPS service.

disable

Stops the HTTPS service.

-c gencsr

Creates a CSR.

-c genserverkey

Creates the private key of the web server.

-c importca

Imports a web server certificate signed by the certification authority to the XSCF.

-c selfsign

Configures the self-certification authority. Also, this operand creates a self-signing web server certificate.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following operands are supported: common

Specifies common names such as the creator name and the host name of a server.

country

Specifies a country name with a two-letter code such as JP or US.

e-mail

Specifies an E-mail address.

locality

Specifies a city name, etc.

organization

Specifies a company name, etc.

organizationalunit Specifies an organization such as a section or department. state|province EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

194

Specifies the name of a state, province, etc.



When the HTTPS server is enabled or there is a private certificate authority, web server certificate, or web server secret key, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



The CSR is overwritten.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

sethttps(8) ■

In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the setting automatically reflected to the standby XSCF. When there's a defect on the standby XSCF, it leads to an error.



When using an external certification authority, it leads to an error in the following cases. ■

When the "-c gencsr" option or the "-c enable" option is executed, without executing the "-c genserverkey" option. Create the private key of the web server using the "-c genserverkey" option.



When the "-c enable" option is executed, without executing the "-c importca" option. Import a web server certificate using the "-c importca" option.



When the web server certificate which imported by executing the "-c importca" option does not correspond to the private key of the web server which has been created by executing the "-c genserverkey" option. Confirm the validity of the web server certificate.

EXAMPLES



The information which has been set will be reflected by using the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF.



The details of the current HTTPS service can be checked by using the showhttps(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Starts the HTTPS service.

XSCF> sethttps -c enable Continue? [y|n] :y Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the https settings.

EXAMPLE 2

Stops the HTTPS service.

XSCF> sethttps -c disable

EXAMPLE 3

Creates a CSR with the following settings: country: JP, state|province: Kanagawa, locality: Kawasaki, organization: Example, organizationalunit: development, common: scf-host, e-mail: [email protected]

XSCF> sethttps -c gencsr JP Kanagawa Kawasaki Example development

\ scf-host [email protected] EXAMPLE 4

Creates the self-certification authority with the following settings, and creates a self-signed web server certificate:country: JP, state|province: Kanagawa, locality: Kawasaki, organization: Example, organizationalunit: development, com-

System Administration

195

sethttps(8) mon: scf-host, e-mail: [email protected] XSCF> sethttps -c selfsign JP Kanagawa Kawasaki Example development scf-host [email protected] CA key and CA cert already exist. Do you still wish to update? [y|n] :y Enter passphrase: Verifying - Enter passphrase:

EXAMPLE 5

Creates the private key of the web server.

XSCF> sethttps -c genserverkey Server key already exists. Do you still wish to update? [y|n] :y Enter passphrase: Verifying - Enter passphrase:

EXAMPLE 6

Creates the private key of the web server. Automatically replies with "y" to the prompt.

XSCF> sethttps -c genserverkey Server key already exists. Do you still wish to update? [y|n] :y Enter passphrase: Verifying - Enter passphrase:

EXAMPLE 7

Creates the private key of the web server. Automatically replies with "y" without displaying the prompt.

XSCF> sethttps -c genserverkey -q -y Enter passphrase: Verifying - Enter passphrase:

EXAMPLE 8

Imports the web server certificate. To exit, press the Enter key and then press "Ctrl" and "D".

XSCF> sethttps -c importca Please import a certificate: -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIIDdTCCAt6gAwIBAgIBATANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQQFADCBgTELMAkGA1UEBhMCamox DjAMBgNVBAgTBXN0YXRlMREwDwYDVQQHEwhsb2NhbGl0eTEVMBMGA1UEChMMb3Jn YW5pemF0aW9uMQ8wDQYDVQQLEwZvcmdhbmkxDzANBgNVBAMTBmNvbW1vbjEWMBQG

196

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

sethttps(8)

CSqGSIb3DQEJARYHZWUubWFpbDAeFw0wNjA1MzAwNTI5MTVaFw0xNjA1MjcwNTI5 MTVaMG4xCzAJBgNVBAYTAmpqMQ4wDAYDVQQIEwVzdGF0ZTEVMBMGA1UEChMMb3Jn YW5pemF0aW9uMQ8wDQYDVQQLEwZvcmdhbmkxDzANBgNVBAMTBmNvbW1vbjEWMBQG CSqGSIb3DQEJARYHZWUubWFpbDCBnzANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEA nkPntf+TjYtyKlNYFbO/YavFpUzkYTLHdt0Fbz/tZmGd3e6Jn34A2W9EC7D9hjLs j+kAP41Al6wFwGO7KP3H4iImX0Uysjl9Hyk4jLBU51sw8JqvT2utTjltV5mFPKL6 5A51Yuhf8OGrR+bYGli6H1a6RPmlMSD7Z0AGDxR0eY0CAwEAAaOCAQ0wggEJMAkG A1UdEwQCMAAwLAYJYIZIAYb4QgENBB8WHU9wZW5TU0wgR2VuZXJhdGVkIENlcnRp ZmljYXRlMB0GA1UdDgQWBBQHIlCmI7QyZa8zpt1Hl6EfLR+EwDCBrgYDVR0jBIGm MIGjgBTnQYs6jzD7wdDhk7wsFeJGVaUTtaGBh6SBhDCBgTELMAkGA1UEBhMCamox DjAMBgNVBAgTBXN0YXRlMREwDwYDVQQHEwhsb2NhbGl0eTEVMBMGA1UEChMMb3Jn YW5pemF0aW9uMQ8wDQYDVQQLEwZvcmdhbmkxDzANBgNVBAMTBmNvbW1vbjEWMBQG CSqGSIb3DQEJARYHZWUubWFpbIIBADANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQQFAAOBgQCqBFbo88Hi yvOUyW8E8ll1AbuA04IrnjHI4cjHq9NuSX1w8mJsXKTVMx3WZCJpJDC+f/WoRMKw R+OpXAVQvb2tjIn3kO99dq+begECo4mwknW1t7QI7A1BkcW2/MkOolIRa6iP1Zwg JoPmwAbrGyAvGUtdzUoyIH0jl7dRQrVIRA== -----END CERTIFICATE-----

[Enter] [Ctrl]and[D]

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showhttps(8)

System Administration

197

sethttps(8)

198

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setldap(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setldap - configure the Service Processor as a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) client setldap {-b bind} {-B baseDN} {-c certchain} {-p } {-s servers} {-t user} -T timeout setldap -h

DESCRIPTION

setldap(8) allows you to configure the Service Processor as an LDAP client.

Note – The LDAP client supports passwords only in the CRYPT format; UNIX Crypt or MD5. Therefore the passwords on the LDAP server must support it as well. Refer to the Administration Guide for more information. Privileges

You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -B baseDN

Specifies distinguished name for the search base. Maximum character length is 128 characters.

-b bind

Sets the identity to use when binding to the LDAP server. Maximum character length is 128 characters

-c certchain

Imports an LDAP server certificate chain from the remote file specified in certchain. The certificate chain must be in PEM format. Remote files are specified using the standard scp syntax, that is, [user@]host:file., and imported using scp. If the copy requires a user password you will be prompted for it. Use of this option implicitly enables the use of Transport Layer Security (TLS) when connecting to LDAP. This may be disabled by specifying certchain as none. The certificate chain must be 64 Kbytes in size or less, and it must be valid or it will be rejected.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-p

Sets a password to use when binding to the LDAP server. You will be prompted for the password.

System Administration

199

setldap(8)

EXAMPLES

-s servers

Sets the primary and secondary LDAP servers and ports. servers is a comma-separated list of server:port. Ports are specified numerically and servers can be specified either by name or IP address in the dotted decimal format. For example, 10.8.31.14.636,company:636. The first server in the list is the primary. Server names must be resolvable. Maximum name length is 128 characters.

-t user

Tests connections to all configured LDAP servers. Attempts to retrieve the password data for the specified user from each configured server and reports success or failure in each case.

-T timeout

Sets the maximum time allowed for an LDAP search before it returns search results.

EXAMPLE 1

Configuring Bind Name

XSCF> setldap -b user -p Password: <Enter password> XSCF> showldap user

Bind Name:

Base Distinguished Name: Not set LDAP Search Timeout:

0

Bind Password:

Set

LDAP Servers:

None

CERTS:

None

EXAMPLE 2

Configuring Base Distinguished Name

XSCF> setldap -B

ou=people,dc=company,dc=com

XSCF> showldap Bind Name:

user

Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com

200

LDAP Search Timeout:

0

Bind Password:

Set

LDAP Servers:

None

CERTS:

None

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setldap(8) EXAMPLE 3

Setting the LDAP Timeout

XSCF> setldap -T 60 XSCF> showldap Bind Name:

user

Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com LDAP Search Timeout:

60

Bind Password:

Set

LDAP Servers:

None

CERTS:

None

EXAMPLE 4

Setting the LDAP Server

XSCF> setldap -s ldap://company.com,ldaps://company2.com XSCF> showldap Bind Name:

user

Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com LDAP Search Timeout:

60

Bind Password:

Set

LDAP Servers:

ldap://company.com:389 ldaps://company2.com:636

CERTS:

None

EXAMPLE 5

Importing a Certificate

XSCF> setldap -c [email protected]:/path/to/cacert.pem XSCF> showldap Bind Name:

user

Base Distinguished Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com LDAP Search Timeout:

60

Bind Password:

Set

LDAP Servers:

ldap://company.com:389 ldaps://company2.com:636

CERTS:

cacert.pem

EXAMPLE 6

Testing the LDAP connection

XSCF> setldap -t jsmith company.com:389 PASSED

System Administration

201

setldap(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

202

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showldap(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setlocale(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setlocale - set the default locale of the XSCF setlocale -s locale setlocale -h

DESCRIPTION

The setlocale(8) command sets the default locale of the XSCF. The locale that can be set is English or Japanese.

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-s locale

Specifies the default locale of the XSCF. Either of the following can be specified for locale: C

Sets the locale for English.

ja_JP.UTF-8

Sets the locale for Japanese.



The specified locale becomes effective after the subsequent login.



The currently set locale can be checked by using the showlocale(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets the XSCF default locale for English.

XSCF> setlocale -s C C

EXAMPLE 2

Sets the XSCF default locale for Japanese.

XSCF> setlocale -s ja_JP.UTF-8 ja_JP.UTF-8

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showlocale(8)

System Administration

203

setlocale(8)

204

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

setlocator(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setlocator - control the blinking of the CHECK LED on the operator panel setlocator value setlocator -h

DESCRIPTION

setlocator(8) command controls the blink state of the CHECK LED on the operator panel. The following states can be set:

Privileges

Start blinking

Makes the CHECK LED blink.

Stop blinking

Stops the blinking of the CHECK LED.

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -h

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: value

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

Specifies the CHECK LED state. One of the following can be specified: blink

Starts the CHECK LED blinking.

reset

Stops the CHECK LED blinking.

The showlocator(8) command can be used to check the CHECK LED state.

EXAMPLE 1

Starts the CHECK LED blinking.

XSCF> setlocator blink

EXAMPLE 2

Stops the CHECK LED blinking.

XSCF> setlocator reset

System Administration

205

setlocator(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

206

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showlocator(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

setlookup(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setlookup - enable or disable the use of the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server for authentication and privilege lookup setlookup -a

{local|ldap}

setlookup -p

{local|ldap}

setlookup -h DESCRIPTION

Privileges

setlookup(8) sets whether authentication and privileges data are looked up in LDAP or not. You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Sets the authentication lookup. Used with one of the required operands ldap or local.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-p

OPERANDS

EXAMPLES

Sets privileges lookup. Used with one of the required operands ldap or local.

The following operands are supported: ldap

Used with the -a and -p options. When set to ldap, authentication or privileges are first looked up locally and then in LDAP if not found locally.

local

Used with the -a and -p options. When set to local, authentication or privileges are looked up only locally.

EXAMPLE 1

Enabling LDAP Lookup of Privilege Data

XSCF> setlookup -p ldap

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

207

setlookup(8)

SEE ALSO

208

showlookup(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setnameserver(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setnameserver - set the domain name system (DNS) servers used in the XSCF network setnameserver [-c add] address ... setnameserver -c del address ... setnameserver -c del -a setnameserver -h

DESCRIPTION

setnameserver(8) command specifies the DNS servers used in the XSCF network. Up to three DNS servers can be registered for XSCF. Any attempt to register four or more DNS servers causes an error.

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

OPERANDS

The following options are supported: -a

Deletes all the DNS servers that are currently registered. This option is used with the "-c del".

-c add

Adds the host with the specified IP address as a DNS server. This option is used together with address. If the -c option is omitted, "-c add" is assumed specified. When a DNS server is registered, the existing setting is deleted, and overwriting is performed with the specified address.

-c del

Deletes the host with the specified IP address from the DNS servers that are set. If the -c option is omitted, "-c add" is assumed specified.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

The following operand is supported: address

Specifies the IP address of a DNS server to be added or deleted using four sets of integers. Up to three addresses delimited by the space can be specified. The following address form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

System Administration

209

setnameserver(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES



If multiple DNS servers are specified, names are solved in the order specified.



To reflect the DNS server name to XSCF, execute the applynetwork(8) command. After reflected the information, use the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF to complete the setting.



The currently set DNS server can be checked by using the shownameserver(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Adds the hosts with the IP addresses 192.168.1.2, 10.18.108.10, and 10.24.1.2 as DNS server. Names are solved in the order specified.

XSCF> setnameserver 192.168.1.2 10.18.108.10 10.24.1.2

EXAMPLE 2

Deletes the host with the IP address 10.18.108.10 from the DNS server.

XSCF> setnameserver -c del 10.18.108.10

EXAMPLE 3

Deletes all the DNS servers.

XSCF> setnameserver -c del -a

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

210

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

rebootxscf(8), shownameserver(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007

setnetwork(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setnetwork - sets or removes an XSCF network interface setnetwork [-m addr] interface address setnetwork -c {up | down} interface setnetwork [ [-q] -{y|n}] -r interface setnetwork -h

DESCRIPTION

setnetwork(8) command sets or removes an XSCF network interface. The following settings can be made for the specified network interface: ■

Whether to enable or disable the network interface.



IP address



Netmask

When you set an IP address or netmask, the specified network interface will be enabled at the same time as the setting. When you removed the netmask interface, the specified network interface will be disabled at the same time as the removal. And when the routing information is set to the target network interface, it will be removed together. Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

211

setnetwork(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c {up|down}

Specifies whether to enable the specified network interface. One of the following values can be specified. If none of them is specified, an error occurs. up

Enables the network interface.

down

Disables the network interface.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m addr

Specifies a netmask. The following addr form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

If the -m option is omitted, one of the following netmask corresponding to address is set.

OPERANDS



class A: 255.0.0.0



class B: 255.255.0.0



class C: 255.255.255.0

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-r

Removes the IP address and netmask of the network interface.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following operands are supported: address

Specifies an IP address. The specified value is a set of four integer values delimited by the "." (period). The following address form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

When you specify the loopback address (127.0.0.0/8), it results in errors.

212

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setnetwork(8)

interface

Specifies the network interface to be configured. One of the following values can be specified: ■

In the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers:

For XSCF unit 0: xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

For abbreviation: lan#0

an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#0

lan#1

an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#1



In the M8000/M9000 servers:

When you specify the -c or -r option and Inter SCF Network (ISN) together, it results in errors. For XSCF unit 0: xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

xscf#0-if

ISN

For XSCF unit 1 : xscf#1-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#1-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

xscf#1-if

ISN

For takeover IP address:

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

lan#0

takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#0

lan#1

takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#1



In the M8000/M9000 servers, a takeover IP address can be used without a need to determine whether XSCF has been switched. By setting the LAN ports of the active XSCF unit as lan#0 and lan#1, they can be accessed with the names lan#0 and lan#1.



In the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers, the value of the lan#0 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#0, and the lan#1 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#1.

System Administration

213

setnetwork(8) ■

After you set the network interface, if you disable that network interface and execute the applynetwork(8) command, the setting data of IP address and netmask will be stored in XSCF. When you enable the network interface, the setting of IP address and netmask will be used.



In the following cases, the setnetwork(8) command results in an error:





When specified the same subnet in XSCF-LAN#0 and XSCF-LAN#1



When specified the same IP address as DSCP



When specified a subnet which overlaps with DSCP



When specified the overlapped subnets in ISN and in other network interface



When specified the -c or -r option and ISN together

In case you specified the IP address and the netmask to the interfaces other than ISN and when the ISN is not configured, the following default value will be set: ■

xscf#0-if: IP address: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 255.255.255.0



xscf#1-if: IP address: 192.168.1.2 Netmask: 255.255.255.0

EXAMPLES



The shownetwork(8) command can display current information on a network interface configured for XSCF.



To reflect information on the specified network interface, execute the applynetwork(8) command and reset XSCF.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets the IP address 192.168.10.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.10

EXAMPLE 2

Sets the IP address 192.168.10.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0 in the M3000/M4000/M5000 server.

XSCF> setnetwork lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.10

EXAMPLE 3

Disables XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-lan#1 -c down

EXAMPLE 4

Sets the IP address 192.168.10.128 on ISN on the XSCF unit 0. By default, 255.255.255.0 is set for the netmask.

XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-if 192.168.10.128

EXAMPLE 5

214

Sets the IP address 192.168.11.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for XSCF-LAN#0

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setnetwork(8) on XSCF unit 1. XSCF> setnetwork xscf#1-lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.11.10

EXAMPLE 6

Sets the IP address 192.168.1.10 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for the takeover IP address of XSCF-LAN#0.

XSCF> setnetwork lan#0 -m 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.10

EXAMPLE 7

Removes the IP address and netmask that set in XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0

XSCF> setnetwork -r xscf#0-lan#0 You specified '-r' interface remove option. So, we delete routing information that interface corresponds. Continue? [y|n] :y If you choose 'y'es, you must execute 'applynetwork' command for application. Or you choose 'y'es, but you don't want to apply, you execute 'rebootxscf' for reboot.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

applynetwork(8), shownetwork(8)

System Administration

215

setnetwork(8)

216

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setntp(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setntp - set the NTP information for XSCF setntp [-c add] address ... setntp -c del address ... setntp -c del -a setntp -c stratum -i stratum_no setntp -h

DESCRIPTION

setntp(8) command sets the NTP information for XSCF. The setntp(8) command can specify the following information:

Privileges



The NTP servers which are used on the XSCF network. Up to three NTP servers can be registered for the XSCF network. Any attempt to register four or more servers causes an error.



The stratum value which has been set to XSCF.

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Deletes all the NTP servers that are currently registered. This option is used with the "-c del".

-c add

Adds the host with the specified address or the host as an NTP server. This option is used together with address. If the -c option is omitted, "-c add" is used. When an NTP server is registered, the existing setting is deleted and overwriting is performed with the specified address.

-c del

Deletes the host with the specified address or the host from the NTP servers. If the -c option is omitted, "-c add" is assumed specified.

-c stratum

Sets the stratum value in case you regard XSCF as an NTP server.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-i stratum_no

Specifies the stratum value. This option is used together with the "-c stratum". An integer from 1 to 15 can be specified. If the stratum value not specified, it is 5.

System Administration

217

setntp(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: address

Specifies the IP address or host name of an NTP server to be added or deleted. Up to three IP addresses or XSCF host names can be specified by delimited the spaces. A specified IP address is a set of four integer values delimited by the "." (period). The following address form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

Do not use the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) format to specify an XSCF host name, but specify only a host name. The host name can be specified in the format that complies with RFC 1034. If "-c add" is specified and address is omitted, an error occurs. EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES



If multiple NTP servers are specified, the NTP server specified first has priority over the others.



In the M8000/M9000 servers, the setting automatically reflected to the standby XSCF. When there's a defect on the standby XSCF, it leads to an error.



To apply the specified configuration, execute the rebootxscf(8) command and reset XSCF.



After resetting the XSCF, the time of XSCF will be synchronized with the time of NTP server.



When an NTP server set to XSCF, the time of the domain may be changed. If necessary, set the time of the domain.



The currently set NTP server can be checked by using the showntp(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Adds the three NTP servers with the addresses 192.168.1.2, 10.18.108.10, and 10.24.1.2.

XSCF> setntp 192.168.1.2 10.18.108.10 10.24.1.2 Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.

EXAMPLE 2

Deletes the NTP server 10.18.108.10.

XSCF> setntp -c del 10.18.108.10 Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.

218

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setntp(8) EXAMPLE 3

Adds the two NTP servers ntp1.examples.com and ntp2.example.com.

XSCF> setntp ntp1.example.com ntp2.example.com Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.

EXAMPLE 4

Sets the stratum value to 7.

XSCF> setntp -c stratum -i 7 Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ntp settings.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

rebootxscf(8), showntp(8)

System Administration

219

setntp(8)

220

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setpasswordpolicy(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setpasswordpolicy - manage the system password policy setpasswordpolicy [-d dcredit] [ -e expiry] [-i inactive] [-k difok] [-l lcredit] [ -M maxdays] [-m minlen] [-n mindays] [-o ocredit] [-r remember] [-u ucredit] [-w warn] [-y retry] setpasswordpolicy -h

DESCRIPTION

setpasswordpolicy(8) allows an administrator to change the system password policy. These policies are enforced by XSCF on the Service Processor. The new password policy applies only to users added after the setpasswordpolicy(8) command is executed. The following parameters control creation of new user accounts: expiry, inactive, maxdays, mindays, and warn. When a user is created, the adduser(8) command uses these parameters as the password expiration settings for the new account. The password(8) command can be used to change the password expiration settings for an existing account.

Privileges

You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d dcredit

Sets maximum number of digits in a password. Each digit counts as one credit. The minimum acceptable password length is decreased by one for each digit in the password, up to dcredit digits. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The initial setting is 1.

-e expiry

Sets the number of days a new account will be valid before expiring and becoming disabled. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created. The initial value is 0. A zero means that the account will not expire. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-i inactive

Sets the number of days after a password expires until the account is locked. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created. The initial value is –1. A value of –1 means that the account will not be locked after the password expires. Valid values are integers with value of –1 or greater.

System Administration

221

setpasswordpolicy(8)

-k difok

Sets the minimum number of new characters (characters which were not present in the old password) that a new password must contain. The initial setting is 3. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

-l lcredit

Sets the maximum credit for lower case letters in a password. The minimum acceptable password length is decreased by one for each digit in the password, up to lcredit digits. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The initial setting is 1.

-M maxdays

Sets the maximum number of days that a password is valid. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created.The initial value is 999999. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

-m minlen

Sets the minimum size for a new password.

Note – minlen cannot be set less than 6. Valid values are integers with value of 6 or greater. -n mindays

Sets the minimum number of days between password changes. An initial value of zero for this field indicates that you can change the password at any time. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

-o ocredit

Sets the maximum credit for nonalphanumeric characters in a password. The minimum acceptable password length is decreased by one for each digit in the password, up to ocredit digits. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater. The initial setting is 1.

-r remember

Sets the number of passwords remembered in the password history. The maximum valid value is 10. The initial setting is 3.

222

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setpasswordpolicy(8)

-u ucredit

Sets the maximum credit for uppercase letters in a password. The minimum acceptable password length is decreased by one for each digit in the password, up to ucredit digits. The initial setting is 1.

-w warn

Sets the default number of days before password expiration at which to start warning the user. This value is assigned to new user accounts when they are created. The initial value is 7. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

-y retry

Sets the number of retries permitted when using the password command to change the password for a user account. The initial value is 3. Valid values are integers with value of zero or greater.

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Setting the Minimum Size and Number of Passwords Remembered

XSCF> setpasswordpolicy -m 12 -r 5

EXAMPLE 2

Setting Minimum Password Length and Maximum Credits

XSCF> setpasswordpolicy -m 10 -d 1 -u 0 -l 0 -o 1

After running this command, the minimum password length for new passwords is 10 characters. A password of 9 characters is accepted if it contains at least one digit or nonalphanumeric character. A password of 8 characters is accepted if it contains a digit and a nonalphanumeric character. EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

adduser(8), password(8), showpasswordpolicy(8)

System Administration

223

setpasswordpolicy(8)

224

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setpowerupdelay(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setpowerupdelay - set the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system startup setpowerupdelay -c warmup -s time setpowerupdelay -c wait -s time setpowerupdelay -h

DESCRIPTION

The setpowerupdelay(8) command sets the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system startup. The wait time before system startup can be used to control the system startup time so that the system is started only after air-conditioning makes the temperature of the computer room suitable. If the system power has already been turned on and the system is operating, the setting takes effect at the next startup.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -c warmup

Specifies the warm-up time.

-c wait

Specifies the wait time before system startup.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-s time

Specifies the warm-up time or wait time before system startup in minutes. An integer ranging from 0 to 255 can be specified for time.



The currently set warm-up time and wait time before system startup can be checked by using the showpowerupdelay(8) command.



When the power is turned on from the operator panel, the wait time and warmup time that you set are ignored. If you have set these times and wish to observe them at startup, perform the poweron(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Sets the warm-up time to 10 minutes.

XSCF> setpowerupdelay -c warmup -s 10

EXAMPLE 2

Sets the wait time before system startup to 20 minutes.

XSCF> setpowerupdelay -c wait -s 20

System Administration

225

setpowerupdelay(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

226

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showpowerupdelay(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

setprivileges(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setprivileges - assign user privileges setprivileges user [ privileges] [ domainprivilege@ domains] setprivileges -h

DESCRIPTION

setprivileges(8) assigns privileges to an XSCF user. setprivileges modifies only local privileges data. Multiple privileges are separated by one or more spaces. There is a maximum of 100 unique users to whom privileges can be assigned. Each of the 100 unique user can be assigned more than one privilege. A list of privileges can be found in the OPERANDS section. The privileges domainop, domainmgr, and domainadm must be assigned to a specific domain. Other privileges do not have this ability. Refer to the OPERANDS section and EXAMPLE 1 for details. If no privileges are specified, setprivileges deletes any local privilege data for the specified user. Subsequently, the user’s privilege data is looked up in Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), if LDAP privilege lookup is enabled. If the none privilege is specified, the specified user does not have any privileges, regardless of privilege data in LDAP.

Privileges

OPTIONS

You must have useradm privileges to run this command. The following option is supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

System Administration

227

setprivileges(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: domainprivilege@domains Specifies domainadm, domainmgr, or domainop privileges for a specific domain or domains. The following are valid values for domainprivilege, each of which must be used with @domains: domainadm

Can perform all operations and view status on the hardware assigned to the domains on which this privilege is held (assign, unassign, power, and so on). Can perform all operations on domains on which this privilege is held. Can view all states of domains on which this privilege is held.

domainmgr

Can reboot and power on and off all domains on which this privilege is held. Can view all states of all hardware assigned to the domains on which this privilege is held. Can view all states of domains on which this privilege is held.

domainop

Can view all states of all the hardware assigned to the domains on which this privilege is held. Can view all states of all domains on which this privilege is held.

domains

Specifies a domain or domains, using the appropriate value for domainprivilege with the @ symbol and the domains descriptor: To specify a single domain, use the @ symbol followed by a single domain number. Example: domainadm@3. To specify a range of domains, use a "–" to indicate to start and end of the domains in the range, inclusive. Example: domainadm@3–4. To specify multiple single domains and multiple domain ranges, separate the domains or domain ranges with commas. Do not repeat domains or cause them to overlap or an error will result. Example: domainadm@1– 2,4.

privileges

228

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setprivileges(8)

The following are valid values for privileges: auditadm

Can configure auditing. Can delete audit trail.

auditop

Can view all audit state and audit trail.

fieldeng

Can perform all operations reserved for field engineers and authorized service personnel.

none

Cannot perform any operations on the Service Processor that require privilege, even if privileges are set for the user in LDAP. This privilege allows the administrator to restrict access to such operations on the Service Processor and domains.

platadm

Can perform all Service Processor configuration other than the useradm and auditadm tasks. Can assign and unassign hardware from domains, perform domain and XSCF power operations and all operations on domain hardware (assign, unassign, power, and so on). Can perform Service Processor failover operations and view all platform states.

platop

Can view all platform states but not perform any modifications.

useradm

Can create, delete, disable, or enable user accounts. Can change a user’s password and password properties (for example, expiry). Can modify a user’s privileges.

user Specifies a valid user name. EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Setting Privileges for JSmith

XSCF> setprivileges jsmith platadm domainadm@1–4,6,9

EXAMPLE 2

Removing All Privileges for JSmith

XSCF> setprivileges jsmith none

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

229

setprivileges(8)

SEE ALSO

230

setpasswordpolicy(8), showuser(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setroute(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setroute - set routing information for an XSCF network interface setroute -c {add | del} -n address [-m address] [-g address] interface setroute -h

DESCRIPTION

setroute(8) command sets routing information for an XSCF network interface. Up to eight routing information items can be registered for each network interface. Any attempt to register more than eight items causes an error.

Privileges

You must have platadm privilege to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c {add|del}

-g address

Specifies a function for routing information. One of the following values can be specified. If none of them is specified, an error occurs. add

Adds routing information.

del

Deletes routing information.

Specifies a gateway address used for routing. The specified value of address is a set of four integer values delimited by the "." (period). If this option is omitted, the gateway address is not set.The following address form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

System Administration

231

setroute(8)

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m address

Specifies the netmask to which routing information is forwarded. The specified value is a set of four integer values delimited by the "." (period). The following address form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

If the -m option is omitted and the -n option is used to specify the network address (containing "0" in the default host address which depends on the class), the following netmask value is set, according to the class of the network address: class

Mask value

A

255.0.0.0

B

255.255.0.0

C

255.255.255.0

If the -m option is omitted and the host address specified by the -n option, netmask is not set. If "0.0.0.0" specified by the -n option, netmask is invalid. -n address

Specifies an IP address to which routing information is forwarded. The specified value is a set of four integer values delimited by the "." (period). The following address form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

If "0.0.0.0" is specified for address, the default routing information can be set.

232

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setroute(8)

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: interface

Specifies the network interface to be set with routing information. One of the following values can be specified: ■

In the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers:

For XSCF unit 0: xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

For abbreviation: lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1



In the M8000/M9000 servers:

For XSCF unit 0: xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

For XSCF unit 1:

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

xscf#1-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#1-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1



If the specified address is the same as the DSCP address, an error occurs.



For XSCF-LAN#0 and XSCF-LAN#1, do not set the routing to the same network or the same host.



To reflect the routing information to XSCF, execute the applynetwork(8) command. After reflected the information, use the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF to complete the setting.



The showroute(8) command can display the current routing information that is set for the XSCF network.

EXAMPLE 1

Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and netmask 255.255.255.0 for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0 xscf#0-lan#0

EXAMPLE 2

Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and gateway 192.168.1.1 for

System Administration

233

setroute(8) XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0. XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.0 -g 192.168.1.1 xscf#0-lan#1

EXAMPLE 3

Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and default netmask (255.255.255.0) for XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.0 xscf#0-lan#1

EXAMPLE 4

Deletes the routing of destination 192.168.1.0 and default netmask (255.255.255.0) from XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setroute -c del -n 192.168.1.0 -m 255.255.255.0 xscf#0-lan#1

EXAMPLE 5

Adds the routing of destination 192.168.1. 4 for XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setroute -c add -n 192.168.1.4 xscf#0-lan#1

EXAMPLE 6

Deletes the routing of destination 192.168.1. 4 from XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setroute -c del -n 192.168.1.4 xscf#0-lan#1

EXAMPLE 7

Adds routing information for the default gateway 192.168.10.1 for XSCFLAN#1 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> setroute -c add -n 0.0.0.0 -g 192.168.10.1 xscf#0-lan#1

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

234

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

applynetwork(8), rebootxscf(8), showroute(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setshutdowndelay(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setshutdowndelay - set the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) setshutdowndelay -s time setshutdowndelay -h

DESCRIPTION

The setshutdowndelay(8) command sets the wait time before the start of system shutdown for when power interruption occurs in a system connected to the UPS. The start of system shutdown can be delayed until the specified time. When power recovery is reported from the UPS within the specified time, shutdown will not occur.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-s time

Specifies the wait time before the start of shutdown in units of seconds. Specify an integer number ranging from 0 to 9999 for time. The default value is 10 seconds.

The currently set wait time can be displayed by using the showshutdowndelay(8) command. EXAMPLE 1

Sets 600 seconds as the wait time before the start of shutdown.

XSCF> setshutdowndelay -s 600

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showshutdowndelay(8)

System Administration

235

setshutdowndelay(8)

236

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setsmtp(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setsmtp - set up the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings setsmtp [-v] setsmtp [-s variable= value]... setsmtp -h

DESCRIPTION

setsmtp(8) sets up the SMTP configuration values. When used without options, you will be prompted to provide the name of the SMTP email server to be used. You will also be prompted for the port and the Reply-To address to be used on outgoing email. Make sure that a valid email address is specified here. You can set up SMTP settings noninteractively using the -s option. After you have set up the email server and port have been set up using setsmtp(8), you can use setemailreport(8) to set up email report configuration data and send a test email message.

Privileges

You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

237

setsmtp(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: Displays usage statement.

-h

When used with other options or operands, an error occurs. -s variable=value

Sets SMTP. Valid entries for variable are: mailserver port auth user password replyaddress Where: auth is the authentication mechanism. user/password are the smtp mail server authentication. Valid auth entries are: none pop smtp-auth Specifies verbose output.

-v EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Setting Up Mailserver and No Authentication in Noninteractive Mode

XSCF> setsmtp -s mailserver=10.4.1.1 -s auth=none

EXAMPLE 2

Setting Up Authentication in Noninteractive Mode

XSCF> setsmtp -s auth=pop -s user=jsmith -s password=******

EXAMPLE 3

Setting Up SMTP Authentication in Interactive Mode

XSCF> setsmtp Mail Server [10.4.1.1]: Port [25]:

238

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setsmtp(8) Authentication Mechanism [none]: smtp-auth User Name []: jsmith Password []: ****** Reply Address [[email protected]]:

EXAMPLE 4

Setting Up Mailserver With Invalid Authentication Mechanism

XSCF> setsmtp Mail Server [10.4.1.1]: Port [25]: Authentication Mechanism [none]: ? Invalid value ’?’. Valid authentication mechanism are: none pop smtp-auth Authentication Mechanism [none]: Reply Address [[email protected]]:

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setemailreport(8), showsmtp(8)

System Administration

239

setsmtp(8)

240

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setsnmp(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setsnmp - manage the SNMP agent setsnmp enable [ mib_name] setsnmp disable [ mib_name] setsnmp addtraphost -t type -s community-string [-p trap-port] traphost setsnmp remtraphost -t type traphost setsnmp addv3traphost -u username -r authentication-protocol {-n engine_id|-i} [ -a authentication-password] [ -e encryption-password] [-p trap-port ] traphost setsnmp remv3traphost -u username traphost setsnmp enablev1v2c read-only-community-string setsnmp disablev1v2c setsnmp [-l system-location] [-c system-contact] [-d system-description] [-p agentport] setsnmp -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

setsnmp(8) enables or disables the SNMP Agent, as well as configures the SNMP agent settings. You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c system-contact

Specifies the system contact information for the agent.

-d system-description

Specifies the system description for the agent.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-l system-location

Specifies the system location for the agent.

-p agent-port

Specifies the listening port for the agent. The default is 161.

-s community-string

Acts like a password to control access to the SNMP v1 and v2 agents. It is a clear text string which can be intercepted. For password encryption and no visibility, use addv3traphost instead.

System Administration

241

setsnmp(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: addtraphost

Enables the SNMP agent to send the chosen type of trap to the desired host. If no trap-port is provided, the default is 162. A community string is mandatory. addtraphost takes the following options and operand: -p trap-port

ID of the trap port. Default value is 162.

-s community-string

Acts like a password to control access to the SNMP v1 and v2 agents. It is a clear text string which can be intercepted. For password encryption and no visibility, use addv3traphost instead.

-t type

Type of trap. Valid trap types are:

v1 = The agent will send SNMPv1 traps v2 = The agent will send SNMPv2 traps inform = The agent will send inform notifications traphost

242

Host name of the trap host.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setsnmp(8)

addv3traphost Enables the SNMP agent to send SNMPv3 traps or informs to the desired host. An authentication protocol must be chosen. Valid protocols are: MD5 = Uses the MD5 algorithm for authentication SHA = Uses SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) for authentication The encryption protocol used in all communication is DES (Data Encryption Standard). If the password option is not used, you will be prompted for a password. Passwords will be read but not echoed to the screen. addv3traphost takes the following options: -a authentication-password Sets the authentication password. Must be equal to or greater than 8 characters. -e encryption-password Sets the encryption password. -i Asks for an acknowledgment from the receiving host. -n engine_id Sets identifier of the local agent sending the trap. It can be the engine ID of the local SNMP agent or not but it must match the engine ID expected by the receiving host. Must start with “0x” and should consist of even hexadecimal characters or you will get an error. -p trap-port ID of the trap port. Default value is 162. -r authentication-protocol Sets the authentication protocol. traphost Host name of the trap host. -u username Specifies a valid user name.

System Administration

243

setsnmp(8)

disable

When used alone, stops the SNMP agent. When used with the value ALL for the optional mib_name, stops the SNMP agent. When used with a value other than ALL for the optional mib_name, removes support for the targeted MIB module. If support remains for another MIB module, the SNMP agent remains enabled. If support for both MIB modules is removed, the SNMP agent is disabled and, therefore, stops. You can specify only one value at a time for mib_name. mib_name Name of the MIB module to be disabled. Valid MIB modules are: SP_MIB = XSCF extension MIB FM_MIB = Fault Management MIB ALL = All the MIB modules in this list.

disablev1v2c

Disables the SNMP agent from communicating using SNMPv1/ v2c. These versions provide insecure SNMP communication.

enable

When used alone, activates the SNMP agent with support for all MIB modules. When used with the value ALL for the optional mib_name, activates the SNMP agent with support for all MIB modules. When used with a value other than ALL for the optional mib_name, adds support for the targeted MIB module and, if necessary, activates the SNMP agent. You can specify only one value at a time for mib_name. mib_name Name of the MIB module to be enabled. Valid MIB modules are: SP_MIB = XSCF extension MIB FM_MIB = Fault Management MIB ALL = All the MIB modules in this list.

enablev1v2c

244

Enables the SNMP agent to communicate using SNMPv1/v2c. These versions provide insecure SNMP communication, which is why the agent runs SNMPv3 by default. This agent is read-only. The only community string asked for is read-only.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setsnmp(8)

remtraphost

Disables the SNMP agent from sending the chosen type of trap to the desired host. -t type Type of trap. Valid trap types are: v1 = The agent will send SNMPv1 traps v2 = The agent will send SNMPv2 traps inform = The agent will send inform notifications traphost Host name of the trap host.

remv3traphost Disables the SNMP agent from sending SNMPv3 traps to the desired host. traphost Host name of the trap host. -u username Specifies a valid user name. EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Setting Up System Information

XSCF> setsnmp -l sandiego -c [email protected] -d ff1

EXAMPLE 2

Setting Up and SNMPv3 Trap Host With Password Options

XSCF> setsnmp addv3traphost -u jsmith -n 0x### -r SHA -a xxxxxxxx

-e yyyyyyyy fiche EXAMPLE 3

Setting Up and SNMPv3 Trap Host without Password Options

XSCF> setsnmp addv3traphost -u bob -i -r SHA fiche Authentication Password: Encryption Password:

EXAMPLE 4

Starting the Agent

XSCF> setsnmp enable SP_MIB

System Administration

245

setsnmp(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

246

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showsnmp(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setsnmpusm(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setsnmpusm - specify the SNMPv3 agent’s User-based Security Model (USM) configuration setsnmpusm create -a authentication_protocol [-p authentication_password] [ -e encyrption_password] user setsnmpusm delete user setsnmpusm clone -u clone_user user setsnmpusm passwd [-c { auth|encrypt}] [ -o old_password] [ -n new_password] user setsnmpusm -h

DESCRIPTION Privileges

setsnmpusm(8) modifies the SNMP Agent’s USM configuration. You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

System Administration

247

setsnmpusm(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: clone

248

Makes the supplied user known to the agent for subsequent SNMP communication with the identical settings as the specified clone_user. -u clone_user

Specifies a valid user name of the user settings to be cloned.

user

Specifies a different user name for the clone of clone_user.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

setsnmpusm(8)

create

Makes the supplied user known to the agent for subsequent SNMP communication. When used without the -a or -p options, create displays a prompt for passwords and reads them without echoing them to the screen. The encryption protocol used in all SNMP communication is Data Encryption Standard (DES). An authentication protocol must be chosen for SNMP communication. Possible values are MD5 Algorithm and Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA). user Specifies a valid user name. -a authentication_protocol Specifies the authentication protocol. -e encryption_password Specifies the encryption password. Must be equal to or greater than 8 characters. -p authentication_password Specifies the authentication password. Must be equal to or greater than 8 characters.

delete

Removes the supplied user making the user unknown to the agent for subsequent SNMP communication. user

passwd

Specifies a valid user name.

Changes the appropriate password for the specified user. The changed password is either the authentication password or the encrypted password, or both, if -c is not used. If -c is not used then both passwords must be the same or an error is generated. With no options, password displays a prompt for the passwords and reads them without echoing them to the screen. -c auth|encrypt

Specifies whether to change the authentication password or the encrypted password.

-n new_password

Specifies the new password. The password must be equal to or greater than 8 characters.

-o old_password

Specifies the old password.

user

Specifies a valid user name.

System Administration

249

setsnmpusm(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Adding a User With Password Options

XSCF> setsnmpusm create -a SHA -p xxxxxxxx -e yyyyyyyy jsmith

EXAMPLE 2

Adding a User Without Specifying Password Options

XSCF> setsnmpusm create -a SHA bob Authetication Password: Encryption Password:

EXAMPLE 3

Cloning a User

XSCF> setsnmpusm clone -u sue joe Authentication Password: Encryption Password:

EXAMPLE 4

Deleting a User

XSCF> setsnmpusm delete joe

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

250

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showsnmpusm(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

setsnmpvacm(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setsnmpvacm - modify the SNMPv3 agent’s View-based Access Control Model (VACM) configuration setsnmpvacm creategroup -u username groupname setsnmpvacm deletegroup -u username groupname setsnmpvacm createview -s OID_subtree [-e] [-m

OID_Mask] viewname

setsnmpvacm deleteview -s OID_subtree viewname setsnmpvacm createaccess -r read_viewname groupname setsnmpvacm deleteaccess groupname setsnmpvacm -h DESCRIPTION

Privileges

setsnmpvacm(8) modifies the SNMP Agent’s VACM configuration. Using this command requires a basic knowledge of SNMP. You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

System Administration

251

setsnmpvacm(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: createaccess

creategroup

createview

deleteaccess

Sets access to a MIB view for the specified group. -r read_viewname

Specifies an SNMP Agent view.

groupname

Specifies a valid group name.

Sets up a group for the specified user for view access. -u username

Specifies a valid user name.

groupname

Specifies a valid group name.

Sets up a view of the SNMP Agent exported MIB information. View access is limited to read-only for this Agent. The view is identified through a MIB OID subtree and can be limited to specific portions of that subtree using the OID Mask. -e

Specifies an excluded view. The default is an included view.

-m OID_Mask

Specifies a valid OID subtree mask. By default, the mask is ff (entire subtree).

-s OID_subtree

Specifies a MIB OID subtree. Values start at .1 for the entire MIB tree.

viewname

Specifies a valid view name.

Removes access entry. groupname

deletegroup

deleteview

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies a valid group name.

Removes a group from use. -u username

Specifies a valid user name.

groupname

Specifies a valid group name.

Removes this view from use. -s OID_subtree

Specifies a MIB OID subtree. Values start at .1 for the entire MIB tree.

viewname

Specifies a valid view name.

Create a Group

XSCF> setsnmpvacm creategroup -u jsmith admin

252

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

setsnmpvacm(8) EXAMPLE 2

Create a View of the Entire MIB

XSCF> setsnmpvacm createview -s .1 all_view

EXAMPLE 3

Create a View Where the Subtree Is Excluded

XSCF> setsnmpvacm createview -e -s .1.3.6.1.2.1.1 -m fe excl_view

EXAMPLE 4

Create Access

XSCF> setsnmpvacm createaccess -r all admin

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

showsnmpvacm(8)

System Administration

253

setsnmpvacm(8)

254

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

setssh(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

setssh - set the Secure Shell (SSH) service used in the XSCF network. Also, generate the host public key, and register or delete the user public key, which are necessary for the SSH service setssh [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c enable setssh -c disable setssh -c addpubkey [-u user_name] setssh -c delpubkey {-a | -s line } [-u user_name] setssh [ [-q] -{y|n}] -c genhostkey setssh -h

DESCRIPTION

setssh(8) command starts or stops the SSH service used in the XSCF network. Also, generates the host public key, and registers or deletes the user public key, which are necessary for the SSH service. If a host public key already exists when a new host public key is to be generated, an update confirmation prompt about the existing key is displayed. The user public key can be registered on each user account. Per user account, multiple user public keys can be registered. Per user account, the user public keys can be registered up to 1,023 characters including the linefeed. Only SSH2 is supported for XSCF.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: ■

To start or stop the SSH service, and to generate the host public key: platadm



To register or delete the user public key of other user account: useradm



To register or delete the user public key of the current login user account: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Deletes all registered user public keys. Should be specified with "-c delpubkey."

-c addpubkey

Registers the user public key.

-c delpubkey

Deletes the user public key.

System Administration

255

setssh(8)

-c {enable|disable} Specifies whether to enable the SSH service. One of the following values can be specified:

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

256

enable

Starts the SSH2 service.

disable

Stops the SSH2 service.

-c genhostkey

Generates a host public key for SSH2.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-s line

Specifies the user public key number to delete. For line, specify the number which displayed after the showssh -c pubkey command executed. Should be specified with "-c delpubkey."

-u user_name

Specifies the user account name to register or delete the user public key. Should be specified with "-c addpubkey" or "-c delpubkey." When the -u option omitted, the user public key of the current login user account becomes the target.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.



When a host public key is created, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



The setssh(8) command can register one user public key at a time.



In time of setssh(8) command execution, finish the input of user public key by pressing Enter and then pressing "Ctrl" and "D" (EOF).



In case the XSCF unit is duplicated configuration, the setting automatically reflected to the standby XSCF. When there is a defect on the standby XSCF, it leads to an error and the setting will be reflected to the active XSCF only.



The information which has been set will be reflected by using the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF.



The current SSH service settings can be checked by using the showssh(8) command.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setssh(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Starts the SSH service.

XSCF> setssh -c enable Continue? [y|n] :y Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.

EXAMPLE 2

Starts the SSH service. Automatically replies with "y" to the prompt.

XSCF> setssh -y -c enable Continue? [y|n] :y Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.

EXAMPLE 3

Starts the SSH service. Automatically replies with "y" without displaying the prompt.

XSCF> setssh -q -y -c enable

EXAMPLE 4

Stops the SSH service.

XSCF> setssh -c disable

EXAMPLE 5

Generates a host public key for SSH.

XSCF> setssh -c genhostkey Host key create. Continue? [y|n] :y Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.

EXAMPLE 6

Generates a host public key for SSH. Automatically replies with "y" to the prompt.

XSCF> setssh -c genhostkey -y Host key create. Continue? [y|n] :y Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the ssh settings.

EXAMPLE 7

Generates a host public key for SSH. Automatically replies with "y" without displaying the prompt.

XSCF> setssh -c genhostkey -q -y

EXAMPLE 8

Registers the user public key. Finish the input of public key by pressing En-

System Administration

257

setssh(8) ter and then pressing "Ctrl" and "D" XSCF> setssh -c addpubkey Please input a public key: ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/ FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected]

[Enter] [Ctrl]and[D] EXAMPLE 9

Registers the user public key by specifying the user name. Finish the input of public key by pressing Enter and then pressing "Ctrl" and "D".

XSCF> setssh -c addpubkey -u efgh Please input a public key: ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/ FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected]

[Enter] [Ctrl]and[D] EXAMPLE 10

Specifies the public key number to delete the user public key.

XSCF> setssh -c delpubkey -s 1 1

ssh-rsa

AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/ FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected]

EXAMPLE 11

Deletes all user public keys.

XSCF> setssh -c delpubkey -a

258

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setssh(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

rebootxscf(8), showssh(8)

System Administration

259

setssh(8)

260

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

settelnet(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

settelnet - start or stop the Telnet service used in the XSCF network settelnet -c {enable | disable} settelnet -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

settelnet(8) command starts or stops the Telnet service used in the XSCF network. You must have platadm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c {enable|disable} Specify whether to start the Telnet service. One of the following values can be specified. If none of them is specified, an error occurs.

EXAMPLES

Starts the Telnet service.

disable

Stops the Telnet service.

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-h

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

enable



In the M8000/M9000 servers, the setting automatically reflected to the standby XSCF. When there's a defect on the standby XSCF, it leads to an error and the setting will be reflected to the active XSCF only.



In case you stop the Telnet service, it will be reflected by using the rebootxscf(8) command to reset XSCF.



The current Telnet service state can be checked by using the showtelnet(8) command.

EXAMPLE 1

Starts the Telnet service.

XSCF> settelnet -c enable

EXAMPLE 2

Stops the Telnet service.

XSCF> settelnet -c disable Please reset the XSCF by rebootxscf to apply the telnet settings.

System Administration

261

settelnet(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

262

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

rebootxscf(8), showtelnet(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

settimezone(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

settimezone - set the time zone and Daylight Saving Time of XSCF settimezone -c settz -s timezone settimezone -c settz -a [-M] settimezone -c adddst -b std -o offset -d dst [-p offset] -f date [ /time] -t date [ /time] settimezone -c deldst -b std -o offset settimezone -h

DESCRIPTION

The settimezone(8) command sets the time zone and Daylight Saving Time of XSCF. The time zone is pursuant to POSIX standard.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Lists the time zones that can be set.

-c settz

Sets the time zone which complies with POSIX standards.

-c adddst

Manually sets the time zone and Daylight Saving Time.

-c deldst

Deletes the time zone and Daylight Saving Time.

-b std

Specifies the abbreviations of time zone. For std, specify an abbreviation of 3 letters or more. You can specify it in the format which complies with RFC2822. In case specified in combination with "-c adddst," it will be linked with the time zone to be set. When specified in combination with "-c deldst," the link with the time zone which has been set will be cancelled.

-d dst

Specifies the name of Daylight Saving Time. For dst, specify the alphabets of 3 letters or more. You can specify it in the format which complies with RFC2822.

System Administration

263

settimezone(8)

-f date [/time]

Specifies the starting time of Daylight Saving Time. You can specify date in any of the following formats. Mm.w.d Mm: Specifies the month to start Daylight Saving Time. For m, you can specify any integer from 1 to 12. w: Specifies the week to start Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 5, "1" for the first week and "5" for the last week in the month. d: Specifies the day of the week to start Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 0 to 6, "0" for Sunday and "6" for Saturday. Jn Jn: Specifies the sequential day in the year to start Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for January 1st. It does not count the leap-year day. n n: Specifies the sequential day in the year to start Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for January 1st. It counts the leap-year day. In time, you specify the time. You can specify it in the following format. hh:mm:ss

264

Specifies the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. hh is 00–23, mm is 00–59, ss is 00–60. In case omitted, "02:00:00."

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

settimezone(8)

-o offset

Specifies the offset of time zone and Greenwich mean time (GMT). You can specify offset in the following format. GMT{+|–}hh[:mm[:ss]] GMT

Greenwich mean time

{+|–}

Specifies "–" to set the standard time to the time which is ahead of GMT. (To adjust to the local time east to Greenwich, the offset is a negative value.)Specifies "+" to set the standard time to the time which is behind the GMT. (To adjust to the local tome west to Greenwich, the offset is a positive value.)

hh[:mm[:ss]]

Specifies the offset time. hh is 00–23, mm is 00–59, ss is 00–59.

System Administration

265

settimezone(8)

-p offset

Specifies the offset of Daylight Saving Time and Greenwich mean time (GMT). You can specify offset in the following format. In case omitted, it is 1 hour before the specified time. GMT{+|–}hh[:mm[:ss]]

-s timezone

266

GMT

Greenwich mean time

{+|–}

Specifies "–" to set the standard time to the time which is ahead of GMT. (To adjust to the local time east to Greenwich, the offset is a negative value.)Specifies "+" to set the standard time to the time which is behind the GMT. (To adjust to the local tome west to Greenwich, the offset is a positive value.)

hh[:mm[:ss]]

Specifies the offset time. hh is 00–23, mm is 00–59, ss is 00–59.

Specifies the time zone. One of the time zone displayed by the -a option can be specified for timezone.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

settimezone(8)

-t date [/time]

Specifies the termination time of Daylight Saving Time. You can specify date in any of the following formats. Mm.w.d Mm: Specifies the month to terminate Daylight Saving Time. For m, you can specify any integer from 1 to 12. w: Specifies the week to terminate Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 5, "1" for the first week and "5" for the last week in the month. d: Specifies the day of the week to terminate Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 0 to 6, "0" for Sunday and "6" for Saturday. Jn Jn: Specifies the sequential day in the year to terminate Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for January 1st. It does not count the leap-year day. n n: Specifies the sequential day in the year to terminate Daylight Saving Time. You can specify the integer from 1 to 365, "1" for January 1st. It counts the leap-year day. In time, you specify the time. You can specify it in the following format. hh:mm:ss

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

Specifies the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. hh is 00–23, mm is 00–59, ss is 00–60. In case omitted, "02:00:00."



You cannot specify the years of validity for time zone and Daylight Saving Time. In case the Daylight Saving Time is changed each year, you need to set anew by using the settimezone(8) command.



The addition of the offset time to the standard time which has been set by the settimezone(8) command comes to GMT.



The current time zone settings can be checked by using the showtimezone(8) command.



To reflect the Daylight Saving Time information which modified by -c adddst or -c deldst option, log out and then log in again.

System Administration

267

settimezone(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Sets "Asia/Tokyo" as the time zone.

XSCF> settimezone -c settz -s Asia/Tokyo Asia/Tokyo

EXAMPLE 2

Lists the time zones that can be set.

XSCF> settimezone -c settz -a Africa/Abidjan Africa/Accra Africa/Addis_Ababa Africa/Algiers Africa/Asmera Africa/Bamako Africa/Bangui . .

EXAMPLE 3

Sets the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: abbreviation of time zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving Time is JDT, Daylight Saving Time is 1 hour ahead, and the time period is from the last Monday of March 2:00 to the last Sunday of October 2:00.

XSCF> settimezone -c adddst -b JST -o GMT-9 -d JDT -f M3.5.0 -t

M10.5.0 JST-9JDT,M3.5.0,M10.5.0

EXAMPLE 4

Sets the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: abbreviation of time zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving Time is JDT, the offset of Daylight Saving Time from GMT is +10, and the time period is from the first Sunday of April 0:00 to the first Sunday of September 0:00.

XSCF> settimezone -c adddst -b JST -o GMT-9 -d JDT -p GMT-10 -f

M4.1.0/00:00:00 -t M9.1.0/00:00:00 JST-9JDT-10,M4.1.0/00:00:00,M9.1.0/00:00:00

EXAMPLE 5

Deletes the Daylight Saving Time information of current settings.

XSCF> settimezone -c deldst -b JST -o GMT-9

268

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

settimezone(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setdate(8), showdate(8), showtimezone(8)

System Administration

269

settimezone(8)

270

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

setupfru(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setupfru - set up device hardware setupfru [-m {y | n}] [-x {1 | 4}] device location setupfru -h

DESCRIPTION

The setupfru(8) command makes hardware settings for the specified device. The setupfru(8) command is not supported on the M3000 server. Only a physical system board (PSB) can be specified as a device. After a PSB is added, the following settings can be specified for PSB:

Privileges

XSB type

To use an added PSB in the system, hardware resources on the PSB must be logically divided and reconfigured as eXtended System Boards (XSBs). Two types of XSB are used: Uni-XSB and Quad-XSB. The Uni-XSB is configured with undivided PSB, and the Quad-XSB is configured with one of divided PSB into four parts. Specify either the UniXSB configuration or Quad-XSB configuration for the PSB.

Memory mirror mode

In mirror mode, data is mirrored by dividing the memory mounted on a PSB into two parts. Since the memory is divided into two parts, the memory capacity is halved, but data reliability increases. Specify whether to operate the memory in mirror mode.

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m {y|n}

Specifies whether to use the memory mounted on the XSB in mirror mode. Specify this option when sb is specified for device. Specify y to enable mirror mode; otherwise, specify n. If the -m option is omitted, the previous setting is inherited.

-x {1|4}

Specifies whether to configure PSB as a Uni-XSB or Quad-XSB. Specify this option when sb is specified for device. Specify 1 for Uni-XSB or specify 4 for Quad-XSB. If the -x option is omitted, the previous setting is inherited.

System Administration

271

setupfru(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: device

Specifies the device to be set up. Only the following device can be specified: sb

location

Specifies the location of the device. sb

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

Integer from 0–15. Specify only one location.



In the M8000/M9000 server, the Quad-XSB configuration cannot be set in memory mirror mode.



To set up an already mounted PSB again, all XSBs comprising the target PSB must have been disconnected from the domain configuration and placed under the system board pool. See the deleteboard(8) command for information on how to disconnect XSBs from the domain configuration.



The configuration of the PSB varies according to the system as shown below. ■

In the M8000/M9000 servers, the PSB consists of one CPU/memory board unit and one I/O unit in combination.



In the M4000/M5000 servers, the PSB consists of one CPU module and one memory module logically divided into two on the motherboard unit, and one I/O module.

The current PSB settings can be checked by using the showfru(8) command.



EXAMPLES

Physical system board (PSB)

EXAMPLE 1

Configures PSB#00 as a Quad-XSB (with memory in non-mirror mode because the memory mirror mode setting is omitted).

XSCF> setupfru -x 4 sb 0

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

272

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), showboards(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setupplatform(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

setupplatform - set up platform specific settings setupplatform [-v] setupplatform [-v] -p part [-p part] setupplatform -h

DESCRIPTION

The setupplatform(8) command sets up platform specific settings. The command leads an administrator through Service Processor installation tasks. By default, setupplatform command walks through each of the available settings. Individual settings may be selected using the -p option.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: ■

To use the -p user option: usradm



To use the -p network, -p altitude, -p timezone options: platadm

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-p part

Specifies the setting you want to do. One of the following can be specified for part:

-v EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

altitude

Configures the chassis altitude.

network

Configures the XSCF network, DSCP, DNS, NTP, SSH, https, and SMTP.

timezone

Sets the time zone for the XSCF. The time zone is chosen from a list of time zones.

user

Creates a new local XSCF user account with platadm, platop, and useradm privileges.

Specifies verbose output.

The available interfaces on the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers are xscf#0-lan#0, xscf#0-lan#1, lan#0, lan#1. The available interfaces on the M8000/M9000 servers are the same but they also include the xscf#0-if, xscf#1-lan#0, xscf#1-lan#1, and xscf#1if. In user setup, a new local user account can be created with a user supplied password.

System Administration

273

setupplatform(8)

In network setup, the following items can be optionally configured:

EXAMPLES



XSCF Network Settings



Internal DSCP Network



DNS



NTP



SSH



HTTPS Server



Email reports

EXAMPLE 1

Creating a New User.

XSCF> setupplatform -p user Do you want to set up an account? [y|n]: y Username: myadminuser User id in range 100 to 65533 or leave blank to let the system choose one: Username: myadminuser User id: Are these settings correct? [y|n]: y XSCF> adduser myadminuser XSCF> setprivileges myadminuser useradm platadm platop XSCF> password myadminuser New XSCF password: [not echoed] Retype new XSCF password: [not echoed]

EXAMPLE 2

Configuring the XSCF Network.

XSCF> setupplatform Do you want to set up an account? [y|n]: n Do you want to set up the XSCF network interfaces? [y|n]: y Do you want to configure xscf#0-lan#0? [y|n]: y xscf#0-lan#0 ip address? []: 192.168.1.4 xscf#0-lan#0 netmask? [255.255.255.0]: 255.255.254.0 xscf#0-lan#0 default gateway? []: 192.168.1.1 xscf#0-lan#0 ip address: 192.168.1.4 xscf#0-lan#0 netmask: 255.255.254.0

274

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setupplatform(8)

xscf#0-lan#0 default gateway: 192.168.1.1 Are these settings correct? [y|n]: y XSCF> setnetwork xscf#0-lan#0 -m 255.255.254.0 192.168.1.4 . . .

EXAMPLE 3

Enabling ssh.

XSCF> setupplatform -p network Do you want to set up the XSCF network interfaces? [y|n]: n Do you want to set up the DSCP network? [y|n]: n Do you want to set up the domain name service? [y|n]: n Do you want to set up the network time protocol? [y|n]: n Do you want to set up ssh? [y|n]: y Enable ssh service? [y|n]: y XSCF> setssh -q -y -c enable Do you want to set up https? [y|n]: n . . .

EXAMPLE 4

Configuring the Altitude.

XSCF> setupplatform -p altitude Do you want to set up the chassis altitude? [y|n]: y Chassis altitude is already configured: Chassis altitude in meters: 200 Continue setting up the chassis altitude? [y|n]: y Chassis altitude in meters: 400 Chassis altitude in meters: 400 Is this setting correct? [y|n]: y XSCF> setaltitude -s altitude=400 400m

The specified altitude becomes valid when the circuit breakers of the system are switched on again. Do you want to reboot the XSCF now? [y|n]: n XSCF>

System Administration

275

setupplatform(8) EXAMPLE 5

Setting the Time Zone.

XSCF> setupplatform -p timezone Do you want to set up the XSCF time zone? [y|n]: y Chassis time zone is already configured: XSCF time zone: US/Pacific Continue setting up the XSCF time zone? [y|n]: y 0

Africa/Abidjan

1

Africa/Accra

2

Africa/Addis_Ababa

3

Africa/Algiers

4

Africa/Asmera

5

Africa/Bamako

6

Africa/Bangui

7

Africa/Banjul

8

Africa/Bissau

9

Africa/Blantyre

10

Africa/Brazzaville

11

Africa/Bujumbura

12

Africa/Cairo

13

Africa/Casablanca

14

Africa/Ceuta

15

Africa/Conakry

16

Africa/Dakar

17

Africa/Dar_es_Salaam

18

Africa/Djibouti

19

Africa/Douala

20

Africa/El_Aaiun

21

Africa/Freetown

22

Africa/Gaborone

Enter number to choose time zone or return for next set of time zones: 21 XSCF time zone: Africa/Freetown Is this setting correct? [y|n]: y

276

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

setupplatform(8)

XSCF> setaltitude -c settz -s Africa/Freetown Africa/Freetown XSCF>

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

adduser(8), applynetwork(8), password(8), setaltitude(8), setdscp(8), setemailreport(8), sethostname(8), sethttps(8), setnameserver(8), setnetwork(8), setntp(8), setprivileges(8), setsmtp(8), setssh(8), setroute(8), settimezone(8)

System Administration

277

setupplatform(8)

278

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showaltitude(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showaltitude - display the altitude of the system and whether the air filter installed showaltitude showaltitude -h

DESCRIPTION

The showaltitude(8) command displays the current settings for the altitude of the system and whether the air filter installed. Whether the air filter installed is displayed on the M4000/M5000 servers only. The displayed altitude value is a multiple of 100 meters.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES



The air filter is displayed only when it is installed. If the filter is not installed nothing is displayed.



The setaltitude(8) command sets the altitude of the system and whether or not the air filter installed.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the altitude of the system.

XSCF> showaltitude 1000m

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the altitude of the M4000/M5000 servers with the air filter installed.

XSCF> showaltitude 1000m Filter is installed.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setaltitude(8)

System Administration

279

showaltitude(8)

280

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showarchiving(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showarchiving - display log archiving configuration and status showarchiving showarchiving [-e] [-v] showarchiving -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showarchiving(8) displays the status and configuration information for log archiving on the Service Processor. You must have platadm, platop or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -e

Displays information about the last ten archiving errors.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-v EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

Specifies verbose output.

If the -e option is not specified, showarchiving displays the following information: 1. A list of archiving configuration data: Archiving state

Log archiving is enabled or disabled.

Archive host

The host on which the logs are archived. Initial value is Not configured. Possible values are a host name or IPv4 address.

Archive directory

The directory on the archive host where the archives are stored. Initial value is Not configured.

System Administration

281

showarchiving(8)

Username for ssh login

User name which the Service Processor uses to login to the archive host. Initial value is Not configured.

Archive host public key

The public key which the Service Processor uses to verify the identity of the archive host. This field is not displayed unless the -v option is specified.

Archive host fingerprint

The md5 fingerprint of the public key which the Service Processor uses to verify the identity of the archive host.

2. Time of the most recent attempt to connect to the archive host, and the outcome of that attempt (success or failure): Latest communication

The completion time of the latest attempt to communicate with the archive host.

Connection status

The outcome of the latest attempt to connect to the archive host; successful (OK) or unsuccessful (FAILED).

3. Table of the status information for audit logs and non-audit logs: Archive space limit

The amount of space allocated for the archives.

Archive space used The amount of space currently consumed by the archives. Total archiving failures

A counter of failed archiving operations.

Unresolved failures

A counter of failed archiving operations which the Service Processor will continue to retry.

If the -e option is specified showarchiving displays the details of the last ten archiving errors that occurred. EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

XSCF>

Viewing Status and Configuration Data showarchiving

*** Archiving Configuration *** Archiving state ---------- Disabled Archive host ------------- Not configured Archive directory -------- Not configured User name for ssh login -- Not configured

282

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

showarchiving(8)

Archive host fingerprint - Server authentication disabled

*** Connection to Archive Host *** Latest communication ----- None Connection status -------- None

AUDIT LOGS

OTHER LOGS

----------

----------

Unlimited

2000 MB

Not monitored

Not monitored

Total archiving failures

0

0

Unresolved failures

0

0

Archive space limit Archive space used

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF>

Displaying Archiving Error Information showarchiving -e

No archiving errors have occurred.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setarchiving(8)

System Administration

283

showarchiving(8)

284

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

showaudit(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showaudit - display the current auditing system state showaudit showaudit [all] showaudit [-a

users] [-c classes] [-e events] [-g] [-m] [-p] [-s] [-t]

showaudit -h DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showaudit(8) displays the current state of system auditing. When invoked without options showaudit displays whether the writing of audit records is enabled or disabled. You must have auditadm or auditop privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

285

showaudit(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a users

Displays the audit record generation policy for the specified users. users is a comma-separated list of valid user names.

-c classes

Displays the audit record generation policy for the specified audit classes. classes is a comma-separated list of audit classes. A class may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The ACS_ prefix may be omitted. For example, the class of audit related events can be expressed as ACS_AUDIT, AUDIT or 16. The following are valid classes:

-e events

all

Denotes all classes.

ACS_SYSTEM(1)

System-related events

ACS_WRITE(2)

Commands that can modify a state

ACS_READ(4)

Commands that read a current state

ACS_LOGIN(8)

Login-related events

ACS_AUDIT(16)

Audit-related events

ACS_DOMAIN(32)

Domain management–related events

ACS_USER(64)

User management–related events

ACS_PLATFORM(128)

Platform management–related events

ACS_MODES(256)

Mode-related events

Displays the audit record generation policy for the specified audit events. events is a comma-separated list of audit events. An event may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The AEV_ prefix may be omitted. For example, the event for SSH login can be expressed as AEV_LOGIN_SSH, LOGIN_SSH, or 0. See showaudit -e all for a list of all valid events.

-g

Displays the global user audit record generation policy.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m

286

Displays the address to which email is sent when the local audit storage space usages reaches a threshold.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised April 2008

showaudit(8)

-p

Displays the policy to follow when the audit trail reaches full capacity.

-s

Displays the following auditing states:



Free space remaining for local audit records



Number of audit records dropped (since the last boot) since the audit trail reached full capacity.

The following operands are supported: Displays the following information:

all

EXAMPLES

Space consumed by local audit records

Displays the thresholds at which to issue warning(s) about local storage usage.

-t

OPERANDS



EXAMPLE 1



Whether the writing of audit trails is set to enable or disable. This is the same display that is shown for showaudit when invoked without any options.



All the information that would be displayed by invoking showaudit with the options: -a, -c all, -e all, -g, -m, -p, -s, -t.

Displaying Auditing Status

XSCF> showaudit Auditing: enabled

EXAMPLE 2

Displaying All Class Information For Login Auditing

XSCF> showaudit -c LOGIN Events: AEV_LOGIN_BUI

enabled

AEV_LOGIN_CONSOLE

enabled

AEV_LOGIN_SSH

enabled

AEV_LOGIN_TELNET

enabled

AEV_LOGOUT

enabled

AEV_AUTHENTICATE

enabled

System Administration

287

showaudit(8) EXAMPLE 3

Displaying All Event Information

XSCF> showaudit -e all Events: AEV_AUDIT_START

enabled

AEV_AUDIT_STOP

enabled

AEV_ENTER_MODE

enabled

AEV_EXIT_MODE

enabled

AEV_LOGIN_BUI

enabled

AEV_LOGIN_CONSOLE

enabled

AEV_LOGIN_SSH

enabled

AEV_LOGIN_TELNET

enabled

AEV_LOGOUT

enabled

AEV_AUTHENTICATE

enabled

AEV_addboard

enabled

AEV_addcodlicense

enabled

AEV_addfru

enabled

[...]

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

288

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setaudit(8), viewaudit(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised April 2008

showautologout(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showautologout - display the session timeout time of the XSCF shell showautologout showautologout -h

DESCRIPTION

The showautologout(8) command displays the session timeout time of the XSCF shell. The session timeout time is displayed in units of minutes. If the session timeout time has not been specified with the setautologout(8) command, a time of 10 minutes is set by default.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the session timeout time of the XSCF shell.

XSCF> showautologout 30min

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the session timeout time of the XSCF shell (the time is default).

XSCF> showautologout 10min

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setautologout(8)

System Administration

289

showautologout(8)

290

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showboards(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showboards - display information on an eXtended System Board (XSB) showboards [-v] -a [-c sp] showboards [-v] -d domain_id [-c sp] showboards [-v] xsb showboards -h

DESCRIPTION

The showboards(8) command displays information on XSBs. This command displays information on XSBs currently configured in or assigned to a domain and information on all mounted XSBs. If a domain is specified, the command displays only information defined with the corresponding domain component list (DCL). The following types of information are displayed: XSB

XSB number. The format of the displayed number is as follows: x–y

DID

LSB

x

An integer from 00–15.

y

An integer from 0–3.

Domain ID. One of the following is displayed: 00–23

Domain ID to which the XSB is assigned

SP

This is displayed if the XSB does not belong to any domain but is located in the system board pool.

Other

This is displayed if the XSB belongs to a domain to which no user privilege has been granted.

Logical system board (LSB) number defined for the domain. The displayed number is an integer ranging from 0 to 15.

System Administration

291

showboards(8)

Assignment

Pwr

Conn

292

Domain assignment state of the XSB. Either of the following is displayed: Unavailable

The XSB cannot be used. The XSB may be unrecognizable because it is not mounted, it contains an error, it has been assigned to another domain, or the settings of the domain or system board are not complete.

Available

The XSB is registered on the DCL and can be used. The XSB may be located in the system board pool.

Assigned

The XSB is reserved for or assigned to the domain.

Power status of the XSB n

Power is off.

y

Power is on.

Status of the XSB connection to the domain configuration n

The XSB is not connected to the domain, or it is located in the system board pool.

y

The XSB is connected to the domain.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showboards(8)

Conf

Test

Fault

Incorporation state of XSB hardware resources into the Solaris OS n

The resources are not connected to the Solaris OS.

y

The resources are incorporated in the Solaris OS.

Status of an initial diagnosis on an XSB Unmount

The XSB cannot be recognized because it is not mounted or because it has an error.

Unknown

Not performed.

Testing

The initial diagnosis is in progress.

Passed

The initial diagnosis ended normally.

Failed

Error (test=fail) detected by an initial diagnosis. The XSB cannot be used or is in a degraded state.

XSB degradation status Normal

Normal

Degraded

Component in a degraded state. The XSB can operate.

Faulted

An error occurred and the XSB cannot operate.

When the -v option is specified, the following types of information are displayed as XSB detail status information: R

Dynamic reconfiguration(DR) involving the reservation state of the XSB in the domain *

Cod

DR processing is reserved. When the domain is rebooted, the XSB is incorporated into or disconnected from the domain, and the domain configuration is changed.

Whether the XSB is a COD board n

The XSB is not a COD board.

y

The XSB is a COD board.

System Administration

293

showboards(8) Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, fieldeng Can execute the command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can execute the command only for accessible domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

OPERANDS

The following options are supported: -a

Displays the state of XSBs configured in or assigned to a domain and the state of all mounted XSBs.

-c sp

Displays the system boards located in the system board pool. System boards in the system board pool do not belong to any domain.

-d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the domain whose status of XSB is displayed. Only information that is defined with the DCL of the specified domain is displayed. An integer ranging from 0 to 23 can be specified for domain_id, depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-v

Displays detailed information on XSB.

The following operand is supported: xsb

Specifies the XSB number to be displayed. The following xsb form is accepted: x–y where:

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

x

An integer from 00–15.

y

An integer from 0–3.

Displays information on all mounted system boards.

XSCF> showboards -a XSB

DID(LSB) Assignment

Pwr

Conn Conf Test

Fault

---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- --------

294

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showboards(8)

00-0 00(00)

Assigned

y

y

y

Passed

Normal

00-1 00(01)

Assigned

y

y

y

Passed

Normal

00-2 SP

Available

y

n

n

Passed

Normal

00-3 02(00)

Unavailable y

n

n

Unknown Normal

Displays detailed information on all mounted system boards.

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF> showboards -v -a XSB

R DID(LSB) Assignment

Pwr

Conn Conf Test

Fault

COD

---- - -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------- --00-0

00(00)

Assigned

y

y

y

Passed

Normal

n

00-1 * 00(01)

Assigned

y

y

y

Passed

Normal

n

00-2

SP

Available

y

n

n

Passed

Normal

n

00-3

02(00)

Unavailable y

n

n

Unknown Normal

n

EXAMPLE 3

Displays information on XSB#00-0.

XSCF> showboards 00-0 XSB

DID(LSB) Assignment

Pwr

Conn Conf Test

Fault

---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------00-0 15(00)

EXAMPLE 4

Assigned

y

y

y

Passed

Normal

Displays detailed information on XSB#00-0.

XSCF> showboards -v 00-0 XSB

R DID(LSB) Assignment

Pwr

Conn Conf Test

Fault

COD

---- - -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------- --00-0 * 15(00)

EXAMPLE 5

Assigned

y

n

n

Passed

Normal

y

Displays system boards located in the system board pool.

XSCF> showboards -a -c sp XSB

DID(LSB) Assignment

Pwr

Conn Conf Test

Fault

---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------00-0 SP

Available

y

n

n

Passed

Normal

00-2 SP

Available

y

n

n

Passed

Normal

00-3 SP

Available

y

n

n

Passed

Normal

System Administration

295

showboards(8) EXAMPLE 6

Displays the system boards that are defined for domain ID 0 and located in the system board pool.

XSCF> showboards -d 0 -c sp XSB

DID(LSB) Assignment

Pwr

Conn Conf Test

Fault

---- -------- ----------- ---- ---- ---- ------- -------00-2 SP

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

296

Available

y

n

n

Passed

Normal

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), addcodlicense(8), deleteboard(8), deletecodlicense(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showcodlicense(8), showcodusage(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showcod(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showcod - display Capacity on Demand (COD) configuration information showcod [-v] [-d domain_id] showcod -h

DESCRIPTION

showcod(8) displays the COD information which includes the headroom amount, number of installed COD right-to-use (RTU) licenses, the number of COD RTU licenses reserved for domains, and the Chassis Hostid. The showcod(8) command is not supported on the M3000 server. When used without arguments it displays the current COD information.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop Can execute the command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can execute the command only for accessible domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Domain identifier. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs. Specifies verbose output.

-v EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying All COD Information

The output shown is what you would see if you had domainadm, domainop, or domainmgr privileges for Domain 1. XSCF>

showcod

PROC RTUs reserved for domain 1 : 0

EXAMPLE 2

Displaying All COD Information

System Administration

297

showcod(8)

The output shown is what you would see if you had platform privileges. XSCF>

showcod

Chassis HostID : 81000001 PROC RTUs installed : 8 PROC Headroom Quantity : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 0 : 4 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 1 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 2 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 3 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 4 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 5 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 6 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 7 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 8 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 9 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 10 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 11 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 12 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 13 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 14 : 0 PROC RTUs reserved for domain 15 : 0

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

298

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setcod(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showcodlicense(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showcodlicense - display the current Capacity on Demand (COD) right-to-use (RTU) licenses stored in the COD license database showcodlicense [-r] [-v] showcodlicense -h

DESCRIPTION

showcodlicense(8) displays COD license information stored in the COD license database. The showcodlicense(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. When used without options it displays the current licenses.

Privileges

You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

-r

Displays the license information in the raw license-signature format, as stored in the COD license database.

-v

Specifies verbose output. Displays both the formatted license information and raw license-signature data.

The showcodlicense command displays the following COD information:

Description

Type of resource (processor).

Ver

Version number of the license, which is always set to 01.

Expiration

Expiration of the license.

Count

Number of right-to-use licenses granted for the given resource.

Status

GOOD, which indicates that the given resource is valid, or EXPIRED, which indicates that the resource license is no longer valid.

The following examples display the COD license information:

System Administration

299

showcodlicense(8) EXAMPLE 1

Displaying Formatted License Data

XSCF> showcodlicense -v Description

Ver

Expiration

Count

Status

-----------

---

-----------

-----

-------

01

NONE

16

GOOD

PROC

01:84000000:000000001:0301010100:16:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

EXAMPLE 2

Displaying Raw License Data

XSCF> showcodlicense -r 01:84000000:104:0301010100:3:00000000:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

300

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addcodlicense(8), deletecodlicense(8), showcodusage(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showcodusage(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showcodusage - display the current usage statistics for Capacity on Demand (COD) resources showcodusage [-v] [-M] [-p resource|domain|all ] showcodusage -h

DESCRIPTION

showcodusage(8) shows current information about COD right-to-use (RTU) licenses in use. The showcodusage(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. By default, this command displays a summary of COD RTU licenses used and installed, along with the current state of each resource. When used without options, it displays the current usage.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, fieldeng: Can run this command for all resources and domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop: Can run this command for available resources only for those domains that you can access. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-p domain

Displays the license usage for each domain. The statistics reported include the number of COD RTU licenses used by the domain, resources assigned to the domain, and COD RTU licenses reserved for the domain.

-p resource Displays license usage by resource type. -p all

Displays all COD usage information.

-v

Specifies verbose output. Displays all available COD usage information, including COD RTU license use for both the system and its domains.

System Administration

301

showcodusage(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

The showcodusage -p resource command displays the following COD usage information for the system: Resource

Identifies the type of COD resources available (processors).

In Use

Specifies the number of COD CPUs currently used in the system.

Installed

Specifies the number of COD CPUs installed in the system.

License

Specifies the number of COD RTU licenses installed.

Status

Specifies one of the following COD attributes: OK

Indicates that there are sufficient licenses for the COD CPUs in use. Also displays the number of remaining COD resources available and the number of any instant access CPUs (headroom) available.

HEADROOM

The number of instant access COD CPUs in use.

Violation

Indicates a COD RTU license violation exists. Displays the number of COD CPUs in use that exceeds the number of COD RTU licenses available. This situation can occur when you force the deletion of a COD RTU license key from the COD RTU license database, but the COD CPU associated with the license key is still in use.

The showcodusage -p domain command displays the following COD usage information for each domain: Domain/Resource Identifies COD RTU resource (processor) for each domain. An Unused processor is a COD CPU that has not yet been assigned to a domain. In Use

302

Specifies the number of COD CPUs currently used in the domain.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showcodusage(8)

EXAMPLES

Installed

Specifies the number of COD CPU resources installed in the domain.

Reserved

Specifies the number of COD RTU licenses allocated to the domain.

Status

Contains one of the following when the -v option is specified: Licensed

The domain COD CPU has a COD RTU license and is in use.

Unlicensed

A COD RTU license for the domain COD CPU could not be obtained and it is not in use.

Unused

The COD CPU is not in use.

Users with platform administrator privileges can view both resource and domain usage summaries. Users with domain administrator privileges can view only the domain usage summaries for which they have privileges, and a report of unused licenses. EXAMPLE 1

Displaying COD Usage by Resource

XSCF> showcodusage -p resource Resource

In Use

Installed

Licensed

Status

--------

------

---------

--------

------

4

4

16

PROC

EXAMPLE 2

OK: 12 available

Displaying COD Usage by Domain

XSCF> showcodusage -p domains Domain/Resource

In Use

Installed

Reserved

---------------

------

---------

--------

0 - PROC

4

4

0

1 - PROC

4

4

0

2 - PROC

4

4

0

3 - PROC

4

4

0

4 - PROC

0

0

0

Unused - PROC

0

0

12

EXAMPLE 3

Displaying COD Usage by Resource and Domain: M8000 Server With CMU00

System Administration

303

showcodusage(8) Quad-XSB, CMU02 Uni-XSB XSCF> showcodusage -v Resource

In Use

Installed

Licensed

Status

--------

------

---------

--------

------

0

8

0

PROC

OK: 0 available Headroom: 2

Domain/Resource

In Use

Installed

Reserved

Status

---------------

------

---------

--------

------

0

8

0

0

1

0

- PROC 00-0 - PROC CMU00-CPU0 00-1 - PROC

Unused 0

1

CMU00-CPU1 00-2 - PROC

Unused 0

1

CMU00-CPU2 00-3 - PROC

Unused 0

1

CMU00-CPU3 02-0 - PROC

304

Unused 0

4

CMU02-CPU0

Unused

CMU02-CPU1

Unused

CMU02-CPU2

Unused

CMU02-CPU3

Unused

1

- PROC

0

0

0

2

- PROC

0

0

0

3

- PROC

0

0

0

4

- PROC

0

0

0

5

- PROC

0

0

0

6

- PROC

0

0

0

7

- PROC

0

0

0

8

- PROC

0

0

0

9

- PROC

0

0

0

10 - PROC

0

0

0

11 - PROC

0

0

0

12 - PROC

0

0

0

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showcodusage(8)

13 - PROC

0

0

0

14 - PROC

0

0

0

15 - PROC

0

0

0

Unused - PROC

0

0

2

Displaying COD Usage by Resource and Domain: M5000 Server

EXAMPLE 4

XSCF> showcodusage -v Resource

In Use

Installed

Licensed

Status

--------

------

---------

--------

------

0

4

0

PROC Domain/Resource

In Use

Installed

Reserved

Status

---------------

------

---------

--------

------

0

- PROC

0

0

0

1

- PROC

0

0

0

2

- PROC

0

0

0

3

- PROC

0

0

0

0

4

0

0

4

Unused - PROC 00-0 - PROC

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

OK: 0 available

CPUM00-CPU0

Unused

CPUM00-CPU1

Unused

CPUM01-CPU0

Unused

CPUM01-CPU1

Unused

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addcodlicense(8), deletecodlicense(8), showcodlicense(8)

System Administration

305

showcodusage(8)

306

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showconsolepath(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showconsolepath - displays information on the domain console that is currently connected showconsolepath -a showconsolepath -d domain_id showconsolepath -h

DESCRIPTION

The showconsolepath(8) command displays information on the domain console that is currently connected. The following information can be displayed:

Privileges

User

User account of the XSCF connected to the domain console

DID

Domain ID

ro/rw

Domain console type ro

Read-only console

rw

Writable console

escape

Escape mark specified for the console

Date

Date connected to the domain console

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop Can run this command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can run this command only for your accessible domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -a

Displays console information on all domains that can be accessed.

-d domain_id

Specifies only one ID of the domain for which information is to be displayed. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

System Administration

307

showconsolepath(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

Only one writable console and one or more read-only consoles can be connected to one domain. EXAMPLE 1

Displays console information on all domains that can be accessed.

XSCF> showconsolepath -a

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

308

User

DID

ro/rw

escape

Date

nakagawa

00

rw

@

Fri Jul 29 21:23:34

hana

00

ro

#

Fri Jul 29 09:49:12

k-okano

00

ro

#

Fri Jul 29 18:21:50

yuuki

01

rw

|

Fri Jul 29 10:19:18

uchida

01

ro

*

Fri Jul 29 13:30:41

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

console(8), sendbreak(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showdate(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showdate - display the date and time of XSCF showdate [-u] showdate -h

DESCRIPTION Privileges

The showdate(8) command displays the date and time of XSCF. You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-u

Specifies time in coordinated universal time (UTC). When the -u option is omitted, the local time is specified.

The setdate(8) command sets the XSCF date and time.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the current time as the local time (JST).

XSCF> showdate Mon Jan 23 14:53:00 JST 2006

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the current time in UTC.

XSCF> showdate -u Mon Jan 23 05:56:15 UTC 2006

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setdate(8), settimezone(8), showtimezone(8)

System Administration

309

showdate(8)

310

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdcl(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showdcl - display the current domain component list (DCL) showdcl [-v] -a showdcl [-v] -d domain_id [-l lsb [-l lsb]]... showdcl -h

DESCRIPTION

The showdcl(8) command displays the DCL that has been set by the setdcl(8) command. The DCL is hardware resource information that can be set for a domain or the logical system boards (LSBs) that are components of a domain. An LSB is a board unit recognized by the Solaris OS in a domain. Up to 16 LSBs can be registered for each domain, and they are represented by integer numbers ranging from 0 to 15. An XSB is a board unit that can be used in the system and is one division of a divided physical system board (PSB). An XSB is represented by x–y, a combination of a PSB number and the number of one division of the divided PSB (x is an integer ranging from 00 to 15, and y is an integer ranging from 0 to 3). The showdcl(8) command can display the following information that is part of a DCL: DID

Domain ID

LSB

LSB number. The displayed number is an integer ranging from 00 to 15.

XSB

XSB number corresponding to the LSB. The displayed number has the following format: x–y where: x

An integer from 00–15.

y

An integer from 0–3.

System Administration

311

showdcl(8)

Status

Domain status. One of the following status is displayed. Additional information may be displayed. Powered Off Power is off. Panic State A panic occurred, and the domain is in the reboot state. Shutdown Started The power-off process is starting. Initialization Phase OpenBoot PROM initialization is in progress. OpenBoot Executing Completed The system is in the OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state. Booting/OpenBoot PROM prompt The Solaris OS is booting. Or due to the domain shutdown or reboot, the system is in the OpenBoot PROM running state or is suspended in the OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state. Running The Solaris OS is running.

312

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdcl(8)

If the -v option is specified, the following information is added: Cfg-policy

No-Mem

No-IO

Float

Privileges

Degradation range applicable for an error detected during an initial diagnosis of hardware. Any of the following is displayed: FRU

Degradation of a component (default)

XSB

Degradation of an XSB.

System

Degradation of a domain

Whether to omit the use of memory on a domain. Either of the following is displayed: True

Omits the use of memory on a domain.

False

Does not omits the use of memory on a domain (default).

Whether to omit the use of I/O devices on a domain. Either of the following is displayed: True

Omits the use of I/O devices on a domain.

False

Does not omit the use of I/O devices on a domain (default).

Whether to set a priority for the specified LSB as a floating board, relative to other boards. Either of the following is displayed: True

Gives a higher priority to the LSB to become a floating board.

False

Does not give a higher priority regarding floating boards (default).

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, fieldeng Can execute the command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can execute the command only for accessible domain. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

313

showdcl(8)

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

The following options are supported:. -a

Displays information that is set for all domains.

-d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the domain for which information is to be displayed. The domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-l lsb

Specifies the LSB number whose information is to be displayed. Multiple -l options can be specified by delimiting them with spaces. Specify an lsb value by using an integer ranging from 0 to 15. If lsb is omitted, all the LSBs in the domain are targets.

-v

Also displays information on Cfg-policy, No-Mem, No-IO, and Float in the DCL.



An XSB for which the floating board priority is set to a low value is difficult to use as a floating board. Accordingly, it is difficult for the system board to affect the domain Solaris OS.



The setdcl(8) command sets the DCL.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays detailed information on the DCL that is set for domain ID 0

XSCF> showdcl -d 0 DID

LSB

XSB

00

Status Running

00

00-0

04

01-0

08

02-0

12

03-0

EXAMPLE 2

Displays details in the DCL that is set for domain ID 0.

XSCF> showdcl -v -d 0 DID

LSB

XSB

00

314

Status

No-Mem

No-IO

Float

Running 00

00-0

01

-

02

-

Cfg-policy FRU

False

False

False

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdcl(8)

03

-

04

01-0

05

-

06

-

07

-

08

02-0

09

-

10

-

11

-

12

03-0

13

-

14

-

15

-

EXAMPLE 3

False

True

False

True

True

True

True

True

False

Displays details in the DCL that are set for all domains.

XSCF> showdcl -v -a DID

LSB

XSB

00

Status

No-Mem

No-IO

Float

Running 00

00-0

01

-

02

-

03

-

04

01-0

05

-

06

-

07

-

08

02-0

09

-

10

-

11

-

12

03-0

13

-

14

-

Cfg-policy FRU

False

False

False

False

True

False

True

True

True

True

True

False

System Administration

315

showdcl(8)

15

-

--------------------------------------------------------------01

Running (Waiting for OS Shutdown) 00

01-2

True

True

False

01

04-0

False

False

False

02

-

03

-

04

-

05

-

06

-

07

05-0

True

False

False

08

-

09

-

10

-

11

-

12

-

13

-

14

06-0

True

True

True

15

-

FRU

--------------------------------------------------------------: :

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

316

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8), showdevices(8), showfru(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdevices(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showdevices - display current information on an eXtended System Board (XSB) showdevices [-v] [-p bydevice | byboard | query | force] xsb showdevices [-v] [-p bydevice | byboard] -d domain_id showdevices -h

DESCRIPTION

The showdevices(8) command displays the information of the physical devices configured on XSB and their available resources of these devices. The information of available resources can be obtained for the devices managed by the operating system. The command can also display in advance whether the XSB can be disconnected from the domain using the dynamic reconfiguration (DR) function. The following types of information are displayed: Common: DID

Domain ID

XSB

XSB number

CPU: id

processor ID

state

status of processor

speed

CPU frequency (MHz)

ecache

CPU external cache size (MB)

MEMORY: board mem

Size of memory mounted on the XSB (MB)

perm mem

Size of memory that mounted and cannot be relocated on the XSB (MB)

base address

Physical address of memory mounted on the XSB

domain mem

Size of memory on the domain (MB)

System Administration

317

showdevices(8)

When memory is being disconnected, the following items are displayed: target XSB

XSB number at the move destination

deleted mem

Size of memory which was already deleted (MB)

remaining mem Size of remaining memory to be deleted (MB) I/O devices:

Privileges

device

Instance name of I/O device

resource

Managed resource name

usage

Description of the instance using resources

query

Results of an off-line inquiry about resources

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, fieldeng Can run this command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can run this command only for your accessible domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

318

The following options are supported. -d domain_id

Specifies the ID of the domain for which information is to be displayed. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-p byboard

Displays results organized by XSB. The results can be further summarized by device and displayed. If the -p option is omitted, "-p bydevice" is used.

-p bydevice

Displays results organized by device type (CPU, memory, I/O, etc.). If the -p option is omitted, "-p bydevice" is used.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdevices(8)

OPERANDS

-p force

Predicts system resources deleted from the Solaris OS when an XSB is forcibly disconnected by "deleteboard -f" command. If the -p option is omitted, "-p bydevice" is used.

-p query

Predicts system resources deleted from the Solaris OS when an XSB is disconnected by deleteboard command. If the -p option is omitted, "-p bydevice" is used.

-v

Displays information on all I/O devices, including those that are not management targets. As information on the I/O devices that are not management targets, however, only physical configurations are displayed, and resources and use states are not displayed.

The following operand is supported: xsb

Specifies the XSB number for which information is to be displayed. The following xsb form is accepted: x–y where:

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

x

An integer from 00–15.

y

An integer from 0–3.

Displays the information of the physical devices configured on the XSB#00-0 and their available resources.

XSCF> showdevices 00-0

CPU: ---DID XSB

id

state

speed

ecache

00

00-0 40

on-line

2048

4

00

00-0 41

on-line

2048

4

00

00-0 42

on-line

2048

4

00

00-0 43

on-line

2048

4

Memory: ------board

perm

base

domain target deleted remaining

System Administration

319

showdevices(8)

DID XSB

mem MB

mem MB

address

mem MB

00 00-0

2048

00

00-1

2048

0

0x0000038000000000

00

00-2

2048

0

00

00-3

2048

00

01-0

00

02-0

1290 0x000003c000000000

XSB

2048 03-0

mem MB

mem MB

250

1500

2048

0

0

0x0000034000000000

2048

0

0

0

0x0000030000000000

2048

0

0

2048

0

0x000002c000000000

2048

1024

0

2048

0

0x0000028000000000

2048

0

0

IO Devices: ---------DID XSB

device

resource

usage

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s0

mounted filesystem "/"

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1

dump device (swap)

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1

swap area

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s3

mounted filesystem "/var"

00

00-0

sd3

/var/run

EXAMPLE 2

mounted filesystem "/var/run"

Displays detail information of the physical devices and their available resources in domain ID 0.

XSCF> showdevices -v -d 0

CPU: ---DID XSB

320

id

state

speed

ecache

00

00-0 40

on-line

2048

4

00

00-0 41

on-line

2048

4

00

00-0 42

on-line

2048

4

00

00-0 43

on-line

2048

4

00

01-0 50

on-line

2048

4

00

01-0 51

on-line

2048

4

00

01-0 52

on-line

2048

4

00

01-0 53

on-line

2048

4

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdevices(8)

Memory: ------board

perm

DID XSB

mem MB

00 00-0

2048

00

01-0

base

mem MB

domain target deleted remaining

address

1290 0x000003c000000000

2048

0

0x000002c000000000

mem MB

XSB

mem MB

mem MB

4096 00-1

250

1500

4096

IO Devices: ----------

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

DID XSB

device

resource

usage

00

00-0

sd0

00

00-0

sd1

00

00-0

sd2

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s0

mounted filesystem "/"

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1

dump device (swap)

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3s0s1

swap area

00

00-0

sd3

/dev/dsk/c0t3d0s3

mounted filesystem "/var"

00

00-0

sd3

00

00-0

sd4

00

00-0

sd5

00

00-0

sd6

/var/run

mounted filesystem "/var/run"

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8), showdcl(8), showfru(8)

System Administration

321

showdevices(8)

322

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdomainmode(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showdomainmode - display the modes of operation for the specified domain showdomainmode -d domain_id showdomainmode -h

DESCRIPTION

showdomainmode(8) command displays the modes of operation that is set for the specified domain. The following states are displayed: HOST-ID

Displays the host ID.

Diagnostic Level

Displays the OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level. One of the following is displayed:

Secure Mode

Autoboot

CPU Mode

none

None

min

Standard

max

Maximum

Displays the states of the host watchdog function and function that suppresses break signal reception. One of the following is displayed: on

Enabled

off

Disabled

Displays the state of the auto boot function. One of the following is displayed: on

Enabled

off

Disabled

Way of determining the CPU operational mode mounted on the domain. One of the following is displayed. auto Automatically determines at domain startup compatible Sets to the SPARC64 VI compatible mode regardless of the CPUs mounted

System Administration

323

showdomainmode(8) Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, fieldeng

Can run this command for all domains.

domainadm

Can run this command only for your managed domains.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

The following operands are supported: -d domain_id

Specifies the domain ID of the domain to be displayed. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs. If the Mode switch of the operator panel is set to Service, the settings of the modes of operation for the specified domain have the following values, regardless of the domain mode displayed by the showdomainmode(8) command:





OpenBoot PROM diagnostic level (Diagnostic Level), CPU operational mode (CPU Mode): operates as the showdomainmode(8) command display



Host watchdog and suppress break signal reception (Secure Mode), auto boot function (Autoboot): off



When the OpenBoot PROM environmental variable 'auto-boot?' has been set to false, the auto boot function is disabled.



The setdomainmode(8) command sets the modes of operation specified for a domain.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the modes of operation that is set for domain ID 0.

XSCF> showdomainmode -d 0 Host-ID :0f010f10 Diagnostic Level :min

EXIT STATUS

324

Secure Mode

:on

Autoboot

:on

CPU Mode

:auto

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdomainmode(8)

SEE ALSO

setdomainmode(8)

System Administration

325

showdomainmode(8)

326

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdomainstatus(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showdomainstatus - display the current domain component list (DCL) showdomainstatus -d domain_id showdomainstatus -a showdomainstatus -h

DESCRIPTION

The showdomainstatus(8) command displays the current status of the specified domain. One of the following states is displayed for each domain. Additional information may be displayed. Powered Off Power is off. Panic State A panic occurred, and the domain is in the reboot state. Shutdown Started The power-off process is starting. Initialization Phase OpenBoot PROM initialization is in progress. OpenBoot Execution Completed The system is in the OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state. Booting/OpenBoot PROM prompt The Solaris OS is booting. Or due to the domain shutdown or reboot, the system is in the OpenBoot PROM running state or is suspended in the OpenBoot PROM (ok prompt) state. Running The Solaris OS is running. Domain is not defined.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng

System Administration

327

showdomainstatus(8)

Can run this command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can run this command only for your accessible domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

EXAMPLES

The following options are supported. -a

Displays status information on all domains that can be accessed.

-d domain_id

Specifies only one ID of the domain to be displayed. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays status information on all domains.

XSCF> showdomainstatus -a

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

328

DID

Domain Status

00

Running

01

Running (Waiting for OS Shutdown)

02

Powered Off

03

Panic State

04

Shutdown Started

05

Booting/OpenBoot PROM prompt

06

Initialization Phase

07

OpenBoot Execution Completed

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

poweroff(8), poweron(8), reset(8), showdcl(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showdscp(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showdscp - display the IP addresses assigned to the Domain to Service Processor Communications Protocol (DSCP) showdscp showdscp [-v] [-p] showdscp [-v] [-p] -d

domain_id

showdscp [-v] [-p] -s showdscp -h DESCRIPTION

showdscp(8) displays the IP addresses assigned for DSCP usage, the IP addresses for an individual domain, the Service Processor, or for the entire system. When used without options, it displays current IP data. When displaying IP addresses for all DSCP links in the system, the output is a table. The table is sorted by numerical domain IDs. When displaying IP addresses for a particular domain or just the Service Processor, then the output is not a table but simply the IP address of the specified domain or Service Processor. The -p option can be used to generate parsable output that would then be suitable for use in a script. Parsable displays of individual IP addresses exclude any additional labels, and only an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal form is output. The parsable version of tabular output includes only the values (no table headings are included), and each column is separated by a single tab character.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: fieldeng, platadm, platop: Can display any DSCP IP information. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop: Can display individual IP addresses for domains for which you have privileges only. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

329

showdscp(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Displays an individual domain’s IP address.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

EXAMPLES

-p

Generates parsable output.

-s

Displays the Service Processor’s IP address.

-v

Specifies verbose output. Prints additional information about internal progress of the program’s operations to the screen.

Caution – The IP addresses shown in the following examples are examples only. Displaying a Table of All DSCP IP Addresses

EXAMPLE 1

XSCF>

showdscp

DSCP Configuration

Network: 10.1.1.0 Netmask: 255.255.255.0

330

Location

Address

----------

---------

XSCF

10.1.1.1

Domain #00

10.1.1.2

Domain #01

10.1.1.3

Domain #02

10.1.1.4

Domain #03

10.1.1.5

Domain #04

10.1.1.6

Domain #05

10.1.1.7

Domain #06

10.1.1.8

Domain #07

10.1.1.9

Domain #08

10.1.1.10

Domain #09

10.1.1.11

Domain #10

10.1.1.12

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised April 2008

showdscp(8)

Domain #11

10.1.1.13

Domain #12

10.1.1.14

Domain #13

10.1.1.15

Domain #14

10.1.1.16

Domain #15

10.1.1.17

Domain #16

10.1.1.18

Domain #17

10.1.1.19

Domain #18

10.1.1.20

Domain #19

10.1.1.21

Domain #20

10.1.1.22

Domain #21

10.1.1.23

Domain #22

10.1.1.24

Domain #23

10.1.1.25

Displaying a Specific Domain’s IP Address

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF>

showdscp -d 1

Domain #01 Address: 10.1.1.3

Displaying a Specific Domain’s IP Address in a Parsable Form

EXAMPLE 3

XSCF>

showdscp -p -d 1

Domain[1] 10.1.1.3

Displaying All DSCP Address Information In a Parsable Form

EXAMPLE 4

XSCF>

showdscp -p

Network 10.1.1.0 Netmask 255.255.255.0 XSCF

10.1.1.1

Domain[0]

10.1.1.2

Domain[1]

10.1.1.3

Domain[2]

10.1.1.4

Domain[3]

10.1.1.5

Domain[4]

10.1.1.6

Domain[5]

10.1.1.7

System Administration

331

showdscp(8)

Domain[6]

10.1.1.8

Domain[7]

10.1.1.9

Domain[8]

10.1.1.10

Domain[9]

10.1.1.11

...

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

332

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setdscp(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised April 2008

showdualpowerfeed(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showdualpowerfeed - display the current setting of dual power feed mode showdualpowerfeed showdualpowerfeed -h

DESCRIPTION

The showdualpowerfeed(8) command displays the current setting of dual power feed mode in the system. The showdualpowerfeed(8) command is valid in the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers only. The dual power feed mode can be set by the setdualpowerfeed(8) command. Also, before the dual power feed mode is changed by the setdualpowerfeed(8) command, the values of changed settings are displayed.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays usage statement. Displays the current setting of dual power feed mode in the system.

XSCF> showdualpowerfeed Dual power feed is enabled.

EXAMPLE 2

Changes the dual power feed mode with the setdualpowerfeed(8) command and then displays the current state.

XSCF> showdualpowerfeed enable -> disable NOTE: Dual power feed will be disabled the next time the platform is powered on.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setdualpowerfeed(8)

System Administration

333

showdualpowerfeed(8)

334

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showemailreport(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showemailreport - display the email report configuration data showemailreport [-v ] showemailreport -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showemailreport(8) displays the email reporting configuration data. When used without options, it displays current email report configuration data. You must have platadm, platop or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-v EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

Specifies verbose output.

Emailreport information includes whether Emailreporting is enabled. If enabled, it also includes the list of addresses. EXAMPLE 1

XSCF>

Displaying Emailreport configuration showemailreport

EMail Reporting: enabled Email Recipient Address: [email protected], [email protected]

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setemailreport(8)

System Administration

335

showemailreport(8)

336

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007

showenvironment(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showenvironment - display the intake air temperature and humidity, temperature sensor information, voltage sensor information, and fan speed information about the system showenvironment [-M] [ type] showenvironment -h

DESCRIPTION

showenvironment(8) command displays the information listed below. The following types of the information are displayed: Environment information

Intake temperature and humidity of the system

Temperature information

Intake temperature of the system and exhaust temperature of each component

Humidity can be checked in the M8000/M9000 servers.

You can check the exhaust temperature of the following components.

Privileges

M3000 server

motherboard unit(MBU_A), CPU

M4000/M5000 servers

CPU module(CPUM), I/O unit(IOU)

M8000/M9000 servers

CPU/memory board unit(CMU), CPU module(CPUM), crossbar unit(XBU_B)

Voltage information

Voltage sensor value

Fan speed information

Fan rotational state and revolutions per unit of time

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

System Administration

337

showenvironment(8)

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: type

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Specifies the one of the type of information to be displayed. The following types can be specified. If this type setting is omitted, intake temperature and humidity information about the system is displayed: temp

Displays temperature information.

volt

Displays voltage information.

Fan

Displays fan speed information.

Displays the intake temperature and humidity of the system on the M8000/ M9000 servers.

XSCF> showenvironment Temperature:30.71C Humidity:90.05%

EXAMPLE 2

Displays temperature information about the system and each component on the M8000 server.

XSCF> showenvironment temp Temperature:30.71C CMU#0:30.71C CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C CMU#1:30.71C CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C CMU#2:30.71C CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C

338

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showenvironment(8)

CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C CMU#3:30.71C CPUM#0-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#1-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#2-CHIP#0:30.71C CPUM#3-CHIP#0:30.71C

EXAMPLE 3

Displays voltage information about each component on the M4000 server.

XSCF> showenvironment volt MBU_A 1.0V Power Supply Group:1.010V 1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V CPUM#0-CHIP#0 1.0V Power Supply Group:1.000V CPUM#1-CHIP#0 1.0V Power Supply Group:1.000V MEMB#0 1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V 1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V 2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V MEMB#1 1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V 1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V 2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V MEMB#2 1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V 1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V 2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V MEMB#3 1.2V Power Supply Group:1.200V 1.8V Power Supply Group:1.700V 2.5V Power Supply Group:2.500V IOU#0

System Administration

339

showenvironment(8)

1.0V Power Supply Group:1.020V 1.2V Power Supply Group:1.180V 1.5V Power Supply Group:1.500V 1.8V Power Supply Group:1.850V 2.5V Power Supply Group:2.510V 3.3V Power Supply Group:3.300V 5.0V Power Supply Group:5.000V 12V Power Supply Group:12.000V -12V Power Supply Group:-12.000V FANBP 3.3V Power Supply Group:3.300V 5.0V Power Supply Group:5.010V 12V Power Supply Group:12.020V -12V Power Supply Group:-12.030V

EXAMPLE 4

Displays the fan speed information on the M5000 server.

XSCF> showenvironment Fan FAN_A#0:Low speed FAN_A#0:

4101rpm

FAN_A#1:Low speed FAN_A#1:

4101rpm

FAN_A#2:Low speed FAN_A#2:

4177rpm

FAN_A#3:Low speed FAN_A#3:

4101rpm

PSU#0 PSU#0:Low speed PSU#0:

3879rpm

PSU#0:

3835rpm

PSU#1 PSU#1:Low speed

340

PSU#1:

3924rpm

PSU#1:

3970rpm

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showenvironment(8)

PSU#2 PSU#2:Low speed PSU#2:

4218rpm

PSU#2:

4066rpm

PSU#3 PSU#3:Low speed

EXAMPLE 5

PSU#3:

3835rpm

PSU#3:

3970rpm

Displays the fan speed information on the M3000 server.

XSCF> showenvironment Fan FAN_A#0:Low speed (level-4) FAN_A#0:

4134rpm

FAN_A#1:Low speed (level-4) FAN_A#1:

4212rpm

PSU#0 PSU#0:Low speed (level-4) PSU#0:

6436rpm

PSU#1 PSU#1:Low speed (level-4) PSU#1:

EXIT STATUS

6352rpm

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

341

showenvironment(8)

342

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showfru(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showfru - display the hardware settings of specified device showfru device location showfru -a device showfru -h

DESCRIPTION

The showfru(8) command displays the hardware settings of specified device by the setupfru(8) command. The command can display the settings of the specified device or of all devices. Only the physical system board (PSB) can be specified as a device. The following settings are displayed: Device

Specified device name. Only sb is displayed.

Location

Device location. If the device is "sb", the indicated location is an integer ranging from 00 to 15.

XSB Mode

XSB mode set for the PSB. One of the following values is displayed: Uni

Uni-XSB

Quad

Quad-XSB

Memory Mirror Memory mirror mode set for the PSB. One of the following Mode values is displayed:

Privileges

yes

Memory mirror mode

no

Memory no-mirror mode

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -a

Displays the settings of all devices.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

System Administration

343

showfru(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: device

Specifies the device to display. Currently, only the following device can be specified: Physical system board (PSB)

sb location

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

Specifies the location of device. If the device is "sb", an integer ranging from 00 to 15 can be specified.

The setupfru(8) command makes hardware settings for a device.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the settings of all PSBs.

XSCF> showfru -a sb

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

344

Device

Location

XSB Mode

Memory Mirror Mode

sb

00

Quad

no

sb

01

Uni

yes

sb

02

Quad

no

sb

03

Uni

no

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addboard(8), deleteboard(8), moveboard(8), setdcl(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8), showdcl(8), showdevices(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

showhardconf(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showhardconf - display information about field replaceable unit (FRU) installed in the system showhardconf [-u] [-M] showhardconf -h

DESCRIPTION

showhardconf(8) command displays information about each FRU. The following information is displayed:

Privileges



Current configuration and status



Number of installed FRUs



Domain information



External I/O Expansion Unit information



Name properties of PCI cards

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng Can run this command for all domains. domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Can run this command only for your accessible domains. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported:. -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-u

Displays the number of FRUs installed in each unit. For CPU modules, operating frequencies are displayed. For memory units, the capacity of each memory unit is displayed. If this option is omitted, the current configuration and status information regarding FRUs and domain information are displayed.

System Administration

345

showhardconf(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

When the configuration and status information regarding FRUs and domain information are displayed, for any failed or degraded unit, an asterisk (*) indicating an abnormal unit is displayed along with any of the following states: Status

Description

Faulted

The component is faulty and is not operating

Degraded

The component is operating. However, either an error has been detected or the component is faulty. As a result, the component might be operating with reduced functionality or performance.

Deconfigured

As a result of another component's faulted or degraded status, the component is not operating. (The component itself is not faulted or degraded.)

Maintenance

The component is under maintenance. A deletefru(8), replacefru(8), or addfru(8) operation is currently underway

Normal

It is operating normally.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the information of the FRUs in the M5000 server.

XSCF> showhardconf SPARC Enterprise M5000; + Serial:BE80601021; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service; + Power_Supply_System:Single; SCF-ID:XSCF#0; + System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On; Domain#0 Domain_Status:Powered Off;

MBU_B Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000297

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B50X A2

;

+ Memory_Size:64 GB; CPUM#0-CHIP#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L068

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0

;

+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16; + Core:2; Strand:2; CPUM#0-CHIP#1 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L068 + FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0 + Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16; + Core:2; Strand:2;

346

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

; ;

showhardconf(8)

: CPUM#3-CHIP#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L066

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0

;

+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16; + Core:2; Strand:2; CPUM#3-CHIP#1 Status:Normal; Ver:0201h; Serial:PP0629L066

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06761-D104 A0

;

+ Freq:2.150 GHz; Type:16; + Core:2; Strand:2; MEMB#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:01068

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B54X A1

;

MEM#0A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123520;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#0B Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123e25;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#1A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123722;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#1B Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123b25;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#2A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123e20;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#2B Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123822;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#3A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123724;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#3B Status:Normal;

System Administration

347

showhardconf(8)

+ Code:c1000000000000004572T128000HR3.7A

252b-04123b20;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; : MEMB#7 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:01100

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B54X A1

;

MEM#0A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d016910;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#0B Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d016911;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#1A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d016a14;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#1B Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d017e22;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#2A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d016a13;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#2B Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d016417;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#3A Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d017617;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; MEM#3B Status:Normal; + Code:c1000000000000005372T128000HR3.7A

356d-0d016b12;

+ Type:1B; Size:1 GB; DDC_A#0 Status:Normal; DDC_A#1 Status:Normal; DDC_A#2 Status:Normal; DDC_A#3 Status:Normal;

348

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showhardconf(8)

DDC_B#0 Status:Normal; DDC_B#1 Status:Normal; IOU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000395

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0483 0040 /541-0483-00-40

;

DDC_A#0 Status:Normal; DDCR Status:Normal; DDC_B#0 Status:Normal; PCI#2 Status:Normal; Name_Property:; Card_Type:DownLink; + Ver:21h; Serial:XF01NW; Type:Optic; + Connection:IOX@X0DF/IOB0; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04 *

/501-7040-04;

IOX@X0DF Status:Faulted; Serial:XCX0DF; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0314 05

/501-6937-05;

IOB0 Status:Normal; Serial:XX00KA; Type:PCI-X; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0316 03

/501-6938-05;

LINK Status:Normal; Ver:21h; Serial:1F0090; Type:Optic; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04

/501-7040-04;

PS0 Status:Normal; Serial:LL0807; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02

/300-2001-02;

PS1 Status:Normal; Serial:LL0381; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02

/300-2001-02;

PCI#4 Status:Normal; Name_Property:; Card_Type:DownLink; + Ver:17h; Serial:XF01LM; Type:Optic; + Connection:IOX@X07P/IOB1; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04 *

/501-7040-04;

IOX@X07P Status:Faulted; Serial:XCX07P; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0314 05

/501-6937-03;

IOB1 Status:Normal; Serial:XE00F9; Type:PCI-Express; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00541-0507 03

/501-6939-05;

LINK Status:Normal; Ver:17h; Serial:XF01N0; Type:Optic; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00501-7040 04

/501-7040-04;

PS0 Status:Normal; Serial:LL1097; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02

/300-2001-02;

System Administration

349

showhardconf(8)

PS1 Status:Normal; Serial:LL1121; + FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-2001 02

/300-2001-02;

IOU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:78670000376 ; + FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B55X A4

;

DDC_A#0 Status:Normal; DDCR Status:Normal; DDC_B#0 Status:Normal; XSCFU Status:Normal,Active; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000262 + FRU-Part-Number:CA20393-B56X A0

;

OPNL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000087

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA00629-D061 A0 PSU#0 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-ASTECB10

;

; ;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02; + Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V; PSU#1 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-ASTECB18

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02; + Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V; PSU#2 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-DELTAB19

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02; + Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V; PSU#3 Status:Normal; Serial:0000000-ASTECB09

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CF00300-1898 0002 /300-1898-00-02; + Power_Status:Off; AC:200 V; FANBP_C Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:7867000053

;

+ FRU-Part-Number:CA06629-D051 001AA FAN_A#0 Status:Normal; FAN_A#1 Status:Normal; FAN_A#2 Status:Normal; FAN_A#3 Status:Normal;

350

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

;

showhardconf(8) Displays the number of installed FRUs in the M9000 server.

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF> showhardconf -u SPARC Enterprise M9000; Memory_Size:432 GB; +-----------------------------------+------------+ |

FRU

|

Quantity

|

+-----------------------------------+------------+ | CMU |

CPUM

|

9

|

|

36

|

|

Freq:2.277 GHz;

|

(

30)

|

|

Freq:2.376 GHz;

|

(

6)

|

|

MEM

|

224

|

|

Type:1B; Size:1 GB;

|

(

16)

|

|

Type:2B; Size:2 GB;

|

( 208)

|

| IOU

|

9

|

| IOBOX

|

1

|

|

IOB

|

2

|

|

PSU

|

2

|

| XSCFU_B

|

2

|

| XSCFU_C

|

2

|

| XBU_B

|

16

|

| CLKU_B

|

4

|

| OPNL

|

1

|

| PSU

|

30

|

| FANBP_A

|

2

|

| FANBP_B

|

2

|

|

|

32

|

| SWBP

|

2

|

| MEDBP

|

2

|

FAN_A

+-----------------------------------+------------+

System Administration

351

showhardconf(8) Displays the number of installed FRUs in the M3000 server.

EXAMPLE 3

XSCF> showhardconf -u SPARC Enterprise M3000; Memory_Size:8 GB; +-----------------------------------+------------+ |

FRU

|

Quantity

|

+-----------------------------------+------------+ | MBU_A

|

|

| |

CPU

| |

Freq:2.520 GHz; MEM

|

1

|

(

1)

|

(

1)

|

8

|

8)

|

| Type:1A; Size:1 GB;

|

(

| OPNL

|

1

|

| PSU

|

2

|

| FANBP_B

|

1

|

|

|

2

|

FAN_A

+-----------------------------------+------------+

EXIT STATUS

352

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showhostname(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showhostname - display the current host name for the XSCF unit showhostname {-a | xscfu} showhostname -h

DESCRIPTION

showhostname(8) command displays the current host name for the XSCF unit. The host name is displayed in Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) format.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

OPERANDS

The following options are supported: -a

Displays the current host names for all XSCF units. If an XSCF unit name is specified with the -a option, the XSCF unit name is ignored.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

The following operand is supported: xscfu

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

Specifies the XSCF unit name to be displayed. One of the following values can be specified. If xscfu is specified with the -a option, xscfu is ignored. xscf#0

XSCF unit 0

xscf#1

XSCF unit 1 (In the M8000/M9000 servers)



In the M8000/M9000 servers, a defect occurred on standby XSCF unit shows a message.



The sethostname(8) command sets a host name for an XSCF unit.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the current host names for all XSCF units.

XSCF> showhostname -a xscf#0: scf0-hostname.example.com xscf#1: scf1-hostname.example.com

System Administration

353

showhostname(8) EXAMPLE 2

Displays the host name for XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> showhostname xscf#0 xscf#0: scf0-hostname.example.com

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

354

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

sethostname(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showhttps(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showhttps - display the status of the HTTPS service set for the XSCF network showhttps showhttps -h

DESCRIPTION

The showhttps(8) command displays the status of the HTTPS service currently set for the XSCF network. With this command, whether the HTTPS service is operating and the installation status of the information that is necessary for authentication can be checked. If it is installed, the installation date is also displayed. The following states are displayed:

Privileges

HTTPS Status

Indicates whether the HTTPS service is operating

Server key

Indicates whether the private key of the web server has been installed

CA key

Indicates whether the private key of the certification authority has been installed

CA cert

Indicates whether the certificate of the certification authority has been installed

CSR

The certificate of the web server

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -h

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

Displays usage statement.

The sethttps(8) command make settings for the HTTPS service in the XSCF network. EXAMPLE 1

Displays the status of the HTTPS service.

XSCF> showhttps HTTPS status: enabled Server key: installed in Apr 24 12:34:56 JST 2006 CA key: installed in Apr 24 12:00:34 JST 200

System Administration

355

showhttps(8)

CA cert: installed in Apr 24 12:00:34 JST 200 CSR: -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----MIIBwjCCASsCAQAwgYExCzAJBgNVBAYTAmpqMQ4wDAYDVQQIEwVzdGF0ZTERMA8G A1UEBxMIbG9jYWxpdHkxFTATBgNVBAoTDG9yZ2FuaXphdGlvbjEPMA0GA1UECxMG b3JnYW5pMQ8wDQYDVQQDEwZjb21tb24xFjAUBgkqhkiG9w0BCQEWB2VlLm1haWww gZ8wDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEBBQADgY0AMIGJAoGBAJ5D57X/k42LcipTWBWzv2GrxaVM 5GEyx3bdBW8/7WZhnd3uiZ9+ANlvRAuw/YYy7I/pAD+NQJesBcBjuyj9x+IiJl9F MrI5fR8pOIywVOdbMPCar09rrU45bVeZhTyi+uQOdWLoX/Dhq0fm2BpYuh9WukT5 pTEg+2dABg8UdHmNAgMBAAGgADANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQQFAAOBgQAux1jH3dyB6Xho PgBuVIakDzIKEPipK9qQfC57YI43uRBGRubu0AHEcLVue5yTu6G5SxHTCq07tV5g 38UHSg5Kqy9QuWHWMri/hxm0kQ4gBpApjNb6F/B+ngBE3j/thGbEuvJb+0wbycvu 5jrhB/ZV9k8X/MbDOxSx/U5nF+Zuyw== -----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

356

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

sethttps(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showldap(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showldap - display the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) configuration for the Service Processor showldap showldap [-c ] showldap -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showldap(8) displays the Service Processor LDAP configuration. When invoked without options, showldap displays all LDAP configuration except for the certificate chain and the password used when binding to the LDAP server. You must have useradm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c

Displays the LDAP server certification chain.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying All LDAP Configuration Data

XSCF> showldap Bind Name: user Base Distinguishing Name: ou=people,dc=company,dc=com LDAP Search Timeout: 60 Bind password: Set LDAP Servers: ldap://company.com:389 CERTS: None

EXAMPLE 2

Displaying All LDAP Configuration Data

XSCF> showldap -c There are no certificates configured.

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred. System Administration

357

showldap(8)

SEE ALSO

358

setldap(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised June 2007

showlocale(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showlocale - display the current setting for the XSCF locale showlocale showlocale -h

DESCRIPTION

The showlocale(8) command displays the current setting for the XSCF locale. Either of the following is displayed:

Privileges

C

English

ja_JP.UTF-8

Japanese

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The setlocale(8) command sets a locale for the XSCF.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the current setting for the XSCF locale (when English is set).

XSCF> showlocale C

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the current setting for the XSCF locale (when Japanese is set).

XSCF> showlocale ja_JP.UTF-8

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setlocale(8)

System Administration

359

showlocale(8)

360

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised March 2008

showlocator(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showlocator - display the state of the CHECK LED on the operator panel showlocator showlocator -h

DESCRIPTION

showlocator(8) command displays the blink state of the CHECK LED on the operator panel. The one of the following state is displayed:

Privileges

Off

Indicates normal operation, which means either the circuit breaker is off or power is not being supplied.

Blinking

Indicates that the unit is a maintenance target.

On

Indicates that an error was detected in the main unit.

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The setlocator(8) command can be used to specify the blink state of the CHECK LED. EXAMPLE 1

Displays the CHECK LED state.

XSCF> showlocator Locator LED status:Blinking

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setlocator(8)

System Administration

361

showlocator(8)

362

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showlogs(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showlogs - display the specified log showlogs [-t time [-T time] | -p timestamp] [-v | -V | -S] [-r] [-M] error showlogs [-t time [-T time] | -p timestamp] [-v] [-r] [-M] event showlogs [-t time [-T time]] [-r] [-M] {power | env} showlogs [-r] [-M] monitor showlogs -d domain_id [-t time [-T time]] [-r] [-M] {console | ipl | panic} showlogs -h

DESCRIPTION

The showlogs(8) command displays the specified log. Log data is displayed in the order of timestamps, starting from the oldest data by default. Depending on the target for the log collection, the following logs can be specified: For Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)

For domain

Privileges



Error log (sometimes includes scan log)



Power log



Event log



Temperature and humidity record



Monitoring message log



Console message log



Panic message log



IPL message log

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: ■

Error log, Event log, Temperature and humidity record, and Monitor message log: platadm, platop, fieldeng



Power log: platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, fieldeng



Scan log: fieldeng



Console message log, Panic message log, and IPL message log: platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

363

showlogs(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -d domain_id

Specifies the ID of a domain to be displayed. This option can be specified for domain specific log. domain_id can be 0–23 depending on the system configuration.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-p timestamp

Specifies a timestamp in a log when one log is to be displayed. This option can be specified for an error log or event log. timestamp is specified in one of the following formats: yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm:ss The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day, hour:minute:second’ format. mm/dd/yy,hh:mm:ss The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year, hour:minute:second’ format. Monddhh:mm:ssyyyy The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day, hour:minute:second, year’ format.

364

-r

Displays a log in the order of timestamps, starting from the latest timestamp. By default, the display of log data in the order of timestamps starts from the oldest data.

-S

Displays a scan log attached to an error log. Only a user having the fieldeng privilege can specify this operand. This cannot be specified together with the-v option or -V option.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlogs(8)

-t time

Specifies the start date and time of the display range for log data. It is specified in one of the following formats: yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day, hour:minute’ format. mm/dd/yy,hh:mm The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year, hour:minute’ format. Monddhh:mmyyyy The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day, hour:minute, year’ format. yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm:ss The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day, hour:minute:second’ format. mm/dd/yy,hh:mm:ss The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year, hour:minute:second’ format. Monddhh:mm:ssyyyy The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day, hour:minute:second, year’ format. Even if the -r option is specified together with this option, the specified -t and -T options are not reversed. The -t option cannot be used for the monitoring message log.

System Administration

365

showlogs(8)

-T time

Specifies the end date and time of the display range for log data. It is specified in one of the following formats: yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day, hour:minute’ format. mm/dd/yy,hh:mm The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year, hour:minute’ format. Monddhh:mmyyyy The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day, hour:minute, year’ format. yyyy-mm-dd,hh:mm:ss The timestamp is specified in the ’year-month-day, hour:minute:second’ format. mm/dd/yy,hh:mm:ss The timestamp is specified in the ’month/day/year, hour:minute:second’ format. Monddhh:mm:ssyyyy The timestamp is specified in the ’month-name, day, hour:minute:second, year’ format. Even if the -r option is specified together with this option, the specified -t and -T options are not reversed. The -T option cannot be used for the monitoring message log.

366

-v

Displays a log in detail. Details of Diagnostic Codes UUID and MSG-ID, which are used by the fmadm(8) and fmdump(8) commands, are also displayed in addition to the items normally displayed. This option cannot be specified together with the -S or -V option. This option can be specified for an error log or event log.

-V

Displays a log in greater detail. If detailed log information on machine administration and OBP console log information have already been collected, they are also displayed in addition to the information displayed by the -v option. This option cannot be specified together with the -S or the -v option. This option can be specified for an error log.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlogs(8)

OPERANDS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

The following operands are supported: error

Displays the error log. (sometimes includes scan log)

power

Displays the power log.

event

Displays the event log.

env

Displays the temperature and humidity record.

monitor

Displays the monitoring message log.

console

Displays the console message log.

panic

Displays the panic message log.

ipl

Displays the IPL message log.

Logs are displayed in the following formats: ■

Error log Default Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Status: Alarm

Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxOccurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,* Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)

Case where the -v option is specified Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005 Status: Alarm

Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,* Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1) Diagnostic Code: xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID:FMD-8000-11

System Administration

367

showlogs(8)

Case where the -V option is specified Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005 Status: Alarm

Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,* Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1) Diagnostic Code: xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID:FMD-8000-11 Diagnostic Messages: : :

Case where the -S option is specified Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005 Status: Alarm

Code: xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,* Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1) Diagnostic Code: xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID:FMD-8000-11 Detail log: SCAN MINOR RC 2K 0000: xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx 0010: xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx : :

368

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlogs(8)

Date:

Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) The displayed time is the local time.

Code:

Error code Data is displayed in 16-byte format.

Occurred:

Date (Month Day Hour: Minute: Second TimeZone Year) when an error occurred. This date is displayed as the local time.

Status:

Error status Either of the following is displayed:

FRU:

Warning

Partial degradation of the unit or warning about the FRU

Alarm

FRU failure or error

Suspected faulty unit The suspected faulty units that are displayed and delimited by a "," (comma) are the units most likely and second most likely to be faulty. If there are three suspected faulty units, an "*" is displayed next to the unit third most likely to be faulty. Display of more than two suspected faulty units depends on whether more than two suspected faulty units are detected.

Msg:

Error description

Diagnostic Code:

Detailed error code

UUID:

Abbreviation for Universal Unique Identifier

The displayed code is a hexadecimal number.

This is a globally unique ID that is a 32-digit hexadecimal number. MSG-ID:

Unique message ID

Diagnostic Messages:

Detailed message

Detail log:

Scan log code

If the log has a detailed message, it is displayed.

This code is displayed when the log includes a scan log. Address: Displayed in hexadecimal notation.

System Administration

369

showlogs(8) ■

Power log Date

Event

Cause

DID

Mar 30 17:25:31 JST 2005

System Power Off

Power Failure

Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005

System Power On

AC Restored

--

Locked

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

Domain Power On

Panel

00

Locked

Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005

Domain Power Off

Operator

--

Switch

10

Service

Service

: :

Date:

Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) The displayed time is the local time.

Event:

Power status One of the following states is displayed:

370

Domain Power On

The domain power is on.

Domain Power Off

The domain power is off.

System Power On

The system power is on.

System Power Off

The system power is off.

SCF Reset

XSCF is in the reset state.

Domain Reset

The domain is in the reset state.

XIR

The domain CPU is in the reset state.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlogs(8)

Factor that caused this Status

Cause:

One of the following factors is displayed: Self Reset, Power On, System Reset, Panel, Scheduled, RCI, AC Restored, Operator, Poweron Restart, Power Failure, SW Request, Alarm, Fatal, Panic Domain ID

DID:

domain_id can be 00–23 depending on the system configuration. Status of the mode switch of the operator panel

Switch:

One of the following states are displayed:



Locked

Normal operation mode

Service

Service mode

Event log Default Date

Message

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

System power on

Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005

System power off

: :

Case where the -v option is specified Date

Message

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

System power on

Switch= Service Code=xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

System Administration

371

showlogs(8)

Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year)

Date:

The displayed time is the local time. Message:

Event message

Switch:

Status of the mode switch of the operator panel One of the following states are displayed: Locked

Normal operation mode

Service

Service mode

Detailed event information

Code:

The displayed information is in hexadecimal format ■

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY RECORD Date

Temperature

Humidity

Power

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

32.56(C)

60.20%

System Power On

Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005

32.56(C)

60.25%

System Power Off

: :

Date:

Log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) The displayed time is the local time.

Temperature:

Intake air temperature Decimal numbers are displayed to two decimal places. The unit is degree Celsius ( C).

Humidity:

Humidity The displayed numbers are percentages (%). Humidity is displayed on the M8000/M9000 servers only.

Power:

Power state of the main unit Either of the following states is displayed:

372

System Power ON

The main unit power is on.

System Power OFF

The main unit power is off.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlogs(8) ■

Monitoring message log Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

monitor message

Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005

monitor message

:

Each line of display has a date and time paired with a monitoring message. The time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time. ■

Console message log DomainID: 00 Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

console message

Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005

console message

:

[First line] DomainID:

Domain ID domain_id can be 00–23 depending on the system configuration.

[Second and subsequent lines] Each line of display has a date and time paired with a console message. The time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time. ■

Panic message log <<panic>> Date: Mar 30 18:45:31 JST 2005

DomainID: 00

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

panic message

Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005

panic message

:

System Administration

373

showlogs(8)

[Second line] Panic occurrence date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year)

Date:

The displayed time is the local time. DomainID:

Domain ID domain_id can be 00–23 depending on the system configuration.

[Third and subsequent lines] Each line of display has a date and time paired with a panic message. The time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time. ■

IPL message log <> Date: Mar 30 18:45:31 JST 2005

DomainID: 00

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

ipl message

Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005

ipl message

:

[Second line] Date:

IPL date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) The displayed time is the local time.

DomainID:

Domain ID domain_id can be 00–23 depending on the system configuration.

[Third and subsequent lines] Each line of display has a date and time paired with an IPL message. The time in the displayed log collection date and time (month day hour:minute:second time-zone year) is the local time.

374

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlogs(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays an error log.

XSCF> showlogs error Date: Mar 30 12:45:31 JST 2005 Status: Alarm

Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0 Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: IOU#0/PCI#3 Msg: offline(vendor=FUJITSU, product=MAJ3182MC) Date: Mar 30 15:45:31 JST 2005 Status: Warning

Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0 Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2 Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1) Date: Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005 Status: Alarm

Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0 Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2,* Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)

EXAMPLE 2

Displays an error log in detail for the times of the specified timestamp (-v).

XSCF> showlogs error -p Mar3012:45:312005 -v Date: Mar 30 12:45:31 JST 2005

Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0

Status: Alarm Component: IOU#0/PCI#3 Msg: offline(vendor=FUJITSU, product=MAJ3182MC) Diagnostic Code: 00112233 44556677 8899aabb 00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff 00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11

EXAMPLE 3

Displays an error log in greater detail for the times of the specified timestamp (-V).

XSCF> showlogs error -p Mar3012:45:312005 -V Date: Mar 30 12:45:31 JST 2005 Status: Alarm

Code: 00112233-44556677-8899aabbcceeff0 Occurred: Mar 30 17:45:31.000 JST 2005

FRU: IOU#0/PCI#3

System Administration

375

showlogs(8)

Msg: offline(vendor=FUJITSU, product=MAJ3182MC) Diagnostic Code: 00112233 44556677 8899aabb 00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff 00112233 44556677 8899aabb ccddeeff UUID: bf36f0ea-9e47-42b5-fc6f-c0d979c4c8f4 MSG-ID: FMD-8000-11 Diagnostic Messages Jul 11 16:17:42 plato10 root: [ID 702911 user.error] WARNING: / pci@83,4000/scsi@2/sd@0,0 (sd47): Jul 11 16:17:42 plato10 root: [ID 702911 user.error] giving up

EXAMPLE 4

incomplete write-

Displays a power log.

XSCF> showlogs power Date

Event

Cause

DID

Mar 30 17:25:31 JST 2005

System Power Off

Power Failure

Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005

System Power On

AC Restored

--

Locked

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

Domain Power Off

Operator

00

Locked

Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005

Domain Power On

EXAMPLE 5

--

Switch

Operator

00

Service

Service

Displays a power log in the order of timestamps, starting from the latest timestamp.

XSCF> showlogs power -r Date

Event

Cause

DID

Switch

Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005

Domain Power On Operator

00

Service

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

Domain Power Off Operator

00

Locked

Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005

System Power On AC Restored

--

Locked

Mar 30 17:25:31 JST 2005

System Power Off Power Failure --

EXAMPLE 6

Service

Displays the specified range of a power log.

XSCF> showlogs power -t Mar3017:302005 -T Mar3017:492005

376

Date

Event

Cause

DID

Switch

Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005

System Power On

AC Restored

--

Locked

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

Domain Power Off

Operator

00

Locked

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlogs(8) EXAMPLE 7

Displays the specified range of a power log. The log is displayed in the order of timestamps, starting from the latest timestamp.

XSCF> showlogs power -t Mar3017:302005 -T Mar3017:492005 -r Date

Event

Cause

DID

Switch

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

Domain Power Off

Operator

00

Locked

Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005

System Power On

AC Restored

--

Locked

EXAMPLE 8

Displays the specified date of a power log. Data with this date or later in the log is displayed.

XSCF> showlogs power -t Mar3017:302005 Date

Event

Cause

DID

Switch

Mar 30 17:35:31 JST 2005

System Power On

AC Restored

--

Locked

Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

Domain Power Off

Panel

00

Locked

Mar 30 17:50:31 JST 2005

Domain Power On

Operator

00

Service

EXAMPLE 9

Displays a console message log of the domain ID 0.

XSCF> showlogs console -d 00 DomainID:00 Mar 30 17:45:31 JST 2005

Executing last command: boot

Mar 30 17:55:31 JST 2005 disk@0,0:a File and args:

Boot device: /pci@83,4000/FJSV,ulsa@2,1/

Mar 30 17:55:32 JST 2005

SunOS Release 5.10 Version Generic 64-bit

Note: The codes or messages shown here may differ from those actually displayed. EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

377

showlogs(8)

378

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showlookup(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showlookup - display the configuration for authentication and privileges lookup showlookup showlookup -h

DESCRIPTION Privileges

showlookup(8) displays configuration settings for authentication and privileges. You must have useradm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying Settings for Authentication and Privileges

XSCF> showlookup Privileges lookup:Local only Authentication lookup: Local and LDAP

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setlookup(8)

System Administration

379

showlookup(8)

380

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showmonitorlog(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showmonitorlog - display the contents of monitoring messages in real time showmonitorlog showmonitorlog -h

DESCRIPTION

The showmonitorlog(8) command displays the contents of monitoring messages in real time. When executed, the showmonitorlog(8) command will not terminate in order to display the monitoring message log, and the XSCF shell is occupied for the display. When a monitoring message is registered, the contents of the message are displayed. To stop the real-time display, press the "Ctrl" and "C" key combination.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the contents of a monitoring message in real time.

XSCF> showmonitorlog Apr 13 12:32:16 XXXXX Alarm: /CMU#1,/CMU#0/DDC#0:ANALYZE:SC-IOU I/F fatal error 0x00000000; : :

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

381

showmonitorlog(8)

382

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

shownameserver(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

shownameserver - display the registered domain name system (DNS) servers specified on the XSCF network shownameserver shownameserver -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

shownameserver(8) command displays the registered DNS servers in the XSCF network. You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The setnameserver(8) command sets the DNS servers used in the XSCF network.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the DNS servers currently set for the XSCF network. The following example shows that three DNS servers have been set:

XSCF> shownameserver nameserver 192.168.1.2 nameserver 10.18.108.10 nameserver 10.24.1.2

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the DNS servers currently set for the XSCF network. The following example shows that no DNS server is set:

XSCF> shownameserver ---

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setnameserver(8) System Administration

383

shownameserver(8)

384

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

shownetwork(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

shownetwork - display information of network interfaces for XSCF shownetwork [-M] {-a | -i | interface} shownetwork -h

DESCRIPTION

shownetwork(8) command displays current information of network interfaces for XSCF. Information on the specified network interface or all the network interfaces can be displayed. The following information is displayed:

Privileges

xscf#x-y

XSCF network interface name

HWaddr

MAC address (hexadecimal notation)

inet addr

IP address

Bcast

Broadcast

Mask

Netmask

UP/DOWN

Whether the network interface is enabled

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Displays information for all XSCF network interfaces.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

System Administration

385

shownetwork(8)

OPERANDS

The following operands are supported: interface

Specifies the network interface whose information is to be displayed. One of the following values can be specified, depending on the system configuration. If this operand is specified with the -a option, the operand is ignored. ■

In the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers:

For XSCF unit 0 : xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

For abbreviation: lan#0

an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#0

lan#1

an abbreviation of XSCF-LAN#1



In the M8000/M9000 servers:

For XSCF unit 0 : xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

xscf#0-if

Interface between XSCF units (Inter SCF Network; ISN)

For XSCF unit 1: xscf#1-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#1-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

xscf#1-if

ISN

For takeover IP address:

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

386

lan#0

takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#0

lan#1

takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#1



In the M8000/M9000 servers, a takeover IP address can be used without a need to determine whether XSCF has been switched. By setting the LAN ports of the active XSCF unit as lan#0 and lan#1, they can be accessed with the names lan#0 and lan#1.



In the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers, the value of the lan#0 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#0, and the lan#1 is fixed with xscf#0-lan#1.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

shownetwork(8)

EXAMPLES



In the M8000/M9000 servers and when the takeover IP address has been disabled by setnetwork(8) command, nothing will be displayed even though the takeover IP address is specified by the shownetwork(8) command.



The setnetwork(8) command configures a network interface used by the XSCF.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> shownetwork xscf#0-lan#1 xscf#0-lan#1 Link encap:Ethernet

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56

inet addr:192.168.10.11

Bcast: 192.168.10.255

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask:255.255.255.0

Metric:1

RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 RX bytes:20241827 (19.3 MiB)

TX bytes:2089769 (1.9 MiB)

Base address:0x1000

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the information for XSCF-LAN#1 on XSCF unit 0 in the M3000/ M4000/M5000 server.

XSCF> shownetwork lan#1 xscf#0-lan#1 Link encap:Ethernet

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56

inet addr:192.168.10.11

Bcast: 192.168.10.255

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask:255.255.255.0

Metric:1

RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 RX bytes:20241827 (19.3 MiB)

TX bytes:2089769 (1.9 MiB)

Base address:0x1000

EXAMPLE 3

Displays the information for ISN on the XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> shownetwork xscf#0-if xscf#0-if Link encap:Ethernet

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56

System Administration

387

shownetwork(8)

inet addr:192.168.10.128 Bcast: 192.168.10.255 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask:255.255.255.0

Metric:1

RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 RX bytes:(0.0 B)

TX bytes:17010 (16.6 KiB)

Base address:0x1000

EXAMPLE 4

Displays the information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF Unit 0.

XSCF> shownetwork xscf#0-lan#0 xscf#0-lan#0 Link encap:Ethernet

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56

inet addr:192.168.11.10

Bcast:192.168.11.255

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask 255.255.255.0

Metric:1

RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 RX bytes:14541827 (13.8 MiB)

TX bytes:1459769 (1.3 MiB)

Base address:0x1000

EXAMPLE 5

Displays the information for the takeover IP address for XSCF-LAN#0.

XSCF> shownetwork lan#0 lan#0

Link encap:Ethernet

inet addr:192.168.1.10

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56

Bcast:192.168.1.255

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask:255.255.255.0

Metric:1

Base address:0xe000

EXAMPLE 6

Displays the current settings of XSCF network.

XSCF> shownetwork -i Active Internet connections (without servers) Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address tcp

388

0

0 xx.xx.xx.xx:telnet

Foreign Address xxxx:1617

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

State ESTABLISHED

shownetwork(8) EXAMPLE 7

Displays the information for XSCF unit 0 and XSCF unit 1 in the M8000/ M9000 servers.

XSCF> shownetwork -a xscf#0-lan#0 Link encap:Ethernet

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:56

inet addr: 192.168.11.10

Bcast: 192.168.11.255

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask:255.255.255.0

Metric:1

RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 RX bytes:12241827 (11.3 MiB)

TX bytes:1189769 (0.9 MiB)

Base address:0x1000

xscf#0-lan#1 Link encap:Ethernet

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:57

inet addr:192.168.10.11

Bcast: 192.168.10.255

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask:255.255.255.0

Metric:1

RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 RX bytes:20241827 (19.3 MiB)

TX bytes:2089769 (1.9 MiB)

Base address:0x1000

xscf#0-if

Link encap:Ethernet

inet addr:192.168.10.128

HWaddr 00:00:00:00:00:00

Bcast:192.168.10.255

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST

MTU:1500

Mask: 255.255.255.0

Metric:1

RX packets:54424 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:14369 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 RX bytes:0 (0.0 B)

TX bytes:17010 (16.6 KiB)

Base address:0x1000

xscf#1-lan#0

System Administration

389

shownetwork(8)

HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:59 inet addr:192.168.10.12

Mask:255.255.255.0

xscf#1-lan#1 HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:60

xscf#1-if HWaddr 00:00:00:12:34:61 XSCF>

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

390

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

applynetwork(8), setnetwork(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

shownotice(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

shownotice - display copyright and license information for the XSCF Control Package (XCP) shownotice [-c {copyright|license}] shownotice -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

The shownotice(8) command displays by page the copyright and, if available, license files for the XCP. When used without an option, shownotice displays copyright information and any available license information. You can display only the copyright or the license file by specifying the -c option. No privileges are required to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c {copyright|license} Specifies for display by page either the copyright file or the license file for the XCP. copyright Specifies for display only the copyright file. license Specifies for display only the license file, if a license file is available for your platform. If the license file for your platform is not available for the shownotice command, the license argument is not supported. -h Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Display Only Copyright Information

XSCF> shownotice -c copyright [Copyright text displays.]

EXAMPLE 2

Display Copyright and License Information

XSCF> shownotice [Copyright text displays.] [License text displays (if available).]

System Administration

391

shownotice(8)

392

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showntp(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showntp - display the NTP information which currently set for XSCF showntp {-l | -a | address | -s} showntp -h

DESCRIPTION

The showntp(8) command displays the NTP information which currently set for XSCF. The showntp(8) command can display the following information:

Privileges



NTP servers which have been registered to the XSCF network



Status of synchronization with the NTP servers



Stratum value which has been set to XSCF

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Displays all the NTP servers currently set for the XSCF network.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-l

Displays whether synchronization with an NTP server is being maintained.

-s

Displays the stratum value which has been set to XSCF.

System Administration

393

showntp(8)

OPERANDS

The following operand is supported: address

Specifies the IP address or the XSCF host name of an NTP server to be displayed. If the -a option is specified, the operand is ignored. A specified IP address is a set of four integer values delimited by the "." (period). The following address form is accepted: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where: xxx

An integer from 0–255. Zero suppression can be used to specify the integer.

The host name can be specified in the format that complies with RFC 1034. EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The setntp(8) command sets the NTP servers used in the XSCF network.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays all NTP servers being currently set.

XSCF> showntp -a server ntp1.example.com prefer # [1] ntp server name server ntp2.example.com # [2] ntp server name

EXAMPLE 2

Confirms synchronization with an NTP server and displays the results.

XSCF> showntp -l remote

refid

st t when poll reach

delay

offset

jitter

======================================================================== *192.168.0.27

192.168.1.56

2 u

27

64

377

12.929

-2.756

1.993

+192.168.0.57

192.168.1.86

2 u

32

64

377

13.030

2.184

94.421

LOCAL(0)

5 l

44

64

377

0.000

0.000

0.008

127.127.1.0

EXAMPLE 3

Displays the stratum value which has been set to XSCF.

XSCF> showntp -s stratum : 5

394

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showntp(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setntp(8)

System Administration

395

showntp(8)

396

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showpasswordpolicy(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showpasswordpolicy - display the current password settings showpasswordpolicy showpasswordpolicy -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showpasswordpolicy(8) displays the password policy settings. These include default password expiration settings for new accounts, pam_cracklib parameters, and the number of passwords to keep in password history for each user. You must have useradm privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying Password Policy Settings

XSCF> showpasswordpolicy Mindays:

0

Maxdays:

99999

Warn:

7

Inactive: -1 Expiry:

0

Retry:

3

Difok:

10

Minlen:

9

Dcredit:

1

Ucredit:

1

Lcredit:

1

Ocredit:

1

Remember: 3

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

397

showpasswordpolicy(8)

SEE ALSO

398

setpasswordpolicy(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showpowerupdelay(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showpowerupdelay - display the current settings for the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system startup showpowerupdelay showpowerupdelay -h

DESCRIPTION

The showpowerupdelay(8) command displays the current settings for the warmup time of the system and wait time before system startup. The following settings are displayed:

Privileges

warmup time

Warm-up time

wait time

Wait time before system startup

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

Displays usage statement.

The setpowerupdelay(8) command sets the warm-up time of the system and a wait time before system startup. EXAMPLE 1

Displays the warm-up time of the system and wait time before system startup.

XSCF> showpowerupdelay warmup time : 10 minute(s) wait time

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

: 20 minute(s)

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setpowerupdelay(8)

System Administration

399

showpowerupdelay(8)

400

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised April 2008

showresult(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showresult - display the exit status of the most recently executed command showresult showresult -h

DESCRIPTION

showresult(8) command displays the exit status of the most recently executed. showresult(8) is convenient for a remote control program to confirm whether the most recently executed command is successfully completed.

Privileges

No privileges are required to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays usage statement. display the exit status of setupfru(8).

XSCF> setupfru -x 1 sb 0 XSCF> showresult 0

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

401

showresult(8)

402

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showroute(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showroute - display routing information for an XSCF network interface showroute [-M] [-n] {-a | interface} showroute -h

DESCRIPTION

showroute(8) command displays the current routing information for an XSCF network interface. Routing information for the specified network interface or all the network interfaces can be displayed. The following information is displayed: Destination

Destination IP address

Gateway

Gateway address

Netmask

Netmask address

Flags

Flag which indicates the status of specified routing

Interface Privileges

U

route is up

H

target is host

G

use gateway

R

reinstate route for dynamic routing

C

cache entry

!

reject route

XSCF network interface name

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Displays routing information that is set for all XSCF network interfaces.

System Administration

403

showroute(8)

OPERANDS

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-n

Displays IP address without the name resolution of host name.

The following operand is supported: interface

Specifies the network interface whose information is to be displayed. One of the following values can be specified, depending on the system configuration. If this operand is specified with the -a option, the operand is ignored. ■

In the M3000/M4000/M5000 servers:

For XSCF unit 0: xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

For abbreviation: lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1



In the M8000/M9000 servers:

For XSCF unit 0: xscf#0-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#0-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

For XSCF unit 1 :

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

404

xscf#1-lan#0

XSCF-LAN#0

xscf#1-lan#1

XSCF-LAN#1

The setroute(8) command sets routing information for the XSCF network.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showroute(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays routing information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0.

XSCF> showroute xscf#0-lan#0 Destination

Netmask

Flags Interface

server1.example *

255.255.255.0

U

xscf#0-lan#0

default

0.0.0.0

UG

xscf#0-lan#0

EXAMPLE 2

Gateway

192.168.10.1

Displays routing information for XSCF-LAN#0 on XSCF unit 0 without the name resolution of host name.

XSCF> showroute -n xscf#0-lan#0 Destination

Gateway

Netmask

Flags Interface

192.168.10.0

0.0.0.0

255.255.255.0

U

xscf#0-lan#0

0.0.0.0

192.168.10.1

0.0.0.0

UG

xscf#0-lan#0

EXAMPLE 3

Displays all routing information for XSCF unit 0 and XSCF unit 1 in the M8000/M9000 server.

XSCF> showroute -a Kernel IP routing table Destination

Gateway

Netmask

Flags Interface

192.168.10.0

*

255.255.255.0

U

xscf#0-lan#0

default

192.168.10.1

0.0.0.0

UG

xscf#0-lan#0

Destination

Gateway

Netmask

Interface

default

192.168.10.1

0.0.0.0

xscf#1-lan#0

XSCF>

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setroute(8)

System Administration

405

showroute(8)

406

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showshutdowndelay(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showshutdowndelay - display the shutdown wait time at power interruption of the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) showshutdowndelay showshutdowndelay -h

DESCRIPTION

The showshutdowndelay(8) command displays the wait time before the start of system shutdown for when power interruption occurs in a system connected to the UPS. The time set by the setshutdowndelay(8) command is displayed. The default time set is 10 seconds.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays usage statement. Displays the wait time before the start of shutdown.

XSCF> showshutdowndelay UPS shutdown wait time : 600 second(s)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setshutdowndelay(8)

System Administration

407

showshutdowndelay(8)

408

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showsmtp(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showsmtp - display the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) configuration information showsmtp showsmtp [ -v ] showsmtp -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showsmtp(8) displays the SMTP configuration. When used without options, it displays current SMTP configuration data. You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: Displays usage statement.

-h

When used with other options or operands, an error occurs. Specifies verbose output.

-v EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

SMTP information includes the Mail Server and Reply addresses.

Displaying SMTP configuration

EXAMPLE 1

XSCF>

showsmtp

Mail Server: 10.4.1.1 Port: 25 Authentication Mechanism: smtp-auth User Name: jsmith Password: ******** Reply Address: [email protected]

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setsmtp(8)

System Administration

409

showsmtp(8)

410

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showsnmp(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showsnmp - display the configuration information and current status of the SNMP agent showsnmp showsnmp -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showsnmp(8) displays the configuration and information and current status of the SNMP agent. This includes: agent status, port, system location, contact and description, traphosts, SNMP version, and any enabled MIB modules. You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

XSCF>

Displaying SNMP Information for a System That Has Not Been Set Up showsnmp

Agent Status:

Disabled

Agent Port:

161

System Location:

Unknown

System Contact:

Unknown

System Description: Unknown

Trap Hosts: None SNMP V1/V2c: None

Enabled MIB Modules: None

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF>

Displaying SNMP Information for a Disabled System Set Up With SNMPv3 Trap Host showsnmp

Agent Status:

Disabled

Agent Port:

161

System Administration

411

showsnmp(8)

System Location:

SanDiego

System Contact:

[email protected]

System Description: FF1

Trap Hosts: Hostname

Port

Type

Community String

Username

Auth Protocol

--------

----

----

----------------

--------

--------------

host1

162

v3

n/a

jsmith

SHA

SNMP V1/V2c: None

Enabled MIB Modules: None

Displaying SNMP Information for a Enabled System Set Up With SNMPv1/ v2c Trap Host

EXAMPLE 3

XSCF>

showsnmp

Agent Status:

Enabled

Agent Port:

161

System Location:

SanDiego

System Contact:

[email protected]

System Description: FF1

Trap Hosts: Hostname

Port

Type

Community String

Username

Auth Protocol

--------

----

----

----------------

--------

--------------

host1

162

v1

public

jsmith

SHA

host2

162

v2c

public

n/a

n/a

host3

162

v3

n/a

bob

SHA

SNMP V1/V2c:

Status:

412

Enabled

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showsnmp(8)

Community String: public

Enabled MIB Modules: SP_MIB FM_MIB

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setsnmp(8)

System Administration

413

showsnmp(8)

414

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showsnmpusm(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showsnmpusm - display the current User-based Security Model (USM) information for the SNMP agent showsnmpusm showsnmpusm -h

DESCRIPTION Privileges

showsnmpusm(8) displays the current USM information for the SNMP agent. You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

XSCF>

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

Displaying SNMP Information for a System

EXAMPLE 1

showsnmpusm

Username

Auth Protocol

--------

--------------

jsmith

SHA

sue

MD5

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setsnmpusm(8)

System Administration

415

showsnmpusm(8)

416

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showsnmpvacm(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showsnmpvacm - display the current View-based Access Control Access (VACM) information for the SNMP agent showsnmpvacm showsnmpvacm -h

DESCRIPTION Privileges

showsnmpvacm(8) displays the current VACM information for the SNMP agent. You must have platadm or platop privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

Displaying SNMP Information for a System

EXAMPLE 1

XSCF>

showsnmpvacm

Groups: Groupname

Username

---------

--------

admin

jsmith, bob

Views: View

Subtree

Mask

Type

----

-------

----

----

all_view

.1

ff

include

Access:

EXIT STATUS

View

Group

----

-----

all_view

admin

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

417

showsnmpvacm(8)

SEE ALSO

418

setsnmpvacm(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showssh(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showssh - display the status, host public keys, fingerprint, or user public keys of the Secure Shell (SSH) service configured for the XSCF network showssh [-c hostkey] [-M] showssh -c pubkey [-u user_name] [-M] showssh -h

DESCRIPTION

showssh(8) command displays the status, host public keys, fingerprint, or user public keys of the SSH service configured for the XSCF network. The following information is displayed: SSH status

Validity of the SSH service

RSA key

Host public key in RSA format

DSA key

Host public key in DSA format

Fingerprint

Host public key in fingerprint format

When specified the display of user public key, the user public key number, which automatically numbered by system, and the user public key are displayed. Only SSH2 is supported for XSCF. Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: ■

To display the user public key of other user account: useradm



To display the information other than above: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -c hostkey

Displays a host public key. If the -c option is omitted, "-c hostkey" is assumed specified.

-c pubkey

Displays the user public key. If the -c option is omitted, "-c hostkey" is assumed specified

System Administration

419

showssh(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-u user_name

Specify the user account name to display the user public key. Should be specified with "-c pubkey." When the -u option omitted, the user public key of the current login user account will be displayed.



You can specify the automatically-numbered user public key number to delete the user public key by setssh(8) command.



The setssh(8) command makes settings for the SSH service in the XSCF network.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the information of host public keys.

XSCF> showssh SSH status: enabled RSA key: ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAt0IG3wfpQnGr51znS9XtzwHcBBb/ UU0LN08SilUXE6j+ avlxdY7AFqBf1wGxLF+Tx5pTa6HuZ8o8yUBbDZVJAAAAFQCfKPxarV+/5qzK4A43Qaigkqu/ 6QAAAIBM LQl22G8pwibESrh5JmOhSxpLzl3P26ksI8qPr+7BxmjLR0k= Fingerprint: 1024 e4:35:6a:45:b4:f7:e8:ce:b0:b9:82:80:2e:73:33:c4 /etc/ssh/ ssh_host_rsa_key.pub

DSA key: ssh-dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAJSy4GxD7Tk4fxFvyW1D0NUDqZQPY3PuY2IG7QC4BQ1kewDnblB8 / JEqI+8pnfbWzmOWU37KHL19OEYNAv6v+WZT6RElU5Pyb8F16uq96L8QDMswFlICMZgrn+ilJN Str6r8 KDJfwOQMmK0eeDFj2mL40NOvaLQ83+rRwW6Ny/yF1Rgv6PUpUqRLw4VeRb+uOfmPRpe6/ kb4z++lOhtp WI9bay6CK0nrFRok+z54ez7BrDFBQVuNZx9PyEFezJG9ziEYVUag/23LIAiLxxBmW9pqa/ WxC21Ja4RQ VN3009kmVwAAAIAON1LR/ 9Jdd7yyG18+Ue7eBBJHrCA0pkSzvfzzFFj5XUzQBdabh5p5Rwz+1vriawFI

420

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showssh(8)

ZI9j2uhM/3HQdrvYSVBEdMjaasF9hB6T/ uFwP8yqtJf6Y9GdjBAhWuH8F13pX4BtvK9IeldqCscnOuu0 e2rlUoI6GICMr64FL0YYBSwfbwLIz6PSA/yKQe23dwfkSfcwQZNq/ 5pThGPi3tob5Qev2KCK2OyEDMCA OvVlMhqHuPNpX+hE19nPdBFGzQ== Fingerprint: 1024 9e:39:8e:cb:8a:99:ff:b4:45:12:04:2d:39:d3:28:15 /etc/ssh/ ssh_host_dsa_key.pub

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the user public key of the current login user account.

XSCF> showssh -c pubkey Public key: 1 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAzFh95SohrDgpnN7zFCJCVNy+jaZPTjNDxcid QGbihYDCBttI4151Y0Sv85FJwDpSNHNKoVLMYLjtBmUMPbGgGVB61qskSv/ FeV44hefNCZMiXGItIIpK P0nBK4XJpCFoFbPXNUHDw1rTD9icD5U/[email protected] 2 ssh-rsa CSqGSIb3DQEJARYHZWUubWFpbDCBnzANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEA nkPntf+TjYtyKlNYFbO/YavFpUzkYTLHdt0Fbz/ tZmGd3e6Jn34A2W9EC7D9hjLsj+kAP41Al6wFwGO7 KP3H4iImX0Uysjl9Hyk4jLBU51sw8JqvT2utTjltV5mFPKL6bDcAgY9=efgh@example.com

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setssh(8)

System Administration

421

showssh(8)

422

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showstatus(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showstatus - display the degraded Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) showstatus [-M] showstatus -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

showstatus(8) command displays information about degraded units that are among the FRUs composing the system. You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

The following options are supported:. -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

The showstatus(8) shows the information concerning a unit failed or degraded and the unit on the upper hierarchy, among the FRUs composing the system. "Status:" will be followed by any of the status described below. Beside a unit failed or degraded, placed an "*" indicating the locating fault. Status

Description

Normal

The component is normally operating.

Faulted

The component is faulty and is not operating.

Degraded

The component is operating. However, either an error has been detected or the component is faulty. As a result, the component might be operating with reduced functionality or performance.

Deconfigured

As a result of another component's faulted or degraded status, the component is not operating. (The component itself is not faulted or degraded.)

Maintenance

The component is under maintenance. A deletefru(8), replacefru(8), or addfru(8) operation is currently underway.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the degraded units. In this example, a CPU module and memory

System Administration

423

showstatus(8) module in a CPU memory unit are degraded because of an error. XSCF> showstatus CMU#0; *

CPUM#0-CHIP#0 Status:Faulted;

*

MEM#00A Status:Faulted;

Displays the degraded units. In this example, a memory module on a memory board is degraded because of an error.

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF> showstatus MBU_B; MEMB#0; *

MEM#0A Status:Faulted;

EXAMPLE 3

Displays the degraded units. In this example, a CPU/memory board unit and memory module on a motherboard unit are degraded because of an error.

XSCF> showstatus MBU_B Status:Normal; *

MEMB#1 Status:Deconfigured;

*

MEM#3B Status:Deconfigured;

EXAMPLE 4

Displays the degraded units. In this example, a CPU/memory board unit is degraded because a crossbar unit is degraded.

XSCF> showstatus MBU_B Status:Normal; * *

EXIT STATUS

424

CPUM#1-CHIP#1 Status:Deconfigured; XBU_B#0 Status:Degraded;

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showtelnet(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showtelnet - display the current status of the Telnet service for the XSCF network showtelnet showtelnet -h

DESCRIPTION

showtelnet(8) command displays the current status of the Telnet service for the XSCF network. One of the following states is displayed:

Privileges

enable

The Telnet service is enabled.

disable

The Telnet service is disabled.

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXTENDED DESCRIPTION EXAMPLES

The settelnet(8) command makes settings for the Telnet service in the XSCF network. EXAMPLE 1

Displays the status of the Telnet service for the XSCF network.

XSCF> showtelnet Telnet status:enabled

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

settelnet(8)

System Administration

425

showtelnet(8)

426

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

showtimezone(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

showtimezone - display the XSCF time zone and Daylight Saving Time information of current settings showtimezone -c tz showtimezone -c dst [-m {standard | custom}] showtimezone -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

The showtimezone(8) command displays the XSCF time zone and Daylight Saving Time information of current settings. You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: useradm, platadm, platop, auditadm, auditop, domainadm, domainmgr, domainop, fieldeng Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: -c tz

Displays the time zone.

-c dst

Displays the Daylight Saving Time information.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m {standard | custom} Specifies the Daylight Saving Time information to be displayed. Either of the following can be specified. If the -m option omitted, it is regarded as "-m custom" specified. standard Displays the Daylight Saving Time information that has been set in the current time zone by default. custom Displays the Daylight Saving Time information that you set by using the settimezone(8) command. If the Daylight Saving Time is not set, nothing displayed. EXTENDED DESCRIPTION



The Daylight Saving Time information is displayed in the following format. ■

When specified custom: std offset dst[offset2] [from-date[/time] to-date[/time] ]

std

Abbreviations of time zone.

System Administration

427

showtimezone(8)

offset

Offset time of time zone and Greenwich mean time (GMT). Displayed in minus "–" in case the offset is plus, and displayed in plus "+" in case the offset is minus.

dst

Name of Daylight Saving Time.

offset2

Offset time of Daylight Saving Time and Greenwich mean time (GMT). Displayed in minus "–" in case the offset is plus, and displayed in plus "+" in case the offset is minus.

from-date[/time]

The starting time of Daylight Saving Time. Any of the following formats displays from-date. Mm.w.d Mm: Shows the month when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric from 1 to 12 comes in m. w: Shows the week when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric from 1 to 5 comes in, "1" for the first week and "5" for the last week in the month. d: Shows the day of the week when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric from 0 to 6 comes in, "0" for Sunday and "6" for Saturday. Jn Jn: The date when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leap-year day is not counted. n n: The date when Daylight Saving Time starts. Any numeric from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leap-year day is counted. In time, the time to switch to Daylight Saving Time is shown in the pre-switched time. hh:mm:ss

428

Shows the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. The default value is "02:00:00."

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showtimezone(8)

to-date[/time]

The termination time of Daylight Saving Time. Any of the following formats displays to-date. Mm.w.d Mm: Shows the month when Daylight Saving Time terminates. Any numeric from 1 to 12 comes in m. w: Shows the week when Daylight Saving Time terminates. Any numeric from 1 to 5 comes in, "1" for the first week and "5" for the last week in the month. d: Shows the day of the week when start Daylight Saving Time terminates. Any numeric from 0 to 6 comes in, "0" for Sunday and "6" for Saturday. Jn Jn: The date when Daylight Saving Time terminates. Any numeric from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leapyear day is not counted. n n: The date when Daylight Saving Time terminates. Any numeric from 1 to 365 comes in, "1" for January 1st. The leapyear day is counted. In time, the time to switch from Daylight Saving Time is shown in the pre-switched time. hh:mm:ss



Shows the time in "hh:mm:ss" format. The default value is "02:00:00."

When specified standard: From: ddd MM dd hh:mm:ss yyyy dst To:

ddd MM dd hh:mm:ss yyyy dst

ddd

a day of the week

MM

month

dd

day

hh

hour

mm

minutes

ss

second

yyyy

year

System Administration

429

showtimezone(8)

dst

The settimezone(8) command sets the time zone of the XSCF.



EXAMPLES

dst name

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the time zone.

XSCF> showtimezone -c tz Asia/Tokyo

EXAMPLE 2

Displays the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: the abbreviation of time zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving Time is JDT, Daylight Saving Time is 1 hour ahead, and the time period is from the last Sunday of March 2:00 to the last Sunday of October 2:00.

XSCF> showtimezone -c dst -m custom JST-9JDT,M3.5.0,M10.5.0

EXAMPLE 3

Displays the Daylight Saving Time information as follows: the abbreviation of time zone is JST, the offset from GMT is +9, the name of Daylight Saving Time is JDT, Daylight Saving Time is 1 hour ahead, and the time period is from the first Sunday of April 0:00 to the first Sunday of September 0:00.

XSCF> showtimezone -c dst JST-9JDT-10,M4.1.0/00:00:00,M9.1.0/00:00:00

EXAMPLE 4

Displays the Daylight Saving Time information that has been set in the current time zone by default.

XSCF> showtimezone -c dst -m standard

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

430

From: Sun Mar

9 03:00:00 2008 PDT

To:

2 01:59:59 2008 PDT

Sun Nov

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setdate(8), settimezone(8), showdate(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

showuser(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

showuser - display user account information showuser showuser [ [-a] [-M] [-p] [-u] [ user]] showuser [ [-a] [-l] [-M] [-p] [-u]] showuser -h

DESCRIPTION

showuser (8) displays XSCF user account information. If the user argument is specified, showuser displays account information for the specified user. If the user argument is not specified, then showuser displays account information for the current user. If the -l option is specified, showuser displays account information for all local users. When invoked with one or more of the options -a, -p, or-u, showuser displays information as described in the OPTIONS section below. When invoked without any of these options, showuser displays all account information.

Privileges

No privileges are needed for you to view your own account. You must have useradm privileges to run this command for any other user. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -a

Displays password validity and account state information. This is only valid for XSCF user accounts.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

OPERANDS

-l

Displays information on all local XSCF user accounts sorted by user login name. Cannot be used with the user operand.

-M

Displays text by page. This option provides a function that is the same as that of the more command.

-p

Displays all privileges assigned to the user. This is valid for local and remote users.

-u

Displays user ID (UID). This is valid for local and remote users.

The following operands are supported: user

Name of an existing user account. Cannot be used with the -l option.

System Administration

431

showuser(8)

EXAMPLES

Displays Password and Account Validity Information

EXAMPLE 1

XSCF>

showuser -a

User Name:

jsmith

Status:

Enabled

Minimum:

0

Maximum:

99999

Warning:

7

Inactive:

-1

Last Change:

Aug 22, 2005

Password Expires:

Never

Password Inactive: Never Account Expires:

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF>

Never

Displays Privileges Information showuser -p

User Name:

jsmith

Privileges:

domainadm@1,3-6,8,9 platadm

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

432

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

adduser(8), deleteuser(8), disableuser(8), enableuser(8), password(8), setprivileges(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

snapshot(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

snapshot - collect and transfer environment, log, error, and FRUID data snapshot -d device [-r] [-e [-P -{y|n}] [-S time [-E time]]

password]] [-L {F|I|R}] [-l] [-v] [ [-q]

snapshot -t user@host: directory [-e [-P password]] [-k host-key] [-l] [-L {F|I|R}] [-p password] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-S time [-E time]] snapshot -T [-D directory] [-e [-P password]] [-k host-key] [-l] [-L {F|I|R}] [-v] [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-S time [-E time]] snapshot -h DESCRIPTION

The snapshot(8) command provides a data-collection mechanism that enables rapid, reliable, and flexible retrieval of diagnostic information on the Service Processor. snapshot(8) collects the following data: Configuration, Environmentals, Logs, Errors, and FRUID information. It transfers data to the specified destination. snapshot opens an output file, the name of which is automatically generated based on the host name and IP address assigned to the Service Processor and the UTC time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) and date on the Service Processor at the time snapshot is invoked. For example: jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T2233-44. snapshot does not support user-specified file names for the output file. As files and command output are collected from the Service Processor, snapshot compresses the output data and writes it in the format of a .zip archive. snapshot stores the collected data on a remote network host or on an external media device, based upon the use of the -t, -T or -d option. To store the collected data on a remote network host using the -t option, you must specify a host name (or IP address), a target directory on the remote network host, and the user name of a user on the remote host. If you have already set an archive target using setarchiving(8), you can use the -T option to store the data on a remote network host using that same information, or use -T in conjunction with the -D option to change only the target directory. When storing data on a remote network host, snapshot opens a network connection using SSH to act as a data pipe to the remote file. It is possible to restrict data collection on some larger log files to a specific date range using the options -S and, optionally, -E. Encrypted network protocols, such as SSH and SSL, are used for transmission of the data across a network connection. The entire .zip archive itself can be encrypted using the -e flag. To decrypt a .zip archive that has been encrypted with this process, use the encryption password given to snapshot with the openssl

System Administration

433

snapshot(8)

command. The following example decrypts the file jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T22-33-44.zip.e: % openssl aes-128-cbc -d -in jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T22-3344.zip.e -out jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-07-08T22-33-44.zip

Every .zip archive generated by snapshot includes two files generated by snapshot itself. The first file, called README, contains the original name of the .zip archive, the name of the configuration file on the Service Processor used to create the .zip archive, the version of snapshot and whether log-only mode (the -l flag) was used to generate the archive. The second file, called CONFIG, is a copy of the actual configuration file used by snapshot to generate the archive. The data collected by snapshot may potentially be used by Service personnel to diagnose problems with the system. snapshot can collect different sets of data for different diagnostic purposes. The three different sets are named Initial, Root Cause, and Full, and are specified through the use of the -L option. Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported. -D directory

Used with the -T option, specifies a value for directory instead of the value set using setarchiving(8). The directory field must not begin with a "-" or a "~". Refer to the description of the -T option for more detailed information.

-d device

Specifies the external media device to use. The following option is available to -d: -r

-E time

Removes all files from the external media device prior to data collection. This option is not valid with the -t or -T options.

Specifies the end time for the time period for which data is collected. Used with the -S time option for the start time, defines the period of time for which log messages are collected by snapshot. Only those log entries created before the time specified by -E time are collected by snapshot. Refer also to the description of the -S option. time

Interpreted using strptime(3), using one of the following two formats: %Y-%m-%d,%H:%M:%S %Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S

434

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

snapshot(8)

-e

Encrypts the zip archive. Required when using -P password.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-k host-key

Used with the -t or -T option, sets the public key that the Service Processor uses to log in to the network host. This option is not valid with the -d option. Possible values for host-key are as follows: none This literal value specifies that a public key should not be used to authenticate the network host. download This literal value specifies that snapshot will use ssh to download a public host key for the network host and download the key from the host specified in the -t argument. snapshot displays the key’s md5 fingerprint and prompts for confirmation. If you accept the key, it is used for server authentication. If you reject the key, snapshot exits without doing anything. This is the default behavior in SSH Target Mode if -k is not specified. public The specified public key is used for server authentication. The host-key argument should be the complete public key of the network host, beginning with key type (the complete contents of /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key.pub on the network host).

Note – The public key should be enclosed in quotes to ensure that the shell treats it as a single word. -L {F|I|R}

Specifies which set of logs will be collected. F

Full log set.

I

Initial log set.

R

Root Cause log set.

If no log set is specified, the Initial log set is collected by default. -l

Specifies collecting only log files. Does not collect command output.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

System Administration

435

snapshot(8)

-P password

Used with the -e option, sets the encryption password used for encrypting the output file.

-p password

Specifies the user password used to log in to the host using SSH. This option is valid with the -t option, not with the -d or -T options.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-S time

Specifies the start time for the time period for which data is collected. Used with the -E time option for the end time, defines the period of time for which log messages are collected by snapshot. If no end time is specified, the target time period ends at the time the snapshot command is launched. Refer also to the description of the -E option. time

Interpreted using strptime(3), using one of the following two formats: %Y-%m-%d,%H:%M:%S %Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S

-T

Specifies executing snapshot in SSH target mode using the value for user@host:directory previously set using setarchiving(8). Can be used with the -D option to substitute an alternative value for directory.

Note – The user must create the target directory on the remote host, snapshot does not create the target directory. -t user@host:directory

Sets the network host and remote directory for data destination. The host field specifies the host name or IP address of the network host. The user field specifies the user name for the ssh login to the archive host. The directory field specifies the archive directory on the archive host where the output file should be stored. The directory field must not begin with a "-" or a "~".

Note – The user must create the target directory on the remote host, snapshot does not create the target directory. -v

Specifies verbose output. Displays all actions and commands as they are executed. If this option is specified with the -q option, the -v option is ignored.

Note – You may not have the required privileges to run all the commands that are executed by the snapshot configuration file. If this occurs, you will see error messages indicating these operations are not permitted. -y

436

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

snapshot(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

Modes of Operation The following is a brief overview of the modes of operation for the snapshot command. The first mode is SSH Target Mode. The data collector is run in this mode when it is invoked with the -t or -T option. In this mode, the data collector opens an SSH connection from the Service Processor to the specified target (after appropriate authentication) and sends the zip data archive through the SSH connection to the target host. The user must create the target directory on the remote host, snapshot does not create the target directory. The transmission encryption in this mode is provided by SSH. The second mode is USB Device Mode. The data collector is run in this mode when it is invoked with the -d flag. In this mode, the data collector’s output (which is the zip archive) is saved in a file on the USB device. The USB device should be formatted using the FAT32 file system. As in SSH Target mode, you can use the -e option to encrypt the zip file in this mode. However, no transmission encryption (such as SSH) occurs in this mode, since the data stays local to the Service Processor.

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Downloading a Public Key Using SSH

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x -k download Downloading Public Key from ‘jupiter.west’... Key fingerprint in md5: c9:e0:bc+b2:1a:80:29:24:13:d9:f1:13:f5:5c:2c:0f Accept this public key (yes/no)? Y Enter ssh password for user ‘joe’ on host ‘jupiter.west’ Setting up ssh connection to remote host... Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip Data collection complete.

EXAMPLE 2

Downloading a Host Key

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x Downloading Public Key from ‘jupiter.west’... Public Key Fingerprint: c9:e0:bc+b2:1a:80:29:24:13:d9:f1:13:f5:5c:2c:0f Accept this public key (yes/no)? y Enter ssh password for user ‘joe’ on host ‘jupiter.west’

System Administration

437

snapshot(8)

Setting up ssh connection to remote host... Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip Data collection complete.

EXAMPLE 3

Downloading With a User-Provided Public Key

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x -k “ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAwVFiSQNVBFhTTzq0AX5iQqCkkJjd6ezWkVGt mMkJJzzMjYK0sBlhn6dGEIiHdBSzO8QLAXb8N4Kq8JDOBpLSN4yokUPTcZQNxJaY A0W058Qgxbn” Enter ssh password for user ‘joe’ on host ‘jupiter.west’ Setting up ssh connection to remote host... Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip Data collection complete.

EXAMPLE 4

Log Files Only Using No Public Key

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/bob/logs/x -k none -l Enter ssh password for user ’bob’ on host ’mars.east’ Log only mode. No commands will be collected. Setting up ssh connection to remote host... Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip Data collection complete.

EXAMPLE 5

Downloading Using Encryption With Provided Password and No Public Key

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/bob/logs/x -k none -e -P password Output data will be encrypted. Enter ssh password for user ’bob’ on host ’mars.east’ Setting up ssh connection to remote host... Collecting data into [email protected]:/home/joe/logs/x/archive.zip Data collection complete.

438

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

snapshot(8) EXAMPLE 6

Downloading Using No Key to Invalid Directory

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/sue/logs/bad_dir -k none Enter ssh password for user ’sue’ on host ’saturn.north’ Setting up ssh connection to remote host... Failed to create remote file: /home/sue/logs/bad_dir/archive.zip Verify adequate disk permissions and disk space on target host Error opening SSH target Exiting with error 1

EXAMPLE 7

Downloading Public Key With Connectivity Failure

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/home/sue/logs/x -k download Downloading Public Key from ’saturne.west’... Error downloading key for host ’saturne.west’ Error opening SSH target Exiting with error 1

EXAMPLE 8

Downloading Public Key and Answering No to All Prompts

XSCF> snapshot -v -t [email protected]:/home/jill/logs/x -k download

-n Downloading Public Key from ‘earth.east’... Public Key: ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAwVFiSQNVBFhTTzq0AX5iQqCkkJjd6ezWkVGtmMkJJzzM jYK0sBlhn6dGEIiHdBSzO8QLAXb8N4Kq8JDOBpLSN4yokUPTcZQNxJaYA0W058Qgxbn Key fingerprint in md5: c9:e0:bc+b2:1a:80:29:24:13:d9:f1:13:f5:5c:2c:0f Accept this public key (yes/no)? no Public Key declined Error opening SSH target Exiting with error 1

System Administration

439

snapshot(8) EXAMPLE 9

Downloading Public Key Attempted by Unauthorized User

XSCF> snapshot -t [email protected]:/fakedir -p fake-password Downloading Public Key from ’fakehost.com’... Error downoading key for host ’fakehost.com’ Error opening SSH target Exiting with error 1

EXAMPLE 10

Downloading to External Media Device

XSCF> snapshot -d usb0 -r Testing writability of USB device....SUCCESS About to remove all files from device ‘usb0’. Continue? [y|n] : y Collecting data into /media/usb_msd/jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-04-17T22-4151.zip Data collection complete.

EXAMPLE 11

Limiting Data Collection for Certain Logs to a Date Range

XSCF> snapshot -d usb0 -S 2007-01-01,01:00:00

-E 2007-01-31_14-

00-00 Testing writability of USB device....SUCCESS Collecting data into /media/usb_msd/jupiter_10.1.1.1_2006-04-17T22-4151.zip Data collection complete.

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

440

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setarchiving(8), showarchiving(8), showlogs(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

switchscf(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

switchscf - switch the XSCF unit between the active and standby states switchscf [ [-q] -{y|n}] -t {Active | Standby} [-f] switchscf -h

DESCRIPTION

The switchscf(8) command switches the XSCF unit that the user is currently logged in to, between the active and standby states. The switchscf(8) command is available on the M8000/M9000 servers only. When the active XSCF unit currently logged in to is switched from active to standby or vice versa, the state of the standby XSCF unit is also switched.

Note – When switched, the session of the network which has been connected to the active XSCF is terminated. Caution – Usually, XSCFs cannot be switched while maintenance work is in progress. If "Switching of XSCF state is disabled due to a maintenance operation. Try again later." is displayed as a result from the switchscf(8) command and XSCFs cannot be switched, check whether the addfru(8), deletefru(8), replacefru(8), or flashupdate(8) maintenance command is being executed. If the command is being executed, wait until the command ends. If XSCFs cannot be switched though none of those maintenance commands is being executed, use the -f option to switch them. Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -f

Switches the state in a case XSCF state can't be changed due to a maintenance operation.

Caution – Since the -f option forcibly switches XSCF, limit the use of this option to such cases as when switching does not work in normal operations. -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

System Administration

441

switchscf(8)

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

-t Active

Switches the state of the XSCF unit to active.

-t Standby

Switches the state of the XSCF unit to standby.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command. EXAMPLE 1

Switches the state of the XSCF unit that the user is currently logged in to, to standby.

XSCF> switchscf -t Standby The XSCF unit switch between the Active and Standby states. Continue? [y|n]:y

EXAMPLE 2

Switches the state of the XSCF unit that the user is currently logged in to, to standby. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts.

XSCF> switchscf -t Standby -y The XSCF unit switch between the Active and Standby states. Continue? [y|n]:y

EXIT STATUS

442

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

testsb(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

testsb - perform an initial diagnosis of the specified physical system board (PSB) testsb [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-m diag=mode] location testsb [ [-q] -{y|n}] [-m diag=mode] -c {all | expansion} testsb -v [ -y|-n] [-m diag=mode] location testsb -v [-y|-n] [-m diag=mode] -c {all | expansion} testsb -h

DESCRIPTION

testsb(8) command performs an initial diagnosis of the specified PSB. The testsb(8) command is not available on the M3000 server. The configuration of the PSB and operation of each device mounted on the PSB are checked. After the diagnostics, the result is displayed. The PSB must not be configured in the domain, or the domain in which the PSB configured must be powered off. The result also can be seen in "Test" and "Fault" displayed by showboards(8) command.

Privileges

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

System Administration

443

testsb(8)

OPTIONS

The following options are supported:. -c {all|expansion} Specifies the target PSB to be diagnosed. One of the values shown below can be specified: all

Diagnoses all the PSB that are mounted.

If the following conditions not satisfied, it leads to an error. ■

The system has been powered off.



All of the target PSB are Uni-XSB.

expansion

Diagnoses all the PSB that are mounted on the expansion cabinet.

If the following conditions not satisfied, it leads to an error.

OPERANDS



All of the target PSB are Uni-XSB.

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m diag=mode

Specifies the diagnostic level of initial diagnosis. One of the values shown below can be specified: min

Normal (default)

max

Maximum

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-v

Displays a detailed message of initial diagnosis.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

The following operand is supported: Specifies only one PSB number. An integer from 00–15 can be specified.



When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



When the system board (XSB) belonging to the specified PSB is in any status below, the testsb(8) command results in an error. ■

444

All of the target PSB are not operating on the domain.

-h

location

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION



XSB is installed in the domain and this domain is in operation.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

testsb(8) ■

XSB is installed in the domain and this domain is in OpenBoot PROM (ok> prompt) status.



XSB is installed in the domain and this domain is power ON status, power OFF status, or reboot status.



The addboard(8), deleteboard(8), or moveboard(8) command is executed for XSB.



In case an XSB which belongs to the specified PSB is in Unmount or Faulted status, it may be excluded from the target of diagnosis and may not be shown in the diagnosis result. In a case like this, use the showboards(8) command to check the diagnosis result.



In case there are the settings for the warm-up time of the system and the wait time before system startup, a prompt appears to confirm whether or not it can ignore these settings to execute the testsb(8) command. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command.



The displayed diagnostic results of the testsb(8) command are as follows:

XSB

XSB numbers belonging to the specified PSBs. One XSB number is displayed for the Uni-XSB type, and four XSB numbers are displayed for the Quad-XSB type.

Test

Status of the initial diagnosis of XSBs. One of the following status values is displayed:

Fault

Unmount

No XSB could be recognized because no XSB is mounted or because an error occurred.

Unknown

Not tested.

Testing

Initial diagnosis is in progress.

Passed

Initial diagnosis ended normally.

Failed

An error was detected during the initial diagnosis. An XSB cannot be used or is in a degraded state.

XSB error. One or more states are displayed: Normal

Normal state.

Degraded

One or more components are degraded. Each XSB can operate.

Faulted

An XSB cannot operate because an error occurred.

System Administration

445

testsb(8)

EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Performs the initial diagnosis on PSB#00.

XSCF> testsb 0 Initial diagnosis is about to start, Continue?[y|n] :y SB#00 power on sequence started. 0end Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec] 0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end Initial diagnosis has completed. SB power off sequence started. [1200sec] 0.end SB powered off. XSB

Test

Fault

---- ------- -------00-0 Passed

Normal

00-1 Passed

Normal

00-2 Passed

Normal

00-3 Passed

Normal

EXAMPLE 2

Performs an initial diagnosis of PSB#01 with detailed messages displayed.

XSCF> testsb -v 1 Initial diagnosis is about to start. Continue? [y|n] :y SB#01 powered on sequence started. : : Initial diagnosis has completed. {0} ok SB power off sequence started. [1200sec] 0.end SB powered off. XSB

Test

Fault

---- ------- -------01-0 Passed

446

Normal

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

testsb(8) EXAMPLE 3

Performs the initial diagnosis on all the PSB that are mounted.

XSCF> testsb -c all Initial diagnosis is about to start. Continue? [y|n] :y SB power on sequence started. 0end Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec] 0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end Initial diagnosis has completed. SB power off sequence started. [1200sec] 0.end SB powered off. XSB

Test

Fault

---- ------- -------00-0 Passed

Normal

01-0 Passed

Normal

02-0 Passed

Normal

03-0 Passed

Normal

EXAMPLE 4

Ignores the settings for the warm-up time of the system and the wait time before system startup to perform the initial diagnosis on the PSB that are mounted.

XSCF> testsb -c all Initial diagnosis is about to start. Continue? [y|n] :y Ignore warmup-time and air-conditioner-wait-time, Continue?[y|n] :y SB power on sequence started. 0end Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec] 0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120end Initial diagnosis has completed. SB power off sequence started. [1200sec] 0.end SB powered off. XSB

Test

Fault

---- ------- --------

System Administration

447

testsb(8)

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

448

00-0 Passed

Normal

01-0 Passed

Normal

02-0 Passed

Normal

03-0 Passed

Normal

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addfru(8), deletefru(8), replacefru(8), setupfru(8), showboards(8), showfru(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

traceroute(8)

NAME

SYNOPSIS

traceroute - displays the route packets take to the specified network host or the network device traceroute [-n] [-r] [-v] [-m maxttl] [-p port] [-q nqueries] [-s src_addr] [-w wait] host traceroute -h

DESCRIPTION

The traceroute(8) command displays the route packets take to the specified network host or the network device. The route packets take indicates the router (gateway) which interconnects the specified host or the network device, and indicates what kind of the routers located on the route. The traceroute(8) command uses the TTL field of IP protocol and tries to elicit the ICMP TIME_EXCEEDED responses from every gateway on the route packets take to the specified network host or the network device.

Privileges

You must have one of the following privileges to run this command: ■

To execute the command to DSCP address: fieldeng



To execute the command to "localhost" or to the loopback address (127.0.0.0/8): fieldeng



To execute the command to Inter SCF Network (ISN): fieldeng



The case other than those above: No privileges are required.

Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information. OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-m maxttl

Specifies the maximum number of hops. It displays the gateways for the number of hops specified. If omitted, it is set to 30.

-n

With no reverse DNS lookup, outputs the IP address.

-p port

Specifies the port number of the UDP packet to be used. Valid only in case using the UDP packet. If omitted, it is set to 33434.

-q nqueries

Specifies the number of retries to a single gateway. If omitted, it is set to three times.

System Administration

449

traceroute(8)

OPERANDS

-r

Bypasses the routing table and directly sends the packet to the specified network host or the network device. If the desired host or the network device is not on the same physical network, it results in errors.

-s src_addr

Specifies the source address to start tracking the route.

-v

Displays verbose output. The size of the sending packet will be displayed.

-w wait

tSpecifies the timeout period in units of seconds. If omitted, it is set to 3 seconds.

The following operand is supported: host

EXAMPLES

Specifies the network host or the network device to send the packet. Can be specified with host name or IP address.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the route packets take to the host named server.example.com.

XSCF> traceroute server.example.com traceroute to server.example.com (XX.XX.XX.XX), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets 1

XX.XX.XX.1 (XX.XX.XX.1)

1.792 ms

1.673 ms

1.549 ms

2

XX.XX.XX.2 (XX.XX.XX.2)

2.235 ms

2.249 ms

2.367 ms

3

XX.XX.XX.3 (XX.XX.XX.3)

2.199 ms

2.228 ms

2.361 ms

4

XX.XX.XX.4 (XX.XX.XX.4)

2.516 ms

2.229 ms

2.357 ms

5

XX.XX.XX.5 (XX.XX.XX.5)

2.546 ms

2.347 ms

2.272 ms

6

server.example.com (XX.XX.XX.XX)

EXAMPLE 2

2.172 ms

2.313 ms

2.36 ms

Displays the detailed route packets take to the host named server.example.com. (XSCF-LAN=192.168.100.10)

XSCF> traceroute -v server.example.com traceroute to server.example.com (XX.XX.XX.XX), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets

450

1

XX.XX.XX.1 36 bytes to 192.168.100.10

1.792 ms

1.673 ms

1.549 ms

2

XX.XX.XX.2 36 bytes to 192.168.100.10

2.235 ms

2.249 ms

2.367 ms

3

XX.XX.XX.3 36 bytes to 192.168.100.10

2.199 ms

2.228 ms

2.361 ms

4

XX.XX.XX.4 36 bytes to 192.168.100.10

2.516 ms

2.229 ms

2.357 ms

5

XX.XX.XX.5 36 bytes to 192.168.100.10

2.546 ms

2.347 ms

2.272 ms

6

server.example.com 48 bytes to 192.168.100.10

2.172 ms

2.313 ms

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

2.36 ms

traceroute(8)

EXIT STATUS

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

451

traceroute(8)

452

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

unlockmaintenance(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

unlockmaintenance - forcibly release the locked status of XSCF unlockmaintenance [ [-q] -{y|n}] unlockmaintenance -h

DESCRIPTION

unlockmaintenance(8) command releases the locked status of XSCF forcibly. Normally, while the maintenance command addfru(8), deletefru(8), or replacefru(8) is in execution, XSCF is in the locked status. After the command complete, the lock is released. However, in case an error such as LAN disconnection occurred while executing any of the maintenance command, the XSCF lock may become unable to release. In such a case, you can execute the unlockmaintenance(8) command to forcibly release the locked status of XSCF.

Privileges

You must have fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION

EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-n

Automatically answers "n" (no) to all prompts.

-q

Suppresses all messages to stdout, including prompts.

-y

Automatically answers "y" (yes) to all prompts.

When the command is executed, a prompt to confirm execution of the command with the specified options is displayed. Enter "y" to execute the command or "n" to cancel the command. EXAMPLE 1

Unlocks the maintenance lock status.

XSCF> unlockmaintenance This command unlocks the maintenance lock which prevents the multiple execution of maintenance commands. *Never* use this command, except when the lock state remains by some reason. Careless execution of this command causes serious situation because it interrupts the running command and XSCF might not be able to recognize the parts. Continue? [y|n] :y

System Administration

453

unlockmaintenance(8) EXAMPLE 2

Unlocks the maintenance lock status. Automatically answers "y" to all prompts.

XSCF> unlockmaintenance -y This command unlocks the maintenance lock which prevents the multiple execution of maintenance commands. *Never* use this command, except when the lock state remains by some reason. Careless execution of this command causes serious situation because it interrupts the running command and XSCF might not be able to recognize the parts. Continue? [y|n] :y

EXAMPLE 3

Unlocks the maintenance lock status. Suppresses prompts, and automatically answers "y" to all prompts.

XSCF> unlockmaintenance -q -y XSCF>

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

454

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

addfru(8), deletefru(8), replacefru(8)

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

version(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

version - display firmware version version -c xcp [-v] [-t] version -c {cmu | xscf} [-v] version -h

DESCRIPTION

The version(8) command displays firmware version. The following versions can be displayed:

Privileges

xcp

The comprehensive version of the XSCF control package (XCP) firmware currently applied to the system.

cmu

The version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.

xscf

The version of XSCF firmware.

You must have platadm or fieldeng privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

EXAMPLES

The following options are supported: -c xcp

Displays the XCP version.

-c cmu

Displays the version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.

-c xscf

Displays the version of XSCF firmware.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-t

Displays information of the XCP version that is registered in the XSCF. This option is used together with "-c xcp".

-v

Displays detailed information. Specifying this option with "-c xscf" displays the same information as the usual information.

EXAMPLE 1

Displays the XCP version.

XSCF> version -c xcp XSCF#0 (Active) XCP0 (Current): 1020 XCP1 (Reserve): 1020

System Administration

455

version(8)

XSCF#1 (Standby) XCP0 (Current): 1020 XCP1 (Reserve): 1020

Displays the details of the XCP version.

EXAMPLE 2

XSCF> version -c xcp -v XSCF#0 (Active) XCP0 (Current): 1020 OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001 SCF

: 01.01.0001

XCP1 (Reserve): 1020 OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001 OpenBoot PROM BACKUP #0:

01.01.0001

#1:

01.02.0001

XSCF#1 (Standby) XCP0 (Current): 1020 OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001 SCF

: 01.01.0001

XCP1 (Reserve): 1020 OpenBoot PROM : 01.01.0001 SCF

: 01.01.0001

OpenBoot PROM BACKUP #0:

01.01.0001

#1:

01.02.0001

EXAMPLE 3

Displays the XCP version that is registered in the XSCF.

XSCF> version -c xcp -t XCP: 1020

456

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

version(8) EXAMPLE 4

Displays the details of the XCP version that is registered in the XSCF.

XSCF> version -c xcp -v -t XCP

: 1020

OpenBoot PROM: 01.01.0001 SCF

EXAMPLE 5

: 01.01.0001

Displays the version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.

XSCF> version -c cmu DomainID 00 : 01.01.0001 DomainID 01 : 01.01.0001 DomainID 02 : 01.01.0001 DomainID 03 : 01.01.0001 : DomainID 23: 01.01.0001

EXAMPLE 6

Displays the detailed version of OpenBoot PROM firmware.

XSCF> version -c cmu -v DomainID 00 : 01.01.0001 DomainID 01 : 01.01.0001 DomainID 02 : 01.01.0001 DomainID 03 : 01.01.0001 : DomainID 23: 01.01.0001

XSB#00-0

: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)

XSB#00-1

: 01.01.0001 (Reserve), 01.01.0001 (Current)

XSB#00-2

: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)

XSB#00-3

: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)

: XSB#15-3

: 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)

System Administration

457

version(8) EXAMPLE 7

Displays the version of XSCF firmware.

XSCF> version -c xscf XSCF#0 (Active)

01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)

XSCF#1 (Standby) 01.01.0001 (Current), 01.01.0001 (Reserve)

EXIT STATUS

458

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

viewaudit(8)

NAME SYNOPSIS

viewaudit - display audit records viewaudit viewaudit [-A date-time] [ -B date-time ] [ -C] [ -c classes] [ -D date-time] [-E endrecord] [-e events ] [ -i audit-ids] [-l] [ -m del] [ -n] [ -p privilege-results] [ -r return-values ] [ -S start-record] [ -u users] [-x] viewaudit -h

DESCRIPTION

Privileges

viewaudit(8) displays audit records. When invoked without options, viewaudit displays all current local audit records. When invoked with options, viewaudit displays only the selected records. By default, records are displayed in text format, one token per line, with a comma as the field separator. The output can be modified using the -C, -E, -l,-m del, -n, -S, or -x option. You must have auditadm or auditop privileges to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following options are supported: -A date-time

Selects records that occurred at or after date-time. The datetime argument is in local time. the -A and -B options can be used together to form a range. Valid values for date-time are: Absolute date-time : yyyymmdd[hh[mm[ss]]] where: ■

yyyy = year (1970 is the earliest valid value)



mm = month (01–12)



dd = day (01–31)



hh = hour (00–23)



mm = minutes (00–59)



ss = seconds (00–59)

The default value is 00 for hh, mm, and ss.

System Administration

459

viewaudit(8)

-B date-time

Selects records that occurred before date-time. The date-time argument is in local time. the -A and -B options can be used together to form a range. Valid values for date-time are either absolute or offset: Absolute date-time : yyyymmdd[hh[mm[ss]]] where: ■

yyyy = year (1970 is the earliest valid value)



mm = month (01–12)



dd = day (01–31)



hh = hour (00–23)



mm = minutes (00–59)



ss = seconds (00–59)

Offset date-time: +n d|h|m|s where: ■

n = number of units



d = days



h = hours



m = minutes



s = seconds

Offset is only available with the -B option and must be used with -A. (The default value is 00 for hh, mm and ss.) -C

460

Appends the number of records that matched the selection criteria to the end of the output.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

viewaudit(8)

-c classes

Selects records in indicated classes. classes is a commaseparated list of audit classes. A class may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The ACS_ prefix may be omitted. For example, the class of audit related events can be expressed as ACS_AUDIT, AUDIT or 16. The following are valid classes: all

Denotes all classes.

ACS_SYSTEM(1)

System-related events

ACS_WRITE(2)

Commands that can modify a state

ACS_READ(4)

Commands that read a current state

ACS_LOGIN(8)

Login-related events

ACS_AUDIT(16)

Audit-related events

ACS_DOMAIN(32)

Domain management– related events

ACS_USER(64)

User management–related events

ACS_PLATFORM(128)

Platform management– related events

ACS_MODES(256)

Mode-related events

-D date-time

Selects records that occurred on a specific day (a 24-hour period beginning at 00:00:00 of the day specified and ending at 23:59:59). The day specified is in local time in the following format: yyyymmddhhmmss (year,month,day, hour,minute,second). The time portion of the argument, if supplied, is ignored. Any records with timestamps during that day are selected. If any hours, minutes, or seconds are given, they are ignored. -D cannot be used with -A or -B.

-E end-record

Selects the last record matching the selection criteria to display.

System Administration

461

viewaudit(8)

-e events

Selects records of the indicated events. events is a commaseparated list of audit events. An event may be specified by its numeric value or its name. The AEV_ prefix may be omitted. For example, the event for SSH login can be expressed as AEV_LOGIN_SSH, LOGIN_SSH or 4. See showaudit -e all for a list of valid events.

-h

Displays usage statement. When used with other options or operands, an error occurs.

-i audit-ids

Selects records of the indicated audit session identifier. If you become interested in activity reflected in a particular audit record, you might wish to view all the audit records for that session. An audit-id is not persistent and can be reassigned across resets of the Service Processor. audit-ids is a comma-separated list of audit session identifiers. The audit-id is the number following the label subject in an audit file. For example, in the following listing, the audit-id is 1 (shown in boldface for emphasis). subject,1,bob,normal,telnet 45880 jupiter

462

-l

Prints one line per record.

-m del

Uses del as the field delimiter instead of the default delimiter, which is the comma. If del has special meaning for the shell, it must be quoted. The maximum size of a delimiter is three characters. The delimiter is not meaningful and is not used with the -x option.

-n

Specifies that UIDs and IP addresses should not be converted to user names or host names.

-p privilege-results

Select records according to the indicated privilege-results. privilege-results is a comma-separated list. privilege-results are: granted, denied, or error.

-r return-values

Selects records according to the indicated return values. returnvals is a comma-separated list of the values: success, or failure. success corresponds to a return value of 0. failure corresponds to a nonzero return value.

-S start-record

Selects the first record matching the selection criteria to display.

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

viewaudit(8)

EXAMPLES

-u users

Selects records attributed to indicated users. users is a comma-separated list of users. A user can be specified by user name or numeric UID.

-x

Prints in XML format.

EXAMPLE 1

Displaying Audit Records for December 12, 2005

XSCF> viewaudit -D 20051212

file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter

EXAMPLE 2

Displaying User Audit Records

XSCF> viewaudit -u jsmith

file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter header,37,1,login - telnet,jupiter,2006-01-11 11:31:09.659 -05:00 subject,1,jsmith,normal,ssh 45880 jupiter command,showuser platform access,granted return,0

EXAMPLE 3

Displaying Audit Records for Privileges

XSCF> viewaudit -p granted

file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter header,37,1,login - telnet,jupiter,2006-01-11 11:31:09.659 -05:00 subject,1,jsmith,normal,ssh 45880 jupiter command,showuser platform access,granted return,0

System Administration

463

viewaudit(8) EXAMPLE 4

Displaying Audit Records for Successful Access

XSCF> viewaudit -r success

file,1,2006-01-11 10:52:30.391 -05:00,20060111155230.0000000000.jupiter header,37,1,login - telnet,jupiter,2006-01-11 11:31:09.659 -05:00 subject,1,jsmith,normal,ssh 45880 jupiter command,showuser platform access,granted return,0 header,57,1,command - viewaudit,jupiter.company.com,2006-01-26 16:13:09.128 -05:00 subject,5,sue,normal,ssh 1282 saturn command,viewaudit platform access,granted return,0 ...

EXAMPLE 5

Displaying Audit Records Within a Range of Two Days

XSCF> viewaudit -A 20080108 -B +2d

file,1,2008-01-09 20:12:12.968 -08:00,20080110041212.0000000004.sca-m5k-0-0 file,1,2008-01-10 21:14:49.481 -08:00,terminated file,1,2008-01-10 21:14:49.485 -08:00,20080111051449.0000000005.sca-m5k-0-0

EXAMPLE 6

Displaying First 5 Records (of 4238) that Match a Date Range

XSCF> viewaudit -l -A 20070515 -B 20080110 -C -S 1 -E 5

file,1,2008-01-09 20:12:12.968 -08:00,20080110041212.0000000004.sca-m5k-0-0 header,63,1,command - setaudit,sca-m5k-0-0.sfbay.sun.com,2008-01-09 20:12:12.974 -08:00,s ubject,250,opl,normal,ssh 42759 san-e49000.West.Sun.COM,command,setaudit,delete,platform access,granted,return,0 header,37,1,login - ssh,sca-m5k-0-0.sfbay.sun.com,2008-01-09 20:12:14.455 08:00,subject, 252,scfroot,normal,ssh 42761 san-e4900-0.West.Sun.COM

464

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

viewaudit(8)

header,37,1,logout,sca-m5k-0-0.sfbay.sun.com,2008-01-09 20:12:14.800 08:00,subject,250,o pl,normal,ssh 42759 san-e4900-0.West.Sun.COM header,37,1,login - ssh,sca-m5k-0-0.sfbay.sun.com,2008-01-09 20:12:15.595 08:00,subject, 253,scfroot,normal,ssh 42762 san-e4900-0.West.Sun.COM 4238

EXIT STATUS

SEE ALSO

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

setaudit(8), showaudit(8)

System Administration

465

viewaudit(8)

466

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised September 2008

who(1)

NAME SYNOPSIS

who - display a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the XSCF who who -h

DESCRIPTION

who(1) displays a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the XSCF. The following information is displayed:

Privileges



XSCF user account name



Terminal used



Idle time



Login time



Remote host name

No privileges are required to run this command. Refer to setprivileges(8) for more information.

OPTIONS

The following option is supported: Displays usage statement.

-h EXAMPLES

EXAMPLE 1

Displays a list of the user accounts who are logged in to the XSCF.

XSCF> who

EXIT STATUS

USER

TTY

IDLE

FROM

HOST

scf

pts/0

00:00m

Dec 21 13:57

JJJJ.ggg.fujitsu.com

The following exit values are returned: 0

Successful completion.

>0

An error occurred.

System Administration

467

who(1)

468

SPARC Enterprise Mx000 Servers XSCF Reference Manual • Last Revised January 2007

Related Documents

Ilom Oracle I.pdf
October 2019 6
Ilom Oracle Ii.pdf
October 2019 10
Oracle
June 2020 26
Oracle
October 2019 44
Oracle
June 2020 9

More Documents from ""

Ilom Oracle Ii.pdf
October 2019 10
Ilom Oracle I.pdf
October 2019 6
Seguridad Investigacion.docx
November 2019 36
May 2020 10
Islam.docx
October 2019 18